ProStream 9000

Stream Processing Platform

RELEASE 10.5

Software

Rev A
Manual Part No.
[xxx] March 2015
Copyright © 2000—2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. Omneon, and the Omneon logo are trademarks of Harmonic Inc.
© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. Harmonic, the Harmonic logo, [all other Harmonic products mentioned] are trademarks, registered trademarks or
service marks of Harmonic Inc. in the United States and other countries. Dolby, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus and Dolby E are registered trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories. Implementations of AAC and HE-AAC by Fraunhofer IIS. Other company, product and service names mentioned herein may be
trademarks or service marks of their respective owners. All product and application features and specifications are subject to change at Harmonic’s sole
discretion at any time and without notice.

Disclaimer
Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be
deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. The information contained herein
is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes no responsibility or
liability arising from the use of the products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and purchase of this product do
not convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic. Nothing hereunder constitutes a
representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties.

Third-Party Product Trademarks

Adobe® After Effects®, Photoshop®, Flash® Professional, Premiere®
Avid® Media Composer®
Dolby® E, Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus
Jünger Audio™
Apple® QuickTime®
Microsoft® Mediaroom®
Microsoft® PlayReady®
DOCSIS® 3.0
Start Over® TV

Third-Party Copyright Notes

Dolby is a registered trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Dolby Digital, Dolby Digital Plus, Dolby Pulse, aacPlus, AC-3, and Dolby E are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Level Magic and Jünger are trademarks of Jünger Audio Studiotechnik GmbH.
MPEG Audio technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS http://www.iis.fraunhofer.de/amm/
PitchBlue® is a registered trademark of Vigor Systems.
QuickTime and the QuickTime logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc., used under license therefrom.

Trademark Acknowledgments
Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement or nondisclosure agreement. The software may be used or copied only in
accordance with the terms of those agreements.

May be covered by one or more of U.S. Patents No. 6,571,351; 6,696,996; 6,545,721; 6,574,225; 6,895,003; 6,522,649; 6,643,702; foreign counterparts
and pending patent applications.
This system is distributed with certain other software that may require disclosure or distribution of licenses, copyright notices, conditions of use, disclaimers
and/or other matter. Use of this system or otherwise fulfilling their conditions constitutes your acceptance of them, as necessary. Copies of such licenses,
notices, conditions, disclaimers and/or other matter are available in any one of the following locations: the LEGAL NOTICES AND LICENSES directory of the
distribution disk of the software, the root directory of the hard disk drive of the Products, or by contacting us at support@harmonicinc.com.

Notice
Information contained in this guide is subject to change without notice or obligation. While every effort has been made to ensure that the information is
accurate as of the publication date, Harmonic Inc. assumes no liability for errors or omissions. In addition, Harmonic Inc. assumes no responsibility for
damages resulting from the use of this guide.

License Agreement and Limited Warranty

1. AGREEMENT: This is a legal agreement ("Agreement") between you ("you" or "your") and Harmonic, or its appropriate local affiliate ("Harmonic", "we",
"us" or "our"). Use of our product(s) and any updates thereto purchased or validly obtained by you (the "Products"), and/or the Software (as defined below)
(collectively, the "System"), constitutes your acceptance of this Agreement. "Use" includes opening or breaking the seal on the packet containing this
Agreement, installing or downloading the Software as defined below or using the Software preloaded or embedded in your System. As used herein, the term
"Software" means the Harmonic owned software and/or firmware used in or with the Products and embedded into, provided with or loaded onto the

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 2

Products in object code format, but does not include, and this Agreement does not address, any third-party or free or open source software separately
licensed to you ("Third Party Software"). If you do not agree to this Agreement, you shall promptly return the System with a dated receipt to the seller for a
full refund.
2. LICENSE: Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement (including payment), we hereby grant you a nonexclusive, nontransferable license to use
the object code version of the Software embedded into, provided solely for use with or loaded onto the Product, and the accompanying documentation
("Documentation") for your internal business purposes. The Software and any authorized copies are owned by us or our suppliers, and are protected by law,
including without limitation the copyright laws and treaties of the U.S.A. and other countries. Evaluation versions of the Software may be subject to a time-
limited license key.
3. RESTRICTIONS: You (and your employees and contractors) shall not attempt to reverse engineer, disassemble, modify, translate, create derivative
works of, rent, lease (including use on a timesharing, applications service provider, service bureau or similar basis), loan, distribute, sublicense or otherwise
transfer the System, in whole or part except to the extent otherwise permitted by law. The Software may be operated on a network only if and as
permitted by its Documentation. You may make one (1) back up copy of the object code of the Software for archival purposes only. Evaluation Software will
be run in a lab, nonproductive environment. Results of any benchmark or other performance tests may not be disclosed to any third party without our prior
written consent. Title to and ownership of the Software and Documentation, and all copyright, patent, trade secret, trademark, and other intellectual property
rights in the System, shall remain our or our licensors' property. You shall not remove or alter any copyright or other proprietary rights notice on the System.
We reserve all rights not expressly granted.
4. LIMITED WARRANTY: (a) Limited Warranty. We warrant to you that, commencing on your receipt of a Product and terminating 1 year thereafter, the
System will perform substantially in accordance with its then-current appropriate Documentation. The Product (including replacements) may consist of new,
used or previously-installed components. (b) Remedies. If the System fails to comply with such warranty during such period, as your sole remedy, you
must return the same in compliance with our product return policy, and we shall, at our option, repair or replace the System, provide a workaround, or refund
the fees you paid. Replacement Systems are warranted for the original System's remaining warranty period. (c) Exclusions. EVALUATION SOFTWWARE
IS LICENSED ON AS-IS BASIS AND SUBJECT TO 4(d). We will have no obligation under this limited warranty due to: (i) negligence, misuse or abuse of
the System, such as unusual physical or electrical stress, misuse or accidents; (ii) use of the System other than in accordance with the Documentation; (iii)
modifications, alterations or repairs to the System made by a party other than us or our representative; (iv) the combination, operation or use of the System
with equipment, devices, software or data not supplied by us; (v) any third party hardware or Third Party Software, whether or not provided by us; (vi) any
failure other than by us to comply with handling, operating, environmental, storage or maintenance requirements for the System in the Documentation,
including, without limitation, temperature or humidity ranges. (d) Disclaimers. We are not responsible for your software, firmware, information, or data
contained in, stored on, or integrated with any Product returned to us for repair or replacement. SUCH LIMITED WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF, AND WE
SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM, ANY AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF SATISFACTORY QUALITY, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT.
WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE SYSTEM WILL MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS OR BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE. NO ADVICE OR
INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED FROM US OR ELSEWHERE, WILL CREATE ANY WARRANTY NOT EXPRESSLY STATED IN
THIS AGREEMENT. Some jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of implied warranties or limitations on how long an implied warranty may last, so such
exclusions may not apply to you. In that event, such implied warranties or limitations are limited to 60 days from the date you purchased the System or the
shortest period permitted by applicable law, if longer. This warranty gives you specific legal rights and you may have other rights which vary from state to
state or country to country.
5. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY: WE AND OUR AFFILIATES, SUPPLIERS, LICENSORS, OR SALES CHANNELS ("REPRESENTATIVES") SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO LOST REVENUES, PROFITS OR SAVINGS, OR THE COST OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS, HOWEVER CAUSED, UNDER CONTRACT, TORT,
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF WE WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES.
NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER PROVISIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT, WE AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES' TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU ARISING FROM
OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE SYSTEM SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE TOTAL PAYMENTS TO US UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR THE
SYSTEM. THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS SHALL NOT APPLY TO DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY TO PERSONS OR TANGIBLE PROPERTY IN ANY
JURISDICTION WHERE APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. YOU ARE SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR BACKING UP YOUR DATA AND
FILES, AND HEREBY RELEASE US AND OUR REPRESENTATIVES FROM ANY LIABILITY OR DAMAGES DUE TO THE LOSS OF ANY SUCH DATA OR
FILES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO SUCH
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. CONFIDENTIALITY: Information in the System and the associated media, as well as the structure, organization and code of the Software, are proprietary
to us and contain valuable trade secrets developed or acquired at great expense to us or our suppliers. You shall not disclose to others or utilize any such
information except as expressly provided herein, except for information (i) lawfully received by the user from a third party which is not subject to
confidentiality obligations; (ii) generally available to the public without breach of this Agreement; (iii) lawfully known to the user prior to its receipt of the
System; or (iv) required by law to be disclosed.
7. SUPPORT: Updates, upgrades, fixes, maintenance or support for the System (an "Upgrade") after the limited warranty period may be available at
separate terms and fees from us. Any Upgrades shall be subject to this Agreement, except for additional or inconsistent terms we specify. Upgrades do not
extend the limited warranty period.
8. TERM; TERMINATION: The term of this Agreement shall continue unless terminated in accordance with this Section. We may terminate this Agreement at
any time upon default by you of the license provisions of this Agreement, or any other material default by you of this Agreement not cured with thirty (30)
days after written notice thereof. You may terminate this Agreement any time by terminating use of the System. Except for the first sentence of Section 2
("License") and for Section 4(a) ("Limited Warranty"), all provisions of this Agreement shall survive termination of this Agreement. Upon any such termination,
you shall certify in writing such termination and non-use to us.
9. EXPORT CONTROL: You agree that the Products and Software will not be shipped, transferred, or exported into any country or used in any manner
prohibited by the United States Export Administration Act or any other export laws, restrictions, or regulations (the "Export Laws"). You will indemnify, defend
and hold us harmless from any and all claims arising therefrom or relating thereto. In addition, if the Products or Software are identified as export controlled
items under the Export Laws, you represent and warrant that you are not a citizen, or otherwise located within, an embargoed nation (including without
limitation Iran, Iraq, Syria, Sudan, Libya, Cuba, North Korea, and Serbia) and that you are not otherwise prohibited under the Export Laws from receiving the
Software. All rights to the Products and Software are granted on condition that such rights are forfeited if you fail to comply with the terms of this Agreement.
10. U.S. GOVERNMENT RIGHTS: The Software and the documentation which accompanies the Software are "Commercial Items," as that term is defined at
48 C.F.R. §2.101, consisting of "Commercial Computer Software" and "Commercial Computer Software Documentation," as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R.
§12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §227.7202, as applicable. Consistent with 48 C.F.R. §12.212 or 48 C.F.R. §§227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, as applicable, the
Commercial Computer Software and Commercial Computer Software Documentation are being licensed to U.S. Government as end users (a) only as
Commercial Items and (b) with only those rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the terms and conditions herein. Harmonic, 4300 North
First Street, San Jose, CA 95134 U.S.A.
11. GENERAL: You shall not assign, delegate or sublicense your rights or obligations under this Agreement, by operation of law or otherwise, without our
prior written consent, and any attempt without such consent shall be void. Subject to the preceding sentence, this Agreement binds and benefits permitted
successors and assigns. This Agreement is governed by California law, without regard to its conflicts of law principles. The U.N. Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods is disclaimed. If any claim arises out of this Agreement, the parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 3

relating to the future licensing of our Systems and other intellectual property rights, including this Agreement, from time to time. No waiver will be implied
from conduct or failure to enforce rights nor effective unless in a writing signed on behalf of the party against whom the waiver is asserted. If any part of this
Agreement is found unenforceable, the remaining parts will be enforced to the maximum extent permitted. There are no third-party beneficiaries to this
Agreement. We are not bound by additional and/or conflicting provisions in any order, acceptance, or other correspondence unless we expressly agree in
writing. This Agreement is the complete and exclusive statement of agreement between the parties as to its subject matter and supersedes all proposals or
prior agreements, verbal or written, advertising, representations or communications concerning the System.
Every reasonable attempt has been made to comply with all licensing requirements for all components used in the system. Any oversight is unintentional and
will be remedied if brought to the attention of Harmonic at support@harmonicinc.com.

Documentation Conventions
This guide may use some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information. The following symbols appear throughout this guide:

DANGER: The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to
you.

CAUTION: The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can adversely affect
the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult.

LASER DANGER: The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in
this product that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you.

NOTE: The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding. It
may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need, or it may provide
additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances.

IMPORTANT: The Important symbol calls your attention to information that should stand out when you are
reading product details and procedural information.

TIP: The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a
given procedure, but which, if followed, might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier, smoother,
or more efficient.

In addition to these symbols, this guide may use the following text conventions:

Convention Explanation
Typed Command Indicates the text that you type in at the keyboard
prompt.

<Ctrl>, <Ctrl>+<Shift> A key or key sequence to press.

Links The italics in blue text to indicate Cross-references, and

hyperlinked cross-references in online documents.
Bold Indicates a button to click, or a menu item to select.
ScreenOutput The text that is displayed on a computer screen.

Emphasis The italics text used for emphasis and document

references.

NOTE: You require Adobe Reader or Adobe Acrobat version 6.0 or later to open the PDF files. You can
download Adobe Reader free of charge from www.adobe.com.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 4

Table of Contents

Table of
Chapter 1: Logging into ProStream 9000.............................................11
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Full Device Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Logging into the Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Setting/Changing a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Restoring a Password. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 2: Features and Specifications................................................15

Introduction...................................................................................................................15
Main Features.....................................................................................................................15

Chapter 3: Configuring and Provisioning..............................................18

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Web Client Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
. 20
ProStream Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Stages of ProStream Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Before you Begin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Setting ETH1-2 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Viewing/Setting Platform Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Viewing/Setting Card Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Global Platform Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Managing Software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Activate Installed Firmware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Transfer and install an updated firmware version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Stream Config Page Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
What’s Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
. 31
Configuring Input Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Setting the GbE Port Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
.... 33
Configuring Input ASI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Configuring Input ASI Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Configuring Input GbE Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Input Information (Extraction) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Physical Input Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Logical Input Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
TS Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Program Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
PID Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Tables Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Input TS Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 5 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Table of Contents

Configuring Redundancy - Manual Revert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Configuring Redundancy - Automatic Revert Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
What’s Next. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
.
Chapter 4: Output Configuration.........................................................52
Configuring Output Ports and Provisioning the ProStream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Defining Broadcasting Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Configuring Network Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Provisioning the Output TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Configuring Output TS Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Adding Components to the TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Adding Tables to TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
PSIP Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Provisioning the TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
TS Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Adding Content to TS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Provisioning/Multiplexing a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Configuring a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Configuring Program Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Configuring a PCR PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Configuring Slate Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Configuring EAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Enabling DPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Event Signaling and Management (ESAM) Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Configuring Other Program Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Reference Service (RSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
. 93
Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Creating a Range of PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Defining PID Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Configuring PID
Configuring DPIDescriptors ................................................
PIDs....................................................................................................106
What’s Next...................................................................................................................... 109
Configuring the Output Port..............................................................................................109
Configuring an ASI Output Port....................................................................................109
Configuring a GbE Output Port.....................................................................................110
8VSB Modulation..............................................................................................................111

Chapter 5: Broadcast Transcoding......................................................112

Overview.................................................................................................................... 112
Video Transcoding............................................................................................................112
Video Transcoding Procedure..........................................................................................115
Transcoding an HD/SD Service....................................................................................115
Transcoding a PIP Service...........................................................................................125
Defining Output Bitrate of a Transcoded Service.........................................................128

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 6 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Table of Contents

PCR and Video Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Creating a Pool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Video Quality Enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Configuring Bitrate of Transcoded Stream at Service Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Audio Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Audio Transcoding Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Audio Transcoding Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Specific Codec Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Audio Transcoding Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Configuring Basic Transcoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Advanced Transcoding Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Logo Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Configuration Following the Output Stream Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Configuring Audio Level Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Chapter 6: Multiscreen Transcoding..................................................155

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
HD/SD/Sub-SD Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Processing Multiscreen Streams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Setting Device Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Creating an MBTS Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Configuring MBTS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Configuring Profile PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Configuring Common Video Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Configuring MBTS Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Configuring Audio Transcoding PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Associating ESs with a Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Multiscreen Image Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Chapter 7: Splicing.............................................................................177
Splicing Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
DPI Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
DPI Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Components of the Splicing Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
AD Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
. 178
Digital Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Splicing Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
AD Server Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Configuring the Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Defining Splicer-AD Server Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Defining Splicer Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Defining the SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Synchronizing Splicer Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Configuring Spliceable Services & SCTE35 PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Configuring Data PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 7 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Table of Contents

Monitoring Splicing....................................................................................................... 183

Chapter 8: CAS...................................................................................184
CAS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting General CAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Setting CAS General Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Configuring EIS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Configuring ECMG Servers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Setting EMMG Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Allocating ECM PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Allocating EMM PIDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
What’s Next... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Internal EIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Using Internal EIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Viewing Internal EIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
BISS Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
BISS Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Configuring BISS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Viewing SCGs and ECMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
. 196
Viewing ECMs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Using a PSIG Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chapter 9: Monitoring.......................................................................198
Viewing Alarms.................................................................................................................198
Alarms Log....................................................................................................................199

Chapter 10: Troubleshooting.............................................................201

Troubleshooting.........................................................................................................201

Chapter 11: Spreadsheet...................................................................227

Input Sockets....................................................................................................................227
Input Transports............................................................................................................... 229
Output Sockets................................................................................................................. 230
Output Transports.............................................................................................................233

Chapter 12: Administration and Platform Parameters........................234

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Selecting IGMP Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Setting Device Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Network Time Protocol (NTP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting Device Time Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Setting a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
. 236
Defining HW Clock Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Defining the Audio/Video Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Defining the Set-Top-Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Defining ACE Audio Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 8 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Table of Contents

Defining SNMP Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Video Inventory System (VIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Licenses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Licensing System Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Supported Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Working with Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Licenses Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
License Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Syslog Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Syslog Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Splicing Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Device Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configuring Device Redundancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Viewing Redundancy Group Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Advanced Redundancy Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Configuring EAS Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Configuring EAS Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Configuring GPI Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Configuring General ESAM Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Chapter 13: Backing Up & Restoring Device Configuration.................266

Overview.................................................................................................................... 266
Backing UP the Configuration.......................................................................................... 266
Restoring Configuration from a File..................................................................................266
Restoring Default Configuration........................................................................................267

Appendix A: Contacting the Technical Assistance Center...................268

Appendix B: Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information..............270
Important Safety Instructions............................................................................................270
Safety Symbols & Translated Safety, Warning & Caution Instructions (English)..............270
Symboles de sécurité et traduits de sécurité, d'avertissement et Attention Instructions
(français) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Sicherheit Symbole und übersetzt Sicherheit, Achtung & Vorsicht Anleitung (Deutsch) 276
Site Preparation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Product End-of-Life Disassembly Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Product Disassembly Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Safety Rules (English) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
. 281
Règles de sécurité (French) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
EU Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices – Class A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
.. 284
Product Regulatory Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Product Regulatory Compliance Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Product Environmental Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 9 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Table of Contents

EU REACH................................................................................................................... 287
China RoHS..................................................................................................................287
Other RoHS and REACH type Regulations..................................................................288
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)....................................................289
Battery Directive........................................................................................................... 289
WEEE Take-Back Request Program............................................................................289
Compliance with additional country specific environmental, safety and EMC standards: 290

Appendix C: Standard ES Types and Descriptors................................291

Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types........................................................................291
Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG)...............................................................291
Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)..................................................................292

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 10 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
1
Logging into ProStream 9000
Overview
In order to enhance the security of ProStream 9000, the device has two access levels. Each
access level applies to any form of communication with the device whether it is a web client or a
Telnet session. Each access level offers a different mode of work with the device. The following
table lists the various access levels and the available working modes:

Access Level Working Mode

Monitor Allows only to monitor the operation of the device.

Configure Allows to configure the device only via a web client and to define the
monitor access level password.

The various access levels require a correct username and password combination.

Access Level Username Password

Monitor monitor monitor

Configure configure configure

The current access level appears in the upper right hand corner of the web client.
Title bar User name

Full Device Configuration

The ProStream 9000 web client allows a full configuration of the device. It also allows the user to
monitor the ProStream 9000's status, view its alarms (if present), and troubleshoot them. This
manual describes and instructs you on how to configure and monitor the device via the web
client accessible through a web browser. The following table lists the web client specifications:

Table 1–1: Web client Specifications

Parameter Explanation
Screen resolution 1280 x 1024

Supported web browsers  Internet Explorer 9,10,11

 Chrome
 Firefox
 Opera
 Safari

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 11 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 1 Logging into ProStream 9000 Logging into the
Device

NOTE: Once you open any of the supported browsers, clean the cache. The browser may save previous GUI
files. To clean the cache, select Tools > Internet Options and in Browsing History click Delete.

TIP: After upgrading the firmware of a ProStream 9000 device, clean the cache as explained in the note
above.

Logging into the Device

To log in via a web client: 
1. In a browser, type in the IP Management address of the required device.
2. Click Login.
3. Type in the required username and password.
4. To save the password for the future, select Remember my
5. password. Click Ok.

The web client page appears and you may start working with the device according to the
permissions of your access level.

Setting/Changing a Password
To change a password, you do not need to click Apply. Once you enter all required information
and click Change Password the new password is applied.

To set or change a password: 

1. Select Administration > User Management
section.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 12 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 1 Logging into ProStream 9000 Restoring a Password

2. If you logged in as Configure, you are authorized to change your password or the password
of Monitor. In this case, the User Name field appears and you need to select either Monitor
or Configure and click Change Password of the required username.

3. In Current User Password, enter the required password.

4. In New Password, enter the new password.
5. In Re-type Password, re-enter the new
6. password. Click the Change Password button.
When logging in use the newly set password.
After three unsuccessful login trials, or if you forgot the password/user name, restore your
password. To restore the password, see the following section.

Restoring a Password
In case you forget your password, you can restore it. You have three trials to log in to the device.

If the login fails: 

1. Upon your failed trial to log in, a screen appears with the Specific Data Number.

Specific Data Number

NOTE: The Specific Data Number is generated with each failed login.

2. Record this unique number and immediately contact Harmonic Customer Support and
provide customer support with the Specific Data Number.
Harmonic Customer Support personnel provides you with a temporary password.
3. Open your browser, and type the following:
http://<device IP address>/resetpass.htm
4. Click Go.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 13 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 1 Logging into ProStream 9000 Restoring a Password

5. The Connect To <IP Address> dialog appears:

6. In Username, type backdoor.

7. In Password, type the password you received from Harmonic Customer Support.
8. Once you logged into the device, set a password for future logins. See Setting/Changing a
Password on page 12.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 14 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
2
Features and Specifications
Introduction
Harmonic ProStream 9000 is a highly integrated MPEG/DVB multiplexer, Transcoder with
internal processing card, scrambler and descrambler, for multimedia services carried over digital
broadcast networks. It features a modular, high-density chassis that is furnished with up to 5
IOMs (Input/Output Module) and up to 4 IPCs (Internal Processing Card) in a single one-rack-
unit (1-RU) chassis. The modularity of the platform allows easy field replacement of cards, as
well as field upgrades of SW and HW features.
This guide describes the configuration and monitoring instructions for ProStream 9000, a high
density stream processing platform.

Main Features
The following table lists the main features of ProStream 9000. The functionality of ProStream
9000 depends on the installed IPC. ProStream 9000 functions as an encoder or transcoder
according to the installed IPC type .
Table 2–1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

IP IOM  Dual GbE card
 Two independent ports per IP IOM
 line rate of 1 Gbps per IP IOM
 Maximum input and output bitrate is 500Mbps per IP IOM
 Quad GbE card
 2 ports of 1Gbps, connector type - RJ45
 2 ports of 1Gbps, connector type SFP
 1port of 10 Gbps (port 2), connector type SFP+
 The ports can be used as 4 independent ports or 2 pairs of
redundant ports (SFP to SFP and RJ45 to RJ45). Each pair can
be configured separately, in other words, one pair can be
Input and configured as redundant and one as independent. The transition
Output between modes is not service affecting for the primary port
Interfaces
ASI SCR IOM ASI-SCR - up to four ports per IOM
 Inputs and outputs DVB-ASI streams
 Supports Common Scrambling Algorithm scrambling
 May synchronize the device to an external clock coming from a
GPS receiver
 Bit rate:
 Maximum output bit rate of 187 Mbps
 Maximum input bit rate of 210 Mbps
 Supports packet size: 188 or 204 bytes

8VSB Up to four 8VSB input cards. See 8VSB Modulation on page 111.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 15 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 2 Features and Specifications Main Features

Table 2–1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

Parsing Dynamic Extracts incoming feeds and displays their structure and elements on
Tables parsing of input the control interface. It displays their bitrate, CC errors, SI PSI
structure etc.

Redundancy Input  GbE port redundancy

 Socket redundancy for each input socket
 Service redundancy

Multiplexing/  Maximum processing bit rate of 500 Mbps

provisioning  Full multiplexing (any input to any output)
options of the  Multicast of any input stream to multiple transport streams.
device  Multicast of services with different transcoding configuration
 IP multicast - supports IGMP ver 2/3
 Passing range of PIDs from any input to any output

DiviTrack over IP Statistical multiplexing - combines rate shaping using external

encoders

DiviTrackMX Statistical multiplexing - combines rate shaping using internal encoders

(HW
dependent,
type of IPC)
Transcoding When transcoding modules are mounted:
Processing (HW Transcodes incoming H264/MPEG2 programs and outputs them as
dependent, H264/MPEG2 CBR/VBR services.
type of IPC)
Scrambling  Supports the following scrambling algorithm:
 DVB-CSA
 AES-NSA2 - for future use
 AES Fixed Key Control Word (CW) scrambling of outgoing
TS over IP - for future use
 BISS
 Selective Encryption
 Functions as scrambler and in AES-CBC scrambling mode, also
as a de-scrambler. For future use only.
 Supports PSIG MUX protocol
 Supports ECMG redundancy
 Internal EIS

Transcoding Video
Bit Rate  VBR - in a pool
Output
 CBR - For HD up to 3 services per pool for best performances.
Bit Rate
Audio
 CBR only

TS Mirroring TS Mirroring - Duplicates each output TS (master) from any interface

(IP, ASI) to any other TS (slave) in any interface. Supports all master
Output functions such as: rate shaping, scrambling, RSS, tables generation,
Monitoring common PCR, PID range, DToIP.
IP Mirroring - Enables you to duplicate all output data from one port
(GbE1) of an IP IOM card to the other port (GbE2) of that card.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 16 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 2 Features and Specifications Main Features

Table 2–1: Main Firmware Related Features

Category Feature Description

SCT35 Insertion Receives an SNMP trap from SL 10 and generates an SCT35 cue
message

Table  Create CAT

Generation  Create SDT
 Create NIT

Table Re-  PSIP re-generation

generation  EIT re-generation

PID Prioritization In case of Over subscription, the ProStream 9000 starts dropping
PIDs according to their priority.
Output PID Range Allows to pass a range of PIDs from any input to any output.
Capabilities Up to 16 PID ranges per unit.

Slate Any service can be configured to have an alternative, or backup input

feed or source that is enabled on the output upon disruption of the
primary feed. It allows MSOs to inform their subscribers that they are
doing anything possible to restore the service.

Splicing Allows cable headends and broadcast affiliates to insert locally-

generated commercials and short programs into remotely distributed
regional programs before they are delivered to home viewers.

Emergency Enable MSO to automatically broadcast emergency alert messages

Alert System through pre-configured channels.
(EAS)

PCR Input PCR The PCR can arrive on any input PID, such as video, audio or not on
ES
Output PCR  The PCR can outflow on any PID. In transcoding, only over
video PID
 Generate PCR
 Common PCR

Management Management  Control Panel

and monitoring  Web client
interfaces  NMX (Harmonic's Digital Service Manager)

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 17 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
3
Configuring and
Overview
Once the ProStream 9000 is properly cabled and setup in your network, you may access it via
the web client in order to configure, provision and monitor it. The web client reads data from the
device and presents it in a User Interface (UI) called the Stand Alone GUI (SAG).
This chapter guides you on how to configure and multiplex a ProStream 9000 stand alone model
using the web client.

Web Client Page

Physical Inputs Menu Logical Inputs Logical Status bar Physical

pane pane Output pane Output pane

Active Alarms tab

The web client page includes the following sections:

Status Bar
The Status bar comprises:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 18 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Web Client Page

 <device Control > - It displays when the device is controlled by NMX. By default it is
Standalone.
 Device name drop-down list:
 Properties - Short cut to Platform > HW Inventory submenu.
 Identify Unit - Set to On to blink the lights on the front panel to locate the unit in a rack.
 IP Address - The management IP address.
 Alarm and Warning Count drop-down list - Click to display a list of the active alarms and
warnings
 System Date and Time
 User - Displays the current logged in user
 Context Sensitive Help

Device Control IP address Alarm Date and User Context

Device Name
and Time Sensitive Help
warning
count

Management Panes

Physical Inputs Logical Inputs Logical Outputs Physical Outputs

The four management panes are:

 The Physical Inputs pane - enables control and monitoring of the device physical input
interfaces. See Physical Input Pane on page 38.
 The Logical Inputs pane - enables control and monitoring of the input stream. See Logical
Input Pane on page 38.
 The Logical Outputs pane - enables control and monitoring of the output stream.
 The Physical Outputs pane - enables features of the device physical output interfaces.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 19 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Web Client Page

Right-click or double-click any object to see its drop-down menu or options (if available). To
identify elements, SAG uses a wide range of icons. See Stream Config Page Conventions on page
28.
ProStream Monitoring
Monitoring the ProStream operation involves alarm indicators displayed in the title bar of each of
the available Web client pages. The Alarm indicator is also a link to the Alarm page and provides
the following information:

Table 3–1: Alarm Indicators

Alarm Indication Explanation

Green Alarm button No active alarms.

Red Alarm button There is at least one active alarm. Once the mouse
pointer hovers on it, a hint appears displaying the alarm
description. Once you click it, the Alarm page opens.

Orange Warning There is at least one active warning. Once the mouse
pointer hovers on it, a hint appears displaying the alarm
button
description. Once you click it, the Alarm page opens.

(N) Active Alarms ‘N’ stands for the amount of registered alarms. Click the
link to open the Alarm page.

Stages of ProStream Configuration

Configuring the ProStream standalone model includes the following stages:
 ProStream Platform Parameters - configure Ethernet ports, slots and ASI port direction.
Usually, this configuration is a one time procedure performed as soon as you start
configuring the device. You can also view chassis and GbE port parameters and define
various global settings of the device.
 ProStream provisioning - during this stage you may read information from the device and
then multiplex it. Multiplexing is done mainly from the Stream Config page and includes the
following stages:
 Input configuration - enabling input ports and in the case of GbE input ports, setting port
and socket parameters.
 Reading data from the device (optional) - the Web client displays the updated data as
read from the device.
 Output configuration and multiplexing - with a GbE port, setting port and socket parameters,
setting TSs, services and PIDs parameters, arranging the output content (multiplexing),
setting output port parameters and enabling the port.
 Scrambling/Descrambling - when ProStream functions as a scrambler/descrambler, set
communication parameters to enable communication between the device and the
Conditional Access System (CAS). You may also view other CAS parameters such as
SCG, ECM and EMM parameters.
When ProStream functions as a descrambler using the AES protocol, set the
CWS*** parameters. For future use only.
 Transcoding - when ProStream functions as a re-encoder, set the re-encoding parameters.
Set these parameters via the Transcoding section.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 20 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

Before you Begin

Before you start configuring and provisioning the device, pay attention to the following:
 Greyed-out fields are for viewing only.
 To change parameter values, click in the field and type the required values. Once you click
away from the field, the web client interface is updated and displays the new parameters.
However, the parameters are not sent to the device.
 Every web page dialog includes a OK button. When clicking this button, you save the new
configuration without applying it to the device and you close the web page dialog.
 Every web page dialog includes a Save button. When clicking this button, you save the new
configuration without applying it to the device.
 To close a web page dialog without saving the configuration, click the button at the upper
right corner of each page.
 To send to the device the newly configured parameters, click Apply. Only when you click
Apply, you actually submit the new parameters to the device.
 To delete rows in a table, check the Select box and then click Delete/Remove.

Platform Parameters
Configure the platform parameters when you start the device configuration. Usually it is a one
time procedure that you do via the Platform page. :

Navigation pane Parameter table Graphical view

The Platform page is comprised of the following:

 Graphical view of the ProStream back panel - as you select each component, a table
presenting its parameters appears. The table enables you to configure and view various
parameters.
 Navigation pane - enables access to various platform related features:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 21 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

 Firmware Upgrade
 HW Inventory
 Management Port
 Backup/Restore
 DPI
 EAS
 Device Redundancy
 ESAM

Setting ETH1-2 Parameters

The IP address of the ETH1 port or ProStream primary IP address is configured as part of the
ProStream installation (see ProStream Installation and Start Up User’s Guide). However,
when required, you may change the IP address settings via Platform > Management Ports
page:

 To change configuration of ETH1,

ETH2
NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports
to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. ProStream uses the ETH1
port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems
(CAS) purposes.

1. Select Platform > Management Ports. The page opens and in the Graphical view ETH ports
1&2 are indicated.
2. In the table that appears for each port, type the required IP address, subnet mask, and
default gateway. You can view the MAC address of the port.
3. Click Apply to apply changes.
4. In case you configured ETH1, login to the new IP address.
NOTE: The MAC address is the physical address of the interface. The address is retrieved and presented in
the Platform page for viewing purposes only.

Viewing/Setting Platform Parameters

 To set the Platform Parameters:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 22 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

1. Select the Platform > HW Inventory.

2. Click any general area. The Platform Properties and Midplane sections appear.

3. In the Platform Properties table, view/configure the following chassis parameters:

 Device Model - indicates the device model

 Firmware Version - indicates the firmware version.
 Device Name - type in the required device name.
 Part Number - indicates the part number of the chassis.
 Serial Number - indicates the serial number of the chassis.
 Power Supply - indicates whether single or dual power supply.
 Reboot - enables a device reboot.
4. In the Midplane table, view/configure the following chassis parameters:

 Part Number - customer part number.

 HW Revision - indicates the HW
revision.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 23 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

Viewing/Setting Card Parameters

 To set the card parameters:
1. Select Platform > HW Inventory..
2. Select the required slot.
3. The slot presents the actual card inserted in the slot. You can select the required card as per
future slot configuration. To configure the slot, open the drop-down list and select the
required card:
 None - no IOM card in the slot
 ASI SCR - ASI IOM with scrambling support
 Dual GbE card - GbE 1G IOM card
 Quad GbE card - GbE 4G IOM card
 8VSB card. See 8VSB Modulation on page 111.

When you open the drop down list next to the slot, the selected card appears in the slot
whether you click Yes or No in the message that appears.
If you click Yes, physical inputs and outputs (physical sources and destinations) and logical
TSs are removed.
If you click No, physical inputs and outputs are removed without associated TSs.

Viewing Card Properties

 To view card properties, click the required card.
The IOM Slot # Card Information table is updated to display the following:
For ASI SCR IOM Card - view or set the required port direction.

Click the card to view its properties

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 24 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Platform Parameters

For a Quad GbE card - in the IOM Slot # Card Information section, view the following.

Card Type, Part Number, Serial Number, HW Version and FPGSA Version.
For a Dual GbE card - in the IOM Slot # Card Information section, view the following.

Card Type, Part Number, Serial Number, HW Version, FPGSA Version (in), FPGSA
Version (out), Firmware Version and EPLD Version.
For 8VSB card and ASI card - in the IOM Slot # Card Information section, view the type,
serial number and the part number of the card.

Global Platform Configuration

Identify unit
 To identify the unit, do the following:
1. In the Status bar, open the device name list and click Identify Unit.
2. Set to On to blink the lights on the front panel to locate the unit in a rack

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 25 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Managing Software

Reset unit
 To reset the unit, do the following:
 In the Status bar, open the device name list and click Reboot.

Access Platform Parameters

 To access the platform parameters, do the following:
 In the Status bar, open the device name list and click Properties.
The Platform page appears.

Managing Software
The Software Management page, found under Platform> Firmware Upgrade, enables you to do
the following:

 Transfer and install an updated version

 Change the running software - Up to two versions of the firmware package may reside on the
ProStream device. Usually, these are the current installed version and the previous installed
version. You may change the running firmware as required.

Activate Installed Firmware

 To activate the installed firmware, do the following:
1. Focus on the Install new Firmware section:

2. In Active Firmware, view the currently active firmware.

3. To select the required firmware, open the Select Firmware list and select the required
firmware.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 26 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Managing Software

4. To activate, click Activate.

Transfer and install an updated firmware version

 To transfer and install an updated firmware version, do the following:

1. Focus on the Install New Firmware section.

2. Click Browse and navigate to the location of the unzipped folder and select the file of the
following format:xx.xx.xx.xxx (the file does not have an extension.)
3. Click either of the following:
Install - transfers the firmware file to the device
Install and Activate - transfers and installs the firmware on the device
A message appears notifying that the transfer may take a few minutes.
4. Click Ok.
The selected package is transferred and installed on the device. Progress bars and flashing
messages appear indicating the stages and progress of the version transfer and installation.

CAUTION: During the software transfer, do not close the web browser and do not reset the device. Either
action may cause the device to hang without a valid firmware for booting up.

Once the transfer is complete, a message appears asking you whether the device should run
with the newly transferred version.
5. Click Ok.
A message appears asking you whether or not to reset.
6. Click Ok to reset and run the device with the newly transferred version.
A message appears asking you whether or not to close the web client.
7. Click Yes to close the web client page. This is the recommended option.

NOTE: If you click No, the web client page stays open during reset, but it cannot read data from the
device to display updated information.

8. Wait a few minutes until reset is complete and open the web client page.
 To organize the loaded software versions

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 27 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Managing Software

1. Focus on Manage Software.

2. Open the Software Firmware list to select the required version.

3. To remove a version from the device, click Remove.
NOTE: You can have up to three software versions loaded on the device.

Stream Config Page Conventions

The following pictures show the main icons used in the Configuration page:
PID Related icons:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 28 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Managing Software

Program and Table related icons

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 29 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning What’s Next

Port related icons

What’s Next
Now you are ready to start configuring the ProStream unit and provision services through it.

NOTE: GbE input/output port should be configured before provisioning services through the port.

Configuring Input Ports

ProStream devices may have GbE and/or ASI input ports. Each port may be individually enabled
or disabled.
The Configuration page contains the Physical Input and Logical Input panes for configuring
input ports.
The Input port configuration consists of the following stages:
 Set port mode - applicable only to GbE ports.
 Enable/disable ports - applicable to all types of input ports.
 Set port parameters - applicable to GbE ports only.
 Set socket parameters - applicable to GbE ports only.
 Read the current information from the input ports. (optional)

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 30 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

Setting the GbE Port Mode

 To set a GbE port mode, to the following:
1. In the Physical Inputs pane, right-click a slot with a GbE card and select
Properties.
The Properties dialog appears:

2. Pairs of ports (1&2 and 3&4) can work independently or in one of four redundancy modes.
The ports are configured as follows:
a. Open the appropriate Redundancy list and select the input mode required. The
redundancy schemes are listed in table Table 3–2 on page 31. You can select either of
the following:
Off (Independent)
Hot-Standby
b. If Manual redundancy is used, select the port to be Primary or Backup.
c. In the Advanced section, select the Card Ports Mode. You can select either of
the following:
Port 1 + 2 : 1 Gbps
Port 2 : 10 Gbps
Note the following regarding port redundancy:
 By default, port 1 is the primary port and port 2 of the same IOM module is the backup
port.
 Triggers for a port redundancy switch include: Missing PID, Zero Bitrate (Cable
Disconnect, Socket Loss), PAT/PNT Missing, CC Error.
The following table lists the redundancy modes supported:

Table 3–2: GbE Input Redundancy scheme

Parameter Explanation
Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually. The Active Port
parameter appears and you can set the active port.

Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port

failure. Once the primary is faulty, the device automatically
switches to the backup port and continues receiving content over
this port unless it is faulty. The device switches to the primary port
only when the backup fails.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 31 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

Table 3–2: GbE Input Redundancy scheme

Parameter Explanation
Manual Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port
failure. However, switching back to the primary, when fixed, is
performed manually.
To revert back to the primary port, you should change the Port
Usage to Automatic. Once the primary port is active, change Port
Usage to Manual Revert.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port

failure. However, the device automatically switches to the primary
when the primary has stabilized and even though the backup is
still in order. The baseline is that the primary is preferred.

Configuring Input ASI Cards

NOTE: Prior to configuration, define whether the ASI port is an input or output port.

 To configure Input ASI cards, do the following:

1. In the Physical Inputs pane, right-click a slot with a ASI card > Properties.
The ASI Properties dialog appears.

2. Select the required direction. See also ‘See Viewing/Setting Card Parameters on page 24.
By
default the port is an input port.
Configuring Input ASI Ports
1. In the Physical Inputs pane, right-click an ASI port and select Properties.

2. To enable the port, select Enable Port.

TIP: Enable the port only once port configuration is complete.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 32 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

3. In Description, edit the default description.

4. In Packet Size, select the required packet size.
You may select 188 (default) or 204 or Auto. In the latter, the ProStream automatically
detects the packet size.
In case of scrambling over ASI, you may select 188 (default) and 204 only.

Configuring Input GbE Ports

1. In the Physical Inputs pane, right-click a slot with a GbE card and select GbE Port >
Properties
The GbE Port # dialog appears:.

2. To enable the port, select Enable

Port.
TIP: Enable the port only once port configuration is complete.

3. In Description, edit the default description.

4. Configure and view the port parameters according to the following:
 Max Speed (Gbps) - view the maximum speed of the port, whether 1 Gbps or 10 Gbps
 IP Address - type in the required IP address.
 Subnet Mask - type in the required subnet mask.
 Gateway - type in the IP address of the gateway.
 MAC Address - (Read only) view the physical address of the GbE as retrieved from
the device.
 Autonegotiation - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Select

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 33 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end of the GbE
link also uses auto negotiation.
 SHutdown Port when Input is Missing- if selected, when no stream is detected at the
port, automatically port shifts to Link Down. Once a stream is detected, the port
automatically shifts to Link Up.
 Port redundancy section - configure redundancy. See Setting the GbE Port Mode
on page 31.
 SFP Vendor - (Read only) view the vendor of the SFP module mounted in the GbE
 port. SFP mode - (Read only) view the mode of the SFP module mounted in the GbE.
 SFP type - (Read only) view the type of SFP mounted. It can be either SX - usually used
for short distances (up to 200 m) or LX - usually used for long distances (10km and up).
5. Click Save to save the new configuration.
6. Click OK to save and close the dialog.

Socket Configuration
Content transmission of Video-over-IP utilizes sockets. Each socket is a terminal for a TS.
The socket is defined by a unique combination of destination IP address and UDP port.
You may add up to 128 sockets with up to eight MPTS (Multi Protocol Transport Services)
sockets. Each MPTS socket may stream up to 32 services.

NOTE: To change socket type (SPTS, MPTS), delete the socket and reconfigure with the new socket type.

You may add sockets either one by one or multiple sockets in one step. In addition, you may
delete sockets at any time.

Socket IP Address
When defining the IP address of a socket, follow the information provided below:

Table 3–3:

Type Class Available Range

Unicast A 1.0.0.0 - 126.255.255.255
Unicast B 128.0.0.0 - 191.255.255.255

Unicast C 192.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255

Multicast D 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

NOTE: The following reserved ranges should not be used:

reserved 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255,
reserved for administration 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

Adding a Socket
1. In the Physical Inputs pane, right-click a slot with a GbE card and select GbE Port > New
Socket.
2. To configure the socket, see following section.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 34 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

Configuring a Socket
1. In the Physical Input pane, right-click the required socket and click Menu.
2. From the menu select Properties.
The Input Sockets Properties dialog appears:

NOTE: This dialog is furnished with an horizontal and vertical scroll bars. To view the vertical scroll bar,
scroll with the horizontal one to the right most side of the dialog. Scroll the horizontal one to view all
configured sockets.

3. To enable the socket, click Enable.

4. Socket Description - enter a description of the socket to easily identify the socket.
5. IP Type - open the list to select whether a unicast or a multicast IP address.
6. IP Address - enter an IP as explained in Socket IP Address on page
7. 34. Port - enter a port number. The available range is 1- 65535.
8. Encapsulation Mode - select one of the following:
 UDP - according to the transmitter/receiver
 RTP - according to the transmitter/receiver. If FEC is used, select RTP
 HRTP - to receive a socket encapsulated in Harmonic RTP to allow connection between
ProStream 9000 devices.
 TCP - Input only. It applies to data with low rate that is transmitted over TCP
 DToIP -
9. FEC - relates to the extra data that is sent on a separate socket(s) and includes the number
of rows and columns to be calculated. Higher number of rows and columns, yields a higher
overhead and a better error correction ability. Define the FEC parameters as follows:

Option Explanation
No FEC No Forward Error Correction is applied

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 35 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Configuring Input Ports

Option Explanation
Pro-MPEG Annex B/SMPE 2022 Annex C FEC standard. Select to read input with
FEC data

10. De-Jittering
 De-Jittering Mode - open the list and select one of the following:
No De-Jittering
CBR
VBR
 Delay - Applies to No De-Jittering. Select the required delay in ms. For CBR and VBR
the delay is set to 500 ms.
 Average Input Bitrate (Mbps) - Applies to No De-Jittering. Select the required average
input bitrate.
11. Source Specific Multicast - you can add specific multicast source for the input. You can
manage the list with the Add and Remove buttons.

Adding a Socket or Multiple Sockets

The following table lists the available methods for adding a socket:

Table 3–4: Adding a Socket

Button Explanation
Increment IP Adds a single socket with the last socket configuration
with an incremented IP address

Increment Port Adds a single socket with the last socket configuration
with an incremented port number

Range Adds a range of sockets

1. In the Physical Input pane, right-click the required socket and click Menu.
2. Add by incrementing IP - From the menu select Duplicate > Increment IP.
A socket is added with incremented IP.

3. To add by incrementing a port - From the menu select Duplicate > Increment Port.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 36 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

A socket is added with incremented Port.

4. To add by adding a range - From the menu select Duplicate > Range.

 Number of Sockets Create - select the number of sockets to create

 Increment IP Address - check if the range is with incremented IP address
 Increment Port Number - check if the range is with incremented port number

Input Information (Extraction)

Both Physical Input and Logical Input panes provide information on the input stream.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 37 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

Physical Input Pane

The Physical Input section provides a general view of the input stream and you may drill down
any physical input component, slot, card, port to view the components. The following picture
shows drilled down physical inputs. The Physical Input section also indicates the slot number
and type of mounted card.

 To drill down a component

 Click, the arrow head next to the required component.

Arrow head turns

black

Click the arrow head

The arrow head turns black and points towards the exposed components.

Logical Input Pane

The physical input pane shows the input streams that are carried by each port listed in the
Physical Inputs pane. The streams in the Logical Inputs pane can be added to the TS programs
in the Logical Outputs pane. There are three view options:

Program view, Table view, PID view

 Program View
 Table View

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 38 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

 PID View
Each transport stream is represented in an expandable panel. The panel header shows:
 The TS name.
 The source IP address.
 The total bandwidth in Mbps.
 Alarm indicator when any element in the TS has an alarm state.
Expand each TS panel to view:
 Each program carried in the TS.
 The elementary streams in each program.
 The unreferenced PIDs.
 Alarm indicator for the individual ES and the program that carries it.
Customize the view to configure programs, tables, or PIDs. The default view is Program view.
In any view you can right-click on any object to see the drop-down menu options as the
following sections explain.

TS Extraction
In the Logical Inputs pane, open the drop-down menu and select one of the following options:
 Show Path - the Physical Inputs pane is updated to show the path of the TS
 Drop to: - enables you to move to the required logical output
 Source - shows the input source in the Physical Inputs pane
 Properties - open the Properties page. See
 Delete - allow to delete the TS

Show Path
 To show the path, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the TS section until the Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Show Path.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 39 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

The Physical Input pane is updated to show the path of the

TS:

Moving the TS to an Output

 To move the TS to an Output, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the TS section until the Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Drop To.

A menu with the available logical output TSs appears:.

3. Select the required output TS.

The Logical Output pane is updated to show the logical output TS. Once you select it, a
menu appears and you can select either of the following:
 Pass all Existing programs and PIDs
 Create PID range

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 40 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

Source
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the TS section until the Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Source..

 The Physical Inputs pane shows the physical input of the TS.
 The Input TS Sources dialog appears.
 To configure the source of the TS, do the following:
a. Primary Source Port - view the primary source port
b. Configure the input redundancy. See Input TS Protection on page 46.

TS Properties
 To configure the transport stream properties, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the TS section until the Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Properties..

3. TS ID - view the TS ID.

4. Description - enter a short description.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 41 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

5. Report CC Errors Alarm - Whether to show Continuity Counter errors, select one of the
following options:
Always
Never
Passed through PIDs
6. Bitrate - view the bitrate of the TS
7. CC Errors - view the number of CC errors
8. Click to reset counters.
9. Check the Eligible for Slate box to make a TS available for Slate configuration.

Program Extraction
In the Logical Inputs pane, select the required program and open the drop-down menu. Select
one of the following options include:
 Drop to: - allows you to move to the required program to logical output
 Properties - open the Properties page. See Program Properties on page 42.

Moving the Program to an Output

 To move a program to an output, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the required program section until the Menu icon
appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Drop To.
A menu with the available logical output TSs appears:

3. Select either of the following:

 TS > Add to TS. The program moves to the required output TS.
 Programs > Select Programs > Either create a new output program or select an existing
program > Create RSS (Reference program).

Program Properties
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, hover over the required program section until the Menu icon
appears.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 42 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Properties..

3. View the following:

Table 3–5: Program Extraction

Parameter Explanation
Program Number The program identification number.

Program Name The program name as extracted from the Service Description
Table (SDT).

PMT PID The PID over which the service’s PMT (Program Map Table)
is transmitted.

PCR PID The PID of the service’s PCR (Program Clock Reference).
Bitrare (Mbps) The program bitrate

Source ID A PSIP parameter

PID Extraction
In the Logical Inputs pane, select the required PID and open the drop-down menu. Select one of
the following options include:
 Show Path - allows to view the input source of the PID
 Drop to: - allows you to move to the required program to logical output
 Properties - open the Properties page. See

Moving the PID to an Output

 To move a PID to an output, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, select the required PID until the Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Drop To.
A menu with the available logical output TSs appears:
3. Select TS > Add to TS. The PID moves to the required output TS.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 43 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

PID Properties
1. In the Logical Inputs pane, select the required PID.
The Menu icon appears.
2. To open the menu, click the arrow-head and select Properties..

3. View the following:

Table 3–6: PID Extraction

Parameter Explanation
PID Indicates the PID number

ES Type The type of data carried over a specific elementary stream

This parameter does not apply to ghost PIDs or ECMs.

Language Applies to audio PIDs. Indicates the language.

Scrambled Indicates whether scrambled

Bitrate Indicates the bitrate of the PID
CC Errors Indicates the number of CC errors

CA System ID Applies to ECMs. Indicates the 16 bit CAS vendor ID.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 44 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input Information (Extraction)

Working in PID View

You can view the PIDs associated with the TS by shifting to the PID
view.

1. In the Logical Inputs pane, shift to the PID view.

2. Select the required TS.
The PIDs associated with the TS appear.

Tables Extraction
Table extraction is available via the Table
view.

1. In the Logical Inputs pane, shift to the Table view.

2. Select the required TS.
The tables associated with the TS appear.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 45 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

3. Click the required table and view the following::

Table 3–7: Table Extraction

Parameter Explanation
Table Version Indicates the table version

Number of Indicates the number of section

Section

TS ID Indicates the TS ID the table is associated with.

Program #, Indicates the program number and PMT PID the PAT table
PMT PID # is associated with

Input TS Protection
ProStream 9000 supports the following input TS protection:
 Enhanced TS protection - The input TS protection, allows any to any source redundancy.
For any input, you can configure up to five backup TS or port sources across all input
modules. For example, ASI port redundant to IP socket, ASI receiver redundant to IP
socket, etc'.
Backup sources are prioritized from 1 - highest to 5 - lowest. Upon redundancy switch the
device always tries to switch to the highest priority source which is in order.
 Input GbE or socket protection. For input TS over GbE port, also socket redundancy is
available. If, TS protection is enabled, only TS protection is available and other
internal platform redundancy types are not available.
Configuring TS protection includes the following stages:
 Configuring a primary and a backup source, TS (socket) or port.
For Enhanced protection:
Backup should have the same content as the primary TS.
You can define a backup source on the same port as the primary if over IP, or on a different
port and on a different IOM module.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 46 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

For socket:
You can define a backup source on the same port as the primary if over IP, or on a different
port and on a different IOM module.
 Selecting the required redundancy mode.
The following table lists the available modes:

Table 3–8: Input TS Redundancy modes

Parameter Explanation
Off No redundancy is required

Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually

Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically according to the

predefined triggers.
The device automatically switches between primary and backup
according to their activation status and backup priority. Switching from
the active one to the none active occurs upon failure of the active one
and while the none active is in order. Once primary source is fixed, the
device does not revert to the primary as in Automatic Revert. Backup
will remain active and it's redundant source will be the primary once it is
fixed.

Manual Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically according to the

predefined triggers. The device automatically switches between
primary and backup according to backup activation status and backup
priority. However, switching back to the primary, when fixed, is
performed manually.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch is performed automatically according to the

predefined triggers. However, the device automatically switches to the
source with the higher priority when the source is stabilized and even
though the source with lower priority is still in order. The baseline is that
the higher priority and primary are preferred. For each trigger you can
define the stabilized time. See Table 3–10 on page 50.

 Defining redundancy triggers per TS. When the source flows in over an 8VSBS, the triggers
are limited to Source Not Active.
 In case you select Automatic revert, configure stabilization time per redundancy trigger.

NOTE: For related alarms, see Troubleshooting on page 201.

Configuring Redundancy for Input TS - Manual Mode

 To configure redundancy for in put transport streams in manual mode, do the
following:
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select the Logical Input pane.
3.
From the TS Menu drop-down list select Source.
4.
To set redundancy, focus on Input Redundancy section.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 47 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

5. For GbE inputs, do the following, otherwise proceed to Step 6. Open the Redundancy Type
list
and select one of the following:
Enhanced Redundancy
6. Socket redundancy
7. Open the Redundancy Scheme list and select Manual.
Open the Number of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can select
8. up to five backup sources. Backups section is updated according to the number of backups.
The Active Port list is currently populated with Primary only. Once you define backup
sources, it is populated with these sources as well. Open it and select the required active
9. port. You should use this option once the primary active port has failed.
Click Apply.
Configuring Redundancy - Automatic Mode
When selecting the Automatic mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
By default, the alarm Source Not Active is always a trigger. You can view the elapsed time
between detecting a problem in the input port and raising the Source Fail alarm. To configure this
threshold, see Table 3–9 on page 49.
For other triggers, define whether to activate them as triggers for the redundancy switch and the
threshold for the redundancy switch.
The Bitrate Underflow and the Scrambled A/V triggers raise an alarm only when they are enabled
triggers.
 To configure redundancy Automatic mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select the Logical Input pane.
3. From the TS Menu drop-down list select Source.
4. To set redundancy, focus on the Input Redundancy section.
5. For GbE inputs, do the following, otherwise, proceed to Step 6. Open the Redundancy Type
list and select one of the following:
Enhanced Redundancy
Socket redundancy
6. Open the Redundancy Scheme list and select Automatic.
7. Open the Number of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can select
up to five backup sources. The Backups section is updated according to the number of
backups.
8. The Active Port list is currently populated with Primary only. Once you define backup
sources, it is populated with these sources as well. Open it and select the required active
port.
9.
MPEG Sync Loss (Socket Failure) is selected by default. Click MPEG Sync Loss (Socket
Failure). In Event Duration (sec), enter the required threshold time in seconds.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 48 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

10. For each trigger, enable/disable it and if enabled, set the threshold time in seconds. The
following table lists the available triggers and provides important information per trigger:

Table 3–9: TS Protection - Triggers for TS Redundancy

Trigger Explanation
CC Err Default threshold is 60 seconds and default number of
errors is 4. For example, if during 60 seconds four counter
errors occurred, a redundancy switch takes place.

PAT Missing Default threshold is 2 seconds.

PMT Missing This trigger requires also PAT missing as a trigger.

PIDs Bitrate Default threshold is 5 seconds.
Underflow If for five seconds, the bitrate is lower than the minimum
expected bitrate, a redundancy switch will take place.

Scrambled A/V Based on Scrambling Counter Bits for the routed A/V
PIDs only.

11. Click
Apply.
Configuring Redundancy - Manual Revert Mode
When selecting the Manual Revert mode, configure the triggers for the redundancy switch.
After a redundancy switch, if you wish to revert to the primary socket, change the mode to
Manual and revert, as explained below:
 To configure redundancy manual revert mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select the Logical Input pane.
3. From the TS Menu drop-down list select Source.
4. To set redundancy, focus on the Input Redundancy section.
5. For GbE inputs, do the following, otherwise proceed to Step 6.
Open the Redundancy Type list and select one of the following:
Enhanced Redundancy
Socket redundancy
6. Open the Redundancy Scheme list and select Manual Revert.
7. Open the Number of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can select
up to five backup sources. Backups section is updated according to the number of backups.
8. The Active Port list is currently populated with Primary only. Once you define backup
sources, it is populated with these sources as well. Open it and select the required active
port.
9.
MPEG Sync Loss (Socket Failure) is selected by default. Click MPEG Sync Loss (Socket
Failure). In Event Duration (sec), enter the required threshold time in seconds.
10. For each trigger, enable/disable it. See Table 3–9 on page 49. If trigger is enabled, set
the threshold time in seconds. See Table 3–10 on page 50.
11. Click Apply.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 49 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning Input TS Protection

12. Following a redundancy switch, to revert back to primary, or any backup source, open the
open the Redundancy Scheme list and select Manual.
13. Open the Activate list and select Primary.

Configuring Redundancy - Automatic Revert Mode

Define for each trigger whether to activate it as triggers for the redundancy switch and the
threshold for the redundancy switch.
When selecting the Automatic Revert mode, you need also to configure stabilization time. The
stabilization time should be bigger than the configured failover time.
 To configure redundancy Automatic Revert mode
1. Open the device browser and login. See Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select the Logical Input pane.
3. From the TS Menu drop-down list select Source.
4. To set redundancy, focus on Input Redundancy section.
5. For GbE inputs, do the following, otherwise proceed to Step 6. Open the Redundancy Type
list and select one of the following:
Enhanced Redundancy
Socket redundancy
6. Open the Redundancy Scheme list and select Automatic Revert.
7. Open the Number of Backups list and select the required number of backups. You can select
up to five backup sources. Backups section is updated according to the number of backups.
8. The Active Port list is currently populated with Primary only. Once you define backup
sources, it is populated with these sources as well. Open it and select the required active
port.
9.
MPEG Sync Loss (Socket Failure) is selected by default. Click MPEG Sync Loss (Socket
Failure). In Event Duration (sec), and do the following:
a. In Event Duration (sec), enter the required threshold time in seconds.
b. In Revert When Error Condition is Off for (sec), enter the required time for the error to
be off and to revert to primary.
10. For each trigger, enable/disable it. See Table 3–9 on page 49. If trigger is enabled, set
the threshold time in seconds. See Table 3–10 on page 50.
11. For each trigger, if enabled, set the required time for the error to be off and to revert to
primary (stabilization time) as the following table lists:

Table 3–10: TS Protection - Stabilization

Time
Trigger Parameter Name Explanation
CC Err CC Error Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 2
seconds and default number of
errors is 1. For example, if during 2
seconds 1 counter error did occur,
automatic revert takes place.

PAT Missing PAT/PMT Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 2

seconds.
PMT Missing PAT/PMT Auto Revert

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 50 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 3 Configuring and Provisioning What’s Next

Table 3–10: TS Protection - Stabilization

Time
Trigger Parameter Name Explanation
PIDs Bitrate Bitrate Auto Revert Default stabilization time is 2
Underflow seconds.

12. Click
Apply.
What’s Next
Once you have completed the input configuration, move to Output Configuration on page 52.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 51 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
4
Output Configuration
Configuring Output Ports and Provisioning the ProStream
The procedure of configuring the output ports and of provisioning the ProStream includes several
stages. The order in which you perform these stages varies according to the output port.
However, the essential stage is provisioning the device.

Defining Broadcasting Networks

To organize the broadcasting devices, define the networks and later on associate TSs to the
networks required. A network may include the following types of TSs:
Local TS - the TS is transmitted by the device you are currently configuring
External TS - the TS is transmitted by another device, yet it belongs to one of the networks of
your device. If a NIT table is generated for the network, the NIT also points to the external TSs.
 To define networks
1. Open the web client of the device.
2. Select the Configuration page.
3. Focus on the Logical Outputs pane.
4. Click the arrow-head in the title bar of the Logical Outputs pane to open a drop-down menu.

Click here to open the drop-down

menu

Select Network view

5. Select Network View and see that the Logical Outputs pane is updated to show all existing
networks.
6. To add a network, select Network (#) and from the drop-down menu select Add New.

7. Select the required network from the drop-down menu.

8. Select either of the following:
Properties - to configure the network properties
Delete - to remove networks.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 52 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Defining Broadcasting Networks

Configuring Network Properties

 To configure network Properties, do the following:
1. Once you have selected Properties as instructed in step 7, the Network# Properties dialog
appears.

2. In Network ID, enter the required Network ID. You can enter any available network ID as
long
3. as this value is not as another network ID.
4. In Network Name, enter the required name.
5. To overwrite the NIT version, tick Overwrite NIT version. The NIT Version box is enabled.
In Override enter the required NIT version. For NIT descriptors, see Provisioning the Output TS
TIP: Local TSs are associated with the network when configuring the TSs.

6. To add external TSs, click

Add.
NOTE: The local TSs are added while configuring the TS. See Provisioning the Output TS on page 61.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 53 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Defining Broadcasting Networks

Enter TS
required
information

7 Enter the following information:

.
TS ID - enter the required TS ID
Original Network ID - enter the network ID of the originating delivery system.
Location - view either of the following:
 Local - the TS is transmitted by the device
 External - the TS is transmitted by another device

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 54 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

8. To add a network descriptor, click Add in the Descriptor section..

Click to add network

descriptor

The Edit Descriptor dialog appears.

9. In the Edit Descriptor dialog Enter the following information:
Descriptor - enter the descriptor type as defined by the DVB standard.
Value in Hex- enter the value according to the SDV standard.

TIP: If the TS is transmitted with a NIT, the NIT points to both local and external TSs and the table
includes all configured descriptors.

10. Click OK.

Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only

To output streams via a GbE output port, configure the sockets first. A socket is a terminal for a
TS. Each socket is defined by a unique combination of an IP address and UDP port.
You may add up to 128 sockets and add multiple sockets in one step. In addition, you may
delete sockets at any time.
 To add a socket
1. In the Physical Output section, select a GbE port.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 55 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

2. In the drop-down menu, select Add New.

A new socket is added to the port.

 To configure a socket
1. In the Physical Output section, select the required socket.
2. Select either of the following:
 New socket - click the new socket to open the Socket Properties dialog.
 Existing socket - In the drop-down menu, select Properties..

3. Configure the socket as follows:

 Enable - select to enable the socket.
 Socket Description - enter a short description that identify the socket.
 Source TS - The list is populated with the incoming TSs. Select the required incoming TS.
 IP Type - open the list and select whether the IP is Unicast or Multicast.
 IP Address - the IP address of the socket. type in the destination IP address according to

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 56 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

the following table:

Table 4–1: Destination IP Address

Type Class Available Range

Unicast A 1.0.0.0 - 126.255.255.255

Unicast B 128.0.0.0 - 191.255.255.255

Unicast C 192.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255

Multicast D 224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

NOTE: The following reserved ranges should not be used:

reserved: 224.0.0.0 - 224.0.0.255,
reserved for administration: 239.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255

 UDP Port - the UDP port to listen on. The available range is 1- 65535.
TIP: You can sort IP/UDP columns by double clicking the columns headings.

Encapsulation Mode - select either of the following:

 UDP - according to the transmitter/receiver
 RTP - according to the transmitter/receiver. If FEC is used, select RTP. The FEC
section appears:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 57 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

4. Focus on the FEC section. FEC (Forward Error Correction) requires extra data for detecting
and correcting the errors. The extra data is sent on a separate socket(s) and includes the
number of rows and columns to be calculated. Higher number of rows and columns, yields a
higher overhead and a better error correction ability. Define the FEC parameters as follows:

Parameter Explanation
Enable Select to apply FEC
Num of Col Enter the number of columns to be
calculated

Num of Row Enter the number of rows to be calculated

2D Only Select to enable the 2 dimensional Forward

Error Correction option, that is the
calculation includes columns only.

5. Disable Scrambling - generates a clear TS at the output.

6. Focus on the Bitrate section and configure the following:
 Bitrate - The bitrate mode of the output TS. Options are:
CBR
VBR with No Null Padding - VBR without added null PIDs to maintain the bitrate
 Bitrate (Mbps) - the required bitrate in Mbps of the output TS.
7 To configure advanced parameters, select the Advanced tab.
.

8. To configure, continue according to the following steps:

9. Static Destination MAC - select to use a static MAC address as the transport's primary
destination. when Static Mode is enabled, enter the Static MAC of the destination port of the
TS.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 58 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

10. IP Packet Size (Bytes) - Open the IP Packet Size and select the IP packet size ranging from
188 - 1316 bytes. The packet size is derived from the number of MPEG packets that
are packed in a single IP packet, as indicated in the following table:

Table 4–2: IP Packet Size

IP Packet Size MPEG Packet

131 7
6
112 6
8
940 5

752 4

564 3

376 2
188 1

NOTE: The larger the IP packet size is, the more MPEG packets it carries and the overhead is
smaller.
11 Time to Live - select the TLL for this IP datagram.
.
Focus on Source IP Address and configure according to the following:
12
.
Port’s Own IP - select to set the packet source (sender) IP address as the IP address of
the port.
14 Override - select to set the packet source (sender) IP address to a diffrent IP address.
. Once selected, enter the required IP address.
15 Source UDP Port - select the packet source (sender) UDP port.
.
16. Focus on the QoS (Quality of Service) and configure according to the following steps:
17. To define the method to mark and classify packets, open the QoS Type list and select one of
the following:
 IP Precedence - The original standard used to classify and prioritize types of traffic.
Select the values to make up the TOS with IP Precedence octet. The structure is shown
here:
Table 4–3: Structure

Precedence TOS Not Used

Bits 3 4 1

Deafult Value Normal Service (0x0) Routine (0x0)

NOTE: The implementation used by Harmonic is described in RFC 1349.

 DiffServ - TOS with (DSCP) Differentiated Services Code Point is a 6-bit field allowing
more combinations and more routing behavior possibilities, such as PHB (per-hop
forwarding behavior). For Class/Drop Probability, the first 3 bits are the class selector
and the next 3 bits are drop probability. For Assured Forwarding, select AF11 to AF43.
For

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 59 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port
Only

Expedited Forwarding, select EF. The structure is shown

here:
Table 4–4: EF Structure

DiffServ Point Not Used

Bits 6 2

Deafult Value 000000 00

NOTE: For definitions of these behavior settings, see RFC 2474, RFC 2597, RFC 2598.

 Free Entry - Allows entry of any binary value into the TOS field octet. This is included to
provide complete flexibility for TOS field definition, as needed. For example, it can be
used for proprietary TOS definitions, or in case another TOS paradigm is introduced.
18. To define the precedence option, open the Precedence list and select one of the following:
 Routine (0x0)
 Priority (0x1)
 Immediate (0x2)
 Flash (0x3)
 Flash Override (0x4)
 Critical (0x5)
 Internetwork Control (0x6)
 Network Control (0x7)
19. To define the type of service option, open the Type of Service list and select one of the
following:
 Normal Service (0x0)
 Minimize Monetary Cost (0x1)
 Maximize Reliability (0x2)
 Maximize Throughput (0x4)
 Minimize Delay (0x8)
20. To enable VLAN Tagging, do the following:
a. Set VLAN Tagging Mode to 802.1Q
b. Enter VLAN Identifier
c. Check Drop Eligible Indicator if required
d. Select the Priority Code Point from the drop-down list:

Integer Key
0 Best Effort (Default)
1 Background

2 Excellent Effort
3 Critical Applications

4 Video, <100 ms latency and jitter

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 60 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Integer Key
5 Voice, <10 ms latency and jitter

6 Internetwork Control

7 Network Control

Provisioning the Output TS

When provisioning the output TS, you may do the following:
 Configure TS Properties
 Associate the TS with a network ID
 Define whether to scramble with a fixed key
 Determine which tables to create in the TS level. Available tables vary according to the port
type that outputs the TS. See Adding Tables to TS on page 62.
 Set time zones, if broadcasting time offset information (TOT) is important. See Configuring
TOT
on page 75
 Decide whether to mirror the TS. See TS Mirroring on page 79.
NOTE: The following instructions refer to TSs to be output over a GbE port or ASI port, unless indicated
elsewhere.

 Add content to the TS. See Adding Components to the TS on page

62.
Configuring Output TS Properties
 To configure output TS properties, do the following:
1. Select the required TS and from the drop-down menu select
Properties.

2. In TS ID, enter the required ID number.

3. In TS Description, enter a short description of the TS.
4. To associate the TS with a network, open the Network ID list and select the network ID.
The list is populated with the networks IDs defined during Network configuration. See
Defining Broadcasting Networks on page 52.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 61 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

5. To enter a scrambling Key focus on Scrambling Key. The Scrambling Key section allows you
to define whether you want to scramble the TS with a fixed key or not. You can select either
of the following:
 None - No scrambling is required and the TS is output as a clear transport. In Fixed Key
application, select this option on the Descrambler.¦
 Fixed Key - Select to allow scrambling each socket with a different key. It prevents mass de-
scrambling by unauthorized viewers in the very rare cases that the keys are unveiled. In
Fixed Key application, select this option on the Scrambler.
6. Click OK.

Adding Components to the TS

Prior to provisioning the TS, you can add the following:
 Program
 PID
 Injected EMM
 Injected ECM
 Passed EMM
You can also manage the table added to the TS. See Adding Tables to TS on page
62.

To add a component to the TS
1. Select the required TS and from the drop-down menu select Add New.
2. Select one of the following:
 Program - added under Program
 PID - added under Unreferrenced PIDs
 Injected EMM - added under CA PIDs
 Injected ECM - added under CA PIDs
 Passed EMM - added under CA PIDs
See also Adding Content to TS on page 79.
Adding Tables to TS
 To select the tables you wish to configure for this transport, do the following:
1. In Logical Outputs pane, switch to Tables view.
2. Select the required TS and from the drop-down menu select Properties.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 62 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

The Output TS Properties dialog appears:

Table view

Select Properties

Output TS
Properties dialog in
Table view

3. Open the Displayed Tables list and select one of the following:
 None - The device does not generate tables for this transport
 MPEG (PSI) - PAT, CAT, and PMT tables
 ATSC (PSIP) - Enables configuration of external PSIP table generation for this TS.
(PAT, PMT, CAT, MGT, VCT, EIT and ETT). See
 DVB (PSI/SI) - PAT, CAT, PMT, NIT, SDT, EIT, TDT and TOT.
The following table lists the tables, the tables available and references to step-by-step
instructions:

Table 4–5: Table Reference Table

Table Displayed Tables Reference to Table Info.

PAT  MPEG (PSI) Configuring PAT on page 64
 ATSC (PSIP)
 DVB (PSI/SI)

PMT  MPEG (PSI) Configuring PMT on page 64

 ATSC (PSIP)
 DVB (PSI/SI)

CAT  MPEG (PSI) Configuring CAT on page 70

 ATSC (PSIP)
 DVB (PSI/SI)

NIT  DVB (PSI/SI) Configuring NIT on page 71

SDT  DVB (PSI/SI) Configuring SDT on page 72
EIT  ATSC (PSIP) Configuring EIT on page 74
 DVB (PSI/SI)

TDT  DVB (PSI/SI) Configuring TDT on page 75

TOT  DVB (PSI/SI) Configuring TOT on page 75
MGT  ATSC (PSIP) Configuring MGT on page 76
VCT  ATSC (PSIP) Configuring VCT on page 76

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 63 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Table 4–5: Table Reference Table

Table Displayed Tables Reference to Table Info.

EIT  ATSC (PSIP) Configuring EIT in ASCT (PSIP) Mode on page 78
ETT  ATSC (PSIP) Configuring ETT on page 78

Configuring PAT
You can create a Program Associated Table that contains the PMT PIDs of all services included
in the TS. The version control of the PAT is per TS.
 To configure a PAT, do the following:
1. In Output TS Properties select one of the following:
MPEG (PSI)
ATSC (PSIP)
DVB (PSI/SI)
2. To view PAT information, click the arrow-head next to the PAT and view the
displayed information:

3. To configure the PAT, from the drop-down menu, select

4. Properties.
Open the PAT Mode list and select one of the following options:
None - Device does not generate PAT.
Generate - Device generates PAT.¦
5. Pass - Device passes the PAT without any changes.
a. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.
b. TS ID - select the TS ID
c. Table Version - by default version control is automatically incremented upon changes to
the table. However, once you tick Override, the table version is changed manually only
and you should select the required table version, from 0 to 31. Version control is
configured per TS.
d. Reference NIT - tick to add to the PAT a pointer that the TS carries a NIT.
6. Once you have selected Pass, configure the following:
a. Input TS - select the required input TS
b. Input PID - select the required input PID

Configuring PMT
1. In Output TS Properties select one of the following:
MPEG (PSI)
ATSC (PSIP)
DVB (PSI/SI)
2. To view PMT information, click the arrow-head next to the
PMT.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 64 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

A list of all the TS programs with their PMT PID

appears:

3. To configure the PMT, select the required PMT PID and from the drop-down menu, select
Properties.

4. Mode - open the Mode list and select one of the following:
 None - the components of the service are streamed without any PMT.
 Generate - the default option. The ProStream creates a new PMT for the service.
See Step 5.
 Pass - the ProStream transfers the Input PMT to an output stream without changing or
manipulating it. The PAT includes a reference to this PMT. See Step 6
 Regenerate - the device creates a PMT according to the program configuration and input
descriptors. See Step 7.
 Conditional PMT - the output program is configured as a dynamic program and you can
select the input program ID for the reference PMT. When selected, PMT is generated at
the output as long as the program flows into the device.
If the input program disappears from the input PAT, the output PSI are updated
according to the changes in corresponding input service:
The service is removed from the output
PAT The device does not stream out the
PMT
The device does not raise any alarm regarding this service.
See Step 7.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 65 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

5. Once you have selected Generate, configure the following:

a. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.

b. Table Version - by default version control is automatically incremented upon changes to
the table. However, once you tick Override, the table version is changed manually only
and you should select the required table version, from 0 to 31. Version control is
configured per TS.
6. Once you have selected Pass, configure the following:

a. Input TS - select the required input TS

b. Input PID - select the required input PID

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 66 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

7 Once you have selected Regenerate, or Conditional Generate, configure the following:
.

a. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.

b. Table Version - by default version control is automatically incremented upon changes to
the table. However, once you tick Override, the table version is changed manually only
and you should select the required table version, from 0 to 31. Version control is
configured per TS.
a. Input TS - select the required input TS
b. Input PID - select the required input PID
8. To add a descriptor to the PMT, do the following. Applies to Generate, Regenerate
and
Conditional
a. Focus onGenerate modes:section.
the Descriptor

Descriptor section

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 67 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

b. Click Add. The following dialog opens:

9. Open the Descriptor list and select the required descriptor. The list of descriptors is
comprised of the following:

Table 4–6: Descriptors in Descriptor Tag List

Listed Descriptors Explanation

Pre-defined descriptors  Registration descriptor
 Language descriptor
 Platform descriptor
 Integrated signaling descriptor

User Defined Descriptors This section includes descriptors that you need to define
by entering the descriptor details in hexadecimal. See
Standard ES Types and Descriptors on page 291.

10. Configure the descriptor as required. Typically, enter in Value in Hex, the required value.
In case of a CA descriptor, configure the following:

 In CAS ID (4 Digits), enter the required ID

 In CAS PID, select the required CAS PID
 In Private Data, enter a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. You
can enter it either in ASCII or in Hex by selecting either ASCII or HEX.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 68 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

In case of a Registration descriptor, configure the following:

 In Format Identifier, enter the required format identifier

 In Additional Identification Info:, enter the additional information.
11 Click OK.
.
The descriptor is added to the list of descriptors. You can edit them by clicking Edit.

Filtering a Descriptor at a TS Level

You can remove input descriptors in TS level, resulting in removing the indicated input
descriptors from all services of the output TS. To filter the input descriptors, enter in the Stream
Descriptors TAG Filters box the descriptor TAGs you wish to remove from the output TS.
1. While in Table view, In Output TS Properties select one of the following:
MPEG (PSI)
ATSC (PSIP)
DVB (PSI/SI)

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 69 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

2. Select the PMT container and from the drop-down menu select Properties.

Select the PMT container

3. By default Descriptors is selected. Click Add.

4. Open the list of descriptors and select the required one.
5. Click OK.

Configuring CAT
ProStream creates a Conditional Access Table. This table contains information that is used by
an access device (such as a set top box with a smart card) to decode programs that are part of
a Conditional Access System. See also Allocating EMM PIDs on page 189.
Version control is configured per TS.
 To configure CAT, do the following:
1. In Output TS Properties select one of the following:
 MPEG (PSI)
 ATSC (PSIP)
 DVB (PSI/SI)
2. To configure the CAT, from the drop-down menu, select
3. Properties. Open the CAT Mode list and select one of the
following options:
 None - Device does not generate CAT.
 Generate - Device generates CAT.¦
 Pass - Device passes the CAT without any changes.
4.
Once you have selected Generate, configure the following:

a. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 70 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

b. Table Version - by default version control is automatically incremented upon changes to

the table. However, once you tick Override, the table version is changed manually only
and you should select the required table version, from 0 to 31. Version control is
configured per TS.
5. Once you have selected Pass, configure the following:

a. Input TS - select the required input TS

b. Input PID - select the required input PID
Configuring NIT
ProStream creates a (Network Information Table). Version control is per network.
 To configure NIT, do the following:
1. In Output TS Properties select DVB (PSI/SI).
2. To configure the NIT, from the drop-down menu, select Properties.
The Output NIT of TS# Properties appears.

3. Open the NIT Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - Device does not generate NIT.
 Generate - Device generates NIT.
 Pass - Device passes the NIT without any changes.
4. Reference NIT in PAT - tick to add to the PAT a pointer that the TS carries a
5. NIT. Depending on the NIT Mode selected, configure the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 71 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

For Generate:
a. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.
b. Generate NIT Other - tick to generate NIT tables to TSs with network IDs that are
different than the selected TS. Namely, it allows to generate a NIT for other networks in
addition to the actual network.
c. Descriptors - you can add or remove user defined NIT descriptors using the Add and
Remove buttons. See NIT Descriptors on page 72.
d. To add a descriptor click Add.
e. To edit a descriptor, click Edit.
f. In Descriptor, select the required user-defined descriptor.
g. In Value in HEX, enter the required value.
For Pass:
a. Input TS - select the TS over which the NIT table streams into the device.
b. Input PID - select the PID over which the NIT table streams into the device.
NIT Descriptors
The NIT descriptors include the following descriptors:

Table 4–7: Descriptors in NIT Descriptor List

Sections of List Explanation

Pre-defined descriptors  0x43 Satellite delivery info
 0x44 Cable delivery info
 0x5a Terrestrial delivery info
 0x33 Logical channel number

Descriptors Descriptors that you need to define by entering the

descriptor details in hexadecimal.

Configuring SDT
Prostream creates a Service Description Table (SDT). This table contains data describing the
services, e.g., the names of services, the service provider, etc. SDT relates to all services of the
TS. You can also select Generate SDT Other. SDT other relates to all services of TSs that
belong to the same network, that is that have the same network ID.
 SDT - version control is configured per TS
 SDT other - version control depends on SDT actual
 To configure SDT
1. In Output TS Properties select DVB (PSI/SI).
2. To configure the SDT, from the drop-down menu, select
Properties. The Output SDT of TS# Properties appears.
3. Open the SDT Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - Device does not generate NIT.
 Generate - Device generates NIT.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 72 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

 Pass - Device passes the NIT without any changes.

4. Depending on the SDT Mode selected, configure the following:
For Generate:
a. Original Network ID - select the ID of the originating delivery system.
b. Repetition Rate (ms) - enter the required spooling rate.
c. Table Version - by default version control is automatically incremented upon changes to
the table. However, once you tick Override, the table version is changed manually only
and you should select the required table version, from 0 to 31. Version control is
configured per TS.
d. Generate SDT Other - when selected, generates SDT also to all services of the TSs
that belong to the same network, that is that have the same network ID.
For Pass:
a. Input TS - select the TS over which the SDT table streams into the device.
b. Input PID - select the PID over which the SDT table streams into the device.
Viewing SDT Parameters
 To view SDT parameters, do the following::
1. In Table view, click the arrow head next to the SDT table:

Table view is selected

Arrow head next to SDT

SDT parameters

2. View the following:

Table 4–8: SDT Parameters

Parameter Explanation
TS ID The TS that to its programs the SDT table related to.
Original Network ID The input network ID

Service ID The ID of the program

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 73 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

Table 4–8: SDT Parameters

Parameter Explanation
Service Name The name of the program
Provider Name The name of the service provider as defined by the DVB
standard.

Running Status Running Status - indicates the status of the service:

 undefined
 not running
 starts in a few seconds
 pausing
 running

Free CA Mode - Indicates that at least one component of the service is

scrambled.

EIT Scheduled Indicates that EIT schedule information for the service is
present in the current TS

EIT Present Following Indicates that EIT schedule information/following for the
service is present in the current TS.

Service Type Indicates the type of the service as defined in the DVB
standard. It allows the service provider to describe the
nature of the service, such as, broadcast television, on-
demand television, broadcast radio, data broadcast
etc’.
Configuring EIT
ProStream 9000 may regenerate the Event Information Table (EIT) at the output. To
regenerate, ProStream 9000 parses the EIT at the input and draws the relevant events
according to the services included in the output TS.

Table 4–9: EIT Regeneration Specification

Specification Explanation
EIT PID 0x12

Table ID 0x4E - for current/next events

0x50 - 0x5F - for scheduled events

Parsing Up to 500 services

Average of 165 events per service

Output Up to 128 services

ProStream ProStream 4.10 and up

 To configure EIT, do the following:

1. In Output TS Properties select one of the following:
 DVB (PSI/SI)
 ATSC (PSIP) - see Configuring EIT in ASCT (PSIP) Mode on page
78.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 74 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

2. To view EIT parameters, click the arrow-head next to EIT. View the EIT PIDs of the
TS;

Arrow head
next to
SDT

3. To configure the EIT, from the drop-down menu, select Properties.

4. Open the EIT Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - Device does not generate EIT.
 Re-Generate - Device re-generates EIT.
 Pass - Device passes the EIT without any
5. changes. If you have selected Pass, configure the
following:
a. Input TS - select the TS over which the SDT table streams into the device.

Configuring TDT
ProStream creates a Time Date Table.
 To configure a TDT, do the following:
1. In Output TS Properties select the following: DVB (PSI/SI)
2. To configure the TDT, from the drop-down menu, select
Properties. The Output TDT of TS# Properties appears.
3. Open the TDT Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - Device does not generate TDT.
 Generate - Device generates TDT.
 Pass - Device passes the TDT without any
4. changes. If you have selected Pass, configure the
following:
a. Input TS - select the TS over which the SDT table streams into the device.
b. Input PID - select the PID over which the SDT table streams into the device.
Configuring TOT
Prostream creates a Time Offset
Table.

To configure a TOT, do the following:
1. Click the Create TOT link to configure the TOT time zones.
2. In Output TS Properties select the following: DVB
3. (PSI/SI).
4. To configure the TOT, from the drop-down menu, select Properties.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 75 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

 None - Device does not generate TOT.

 Generate - Device generates TOT.
 Pass - Device passes the TOT without any changes.
5. Depending on the TOT Mode you have selected, configure the following:
For Generate:
a. Country Code - open the list and select the required country code.
b. Country Region ID - select the region ID.
c. Local Time Offset - select the local time offset according to GMT.
d. Date to Change - select the Day Light Saving date.
e. Time to Change - type in Time to Change the required time according to the required
format: hh:mm:ss PM/AM.
f. Next Time Offset - select the local time according to GMT in which Day Light Saving is
expected to change.
For Pass:
a. Input TS - select the TS over which the SDT table streams into the device.
b. Input PID - select the PID over which the SDT table streams into the device.

PSIP Tables
The Program and System Information Protocol (PSIP) standard, is an extension of the MPEG2
encoding standards. PSIP is a collection of tables designed to operate within every transport
stream for terrestrial broadcast of digital television. The purpose of PSIP is to describe
information at system and event levels for all services carried in a particular TS. Additionally,
information for analog channels as well as digital channels from other TSs may be incorporated.
PSIP includes the following tables:
 STT (System Time Table) - provides time reference
 MGT (Master Guide Table) - lists the PIDs of each of the tables
 VCT - lists all virtual channels included in the TS. VCT may refer to either of the following:
 TVCT (Terrestrial Virtual Channel Table)
 CVCT (Cable Virtual Channel Table)
 EIT (Event Information Table) - provides information about events planned on the virtual
channels
 ETT (Extended Text Table) Optional - detailed information about the planned events

Configuring MGT
ProStream creates an MGT, PSIP Master Guide Table. This table lists the PIDs of each of the
PSIP tables.
 In Output TS Properties select the following: ATSC (PSIP).

Configuring VCT
ProStream creates a VCT table. It lists all virtual channels included in the TS. VCT may refer
to either of the following:
 TVCT (Terrestial Virtual Channel Table)
 CVCT (Cable Virtual Channel Table)

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 76 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

 To configure a VCT, do the following:

1. In Output TS Properties select one the following: ATSC (PSIP).
2. To view the VCT parameters, click the arrow-head next to the VCT table and view the TS it
is associated with:

 TS ID - view the TS ID that carries the VCT

 Channel - click the channel to view its components.
Major Channel Number - view the number of the major channel.
Minor Channel Number - view the number of the minor channel
3. To configure the channel, in case the broadcast provider has changed the channel number,
do the following:
a. From the drop-down menu, select Properties.
b. Service Name Override - tick to override the service name.
c. To edit channel parameters, tick Enable override.
d. In Major Channel Number, enter the required channel number
e. In Minor Channel Number, enter teh required channel number
4. To configure the VCT, from the drop-down menu, select Properties.
The Output VCT of TS# Properties appears.

5. Open the VCT Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - Device does not generate VCT.
 Re-generate - Device generates VCT.
6. If you selected Re-Generate, configure the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 77 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning the Output TS

a. VCT Type - select either CVCT or TVCT.

Configuring EIT in ASCT (PSIP) Mode

For a short overview, see Configuring EIT on page
74.
1. In Output TS Properties select the following: ATSC (PSIP).
2. To configure the EIT, from the drop-down menu, select
3. Properties. Open the EIT Mode list and select one of the
following options:
 None - Device does not generate EIT.

4.  Re-Generate - Device re-generates

5. EIT. In EIT PID, select the EIT PID.

Arrow head
next to
SDT

Configuring ETT
1. In Output TS Properties select the following: ASCT (PSIP).
2. To view the ETT parameters, click the arrow-head next to
ETT:

3. To configure the ETT, from the drop-down menu, select

4. Properties.

Provisioning the TS
Once you have finished configuring the TS you can provision it
1. Send the configuration to the device by clicking Apply.
2. Select the required TS and from the drop-down menu select Drop To.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 78 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

TS Mirroring
This feature enables you to duplicate an output TS for monitoring purposes. The device
duplicates and outputs a TS from any interface (IP, ASI) to any other TS over any interface. This
feature supports all the functionality of the mirrored TS such as rate shaping, scrambling, RSS,
tables generation, common PCR, PID range or DToIP. You can configure the mirrored TS to be
always clear.
To allow mirroring, verify that the mirroring TS is clear of any configuration and provisioning.
1. In Logical Output, select the required TS.
2. Drag the TS and drop it to the required output in Physical Output pane.
3. View the destinations of the TS in the Logical Output pane.

4. Click
Apply.
Adding Content to TS
You can add the following to a TS:
 Program - add a program and configure it as explained in Configuring Program Properties
on page 84.
 PID - a PID is added to the TS as an un-reference PID. See page 101.
 Injected EMM - an EMM is added to the CA PID container. See Adding and Configuring EMM
PIDs to the TS on page 104
 Injected ECM - an ECM is added to the CA PID container. Adding and Configuring ECM PIDs to
the TS on page 102.
 Passed EMM - the passed EMM is added to the CA PID container. See Adding and
Configuring EMM PIDs to the TS on page 104.

Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

When provisioning/multiplexing, you route a specific input (service/PID) to a specific output
(service/PID). You may use the Logical Inputs pane (when you read input information from the
input ports) and move programs or PIDs from Inputs to the Logical Outputs pane and then

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 79 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

provision them. On the other hand, you may use the Add New options to add new programs or/
and PIDs and provision them. To provision a Reference Service, see Reference Service (RSS) on
page 91.
You can add a program to a TS or to another program
An input service is provisioned to an output transport stream only. An input PID is provisioned to
an output service or transferred as an independent PID (ghost PID).

Provisioning/Multiplexing a Program
When provisioning a service, you may change its service ID, name, PMT PID and PCR PID.
In addition, you may add to a service a Reference Service as explained Reference Service
(RSS) on page 91.

Moving a program From Input to an Output TS

1. In the Logical Inputs section, select a program.
2. In the drop-down list, select Drop To. A list of all the available output TSs
3. appears. Select the required TS > Add to TS.

Select a
program

Select Select the TS Select

Drop To Add to TS

Moving a program from Input to Output Program

 To move a program from an input to an output program, do the following:
1. In the Logical Inputs section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down list, select Drop To. A list of all the available output TSs
appears.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 80 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

3. Select the
TS.

Select a
program

Select Select the TS Select

Drop To Programs

4. Do either of the following:

 Select Programs > Create Output
Program

Or
 Select Programs > select an existing program > Create RSS:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 81 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing Stream Content

Creating a New Output Program

You can create a program at the output by selecting a TS or the program menu in the required
TS. Adding new program at TS Lever:
1. In Logical Output, select the required TS.
2. From the drop-down menu select Add New > Program.

Adding new program at program level:

1. In Logical Output, select Programs node under the required TS.
2. From the drop-down menu select Add New

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 82 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

A new program is added.

Removing a Program
1. In Logical Output, select Programs node under the required TS.
2. From the drop-down menu select Delete.

The program is deleted.

Configuring a Program
You can configure the following:
 Program properties
 Add new component
To remove a program, see Removing a Program on page 83.
 To configure a program, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
From the drop-down menu select one of the following:

 Properties - to open the Properties dialog. See

 Add New - enables you to add new components:
 ES - enables you to add a PID to the program. Once you have added, configure the PID
as explained in Defining PID Parameters on page 95.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 83 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

 Pass PCR - see PCR PID Carried Over Input PIDs on page 87
 Pass DPI - see Configuring Spliceable Services & SCTE35 PID on page 181.
 Generate PCR - see Configuring a PCR PID on page 86
 Generate DPI/Pass DPI - see Configuring DPI PIDs on page 106
 Reference Program - see Reference Service (RSS) on page 91
 Passed ECM - see Configuring a Passed ECM PID on page 106
 Delete - enables you to remove a program from the TS see, Removing a Program on page 83.

Configuring Program Properties

 To configure program properties, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Properties.

3. Type in the required information in the following fields:

Program Name - type in the service name, for example CNN, NBA.
Program Number - service identification number at output port.
Priority - In Priority, define the priority for dropping services in case of overflow. Services
defined as Low are the first ones to be dropped and services with High priority are the last
ones to be dropped. The available priorities are as follows: High, Normal, Medium, Low.
PMT PID - the PID over which the service’s PMT (Program Map Table) is transmitted.
Service CBR - Select it to set the bitrate to Constant Bitrate. This option is enabled if
transcoding is enabled.
Bitrate - Enabled if Service CBR is enabled. Enter the required bitrate of the program.
4. For advanced options, focus on the Advanced Options section.
5. Click each section you need to configure and follow the provided instructions:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 84 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

Scrambling
 To scramble a program, do the following:
1. Click Scrambling:
2. Configure as follows:
CA Descriptor Location - Select one of the following:
 Program
 ES
 Both
Enable BISS Option - Enables BISS. The Control Word box is enabled.
Control Word - A required Control Word with up to 12 hexadecimal characters (six bytes).
The CW is required for decoding the scrambled transmission.

Defining Program Redundancy

Unlike other redundancy methods, Program redundancy is triggered by a program underflow and
not by an alarm. The related alarms only indicate that a redundancy switch has taken place.
Configure the triggering condition by defining when to activate the redundancy switch:
 Program underflow
 Program PID underflow
 To define redundancy parameters, do the following:
1. Click the Redundancy section.
2. Open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following options:
 None - program redundancy is inactivated
 Manual - the user initiates the program redundancy switch
 Automatic - the program redundancy switch is performed automatically according to the
predefined triggers. See following step.
 Manual Revert - the program redundancy switch is performed automatically according to
the predefined triggers. However, switching back to the primaryprogram, when fixed, is
performed manually. See Seamless Program Substitution on page 85.
3. Set Number of Backups (1-3).
4. To define redundancy triggers, focus on Triggers.
If Manual Revert is used, configure Active Source. See Seamless Program Substitution
on page 85
5. To define a redundancy trigger, focus on PID Missing and select either of the following:
 PCR Missing - the redundancy switch takes place if there is a PCR PID underflow
 At Least One PID is Missing - the redundancy switch takes place upon the under flow of
at least one of the program’s PIDs.

Seamless Program Substitution

Seamless Program Substitution is a Service-level local programming feature. Manual, SCTE35
and SL10 modes are supported.
 To set Seamless Program Substitution parameters:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 85 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

1. Open the Menu for the required Program.

2. Scroll down to Seamless Program Substitution and click open the section.
3. Click the Enable checkbox. Seamless Program Substitution parameters
4. appear.
Select the Mode from the drop-down list. The parameters available change with the mode
5. selected.
If Manual is selected:
a. Set Number of Alternatives (1-2).
6. b. Define the active source as Primary, Alternative 1, or Alternative 2.
If SCTE35 is selected (Splice Insert command only):
a. Define the Event Source Range Minimum and Maximum (0-15).
7 b. Set Reference DPI to Remux by the relevant
. input. If SL10 is selected:
a. Enter the SNMP Agent IP
address.
b.
Enter the Contact number (1-10).
c.
Enter the Delay in milliseconds.
NOTE: After configuring SPS, configure alternative sources for each PID separately in PID Properties.

NOTE: Seamless Program Substitution cannot be used with Program Redundancy.

Reverting Manually
 To engage Manual Revert, do the following:
1. Select the Redundancy section.
2. Open the Redundancy Mode list and select
3. Manual. Open the Active Source list and select
4. Primary.

Configuring a PCR PID

Configure the PID over which the service’s PCR (Program Clock Reference) is transmitted. A
service may carry a PCR PID. A PCR PID can outflow according to one of the following
options:
 Carried over one of the service’s PIDs
 Carried over a reference service - only in case a reference service is configured
 Carried over any of the incoming PIDs
 Generated PCR - PCR PID generated by the device and no input indication is required.
ProStream 9000 generates a PCR PID at the output regardless of the input PCR. As a result,
each output service can have its own PCR PID with a new time baseline. You can configure
a PCR PID as follows. In both options, the PCR PID is output as a separate PID or over one
of the ESs of the service. Usually the PCR PID is out-streamed over the video PID:
 Each service generates its own PCR PID
 Common PCR - a single PCR PID is common to a few services
 No ES - the PCR PID is out flowing as an independent PID - See Pass PCR
 To define PCR parameters, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 86 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

1. Click the PCR section.

2. To generate a PCR PID at the output, select Generate PCR.
3. To set the PID to outflow the PCR PID, in Insert PCR PID, select one of the PIDs of
the program. The Insert PCR PID list is populated with the PIDs of the program.

NOTE: When transcoding is required, the PCR should outflow over the video PID.

PCR PID Carried Over Input PIDs

When you pass a program from the input to the output, the PCR is probably carried over one of
the PIDs of the program.
 To have the PCR PID carried over another PID, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output pane, select the required program.
2. From the down-list menu, select Pass PCR.

The following message appears:

3. Click Yes to change the Passed PCR.

A PCR PID is added to the program in Logical Outputs.
4. Select the newly selected PCR PID and from the drop-down menu, select Properties.

Configuring Slate Parameters

When a broadcast of TV service is disrupted, the Slate (Static Apology Message) feature allows
MSOs a quick way to rapidly inform their subscribers of their efforts to restore the service. The
Slate feature allows configuring for any service an alternative or backup input feed or source that
is enabled on the output upon disruption of the primary feed.
The following table lists the Slate specifications:

Table 4–10: Slate Specifications

Specification Explanation
Total number of Slate feeds Up to five per device

Video format of Slate feed Any of the following presented in MPEG transport
packets:
 SD MPEG2
 SD AVC
 HD MPEG2
 HD AVC
 AC3 2.0
 AAC 2.0 ¡K
Note: Format of slate feed should match primary feed

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 87 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

Table 4–10: Slate Specifications

Specification Explanation
Bitrate of Slate feed CBR only
Note: The bit rate of the alternative feed is not greater
than the bit rate of the primary feed(s)

Interface Any input to any output

Slate activation modes The following modes are supported:
Manual - you initiate the switch from the primary feed to
the slate feed
Automatic - device initiates the switch based on
predefined triggers

Slate Triggers See Configuring Slate Parameters on page 87.

 To configure the Slate feed, do the

following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Properties.
3. Select the Slate section:

4. To enable Slate, tick Enable.

5. Open the Slate Mode list and select one of the following:

Table 4–11: Slate Mode

Option Explanation
Auto The Slate switch is performed automatically according to pre-defined
triggers:
 Lost of the Video PID - the Video PID drops to Zero bit-rate
 Lost of input on the Encoders - Harmonic encoders only. The
encoder stops streaming video traffic upon loss of input signal
(configurable for every video PID). ProStream9000 detects a zero
bit-rate at the input video.
When switching to the alternative feed, ProStream remaps the
components of the alternative feeds PIDs (Video, Audio) to the main
channel component PIDs to ensure signal continuity on the output.

Manual The user initiates the Slate switch

Manual Revert The user initiates the revert

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 88 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

6. Open the Slate TS list and select the input TS that includes the slate.
7. In Service ID enter the Slate service ID.

Configuring EAS Parameters

Configuring the EAS service to outflow comprises two parts:
 Enable EAS for the output program
 Select the EAS program to outflow instead of the provisioned output program
 To configure EAS feed, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Properties.
3. Select the EAS section:
4. To enable the EAS for the service, select Enable.
5. To select the EAS service (channel) for this output service, open the list and select the
required channel.
Once this EAS is required, the EAS is streamed out instead of the provisioned output
service. See also Defining SNMP Parameters on page 237.

Enabling DPI
The DPI section contains options for enabling Digital Program Insertion (DPI, or splicing) for a
service. If all splicing engines are occupied, an alarm is raised upon clicking Apply. For setting
up a DPI-enabled service, see Configuring Spliceable Services & SCTE35 PID on page 181.
 To enable DPI parameters, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select the required program.
2. In the drop-down menu, select Properties.
3. Check the Spliceable box. DPI options appear.
4. Select Program Name or SCTE30 Channel
5. Name.
6. If SCTE30 Channel Name is selected, enter the channel name in the box below.
a. PID - if selected, enter the input PID
b. ES Type - if selected, enter the Input Program Number
c. Component ID - if selected, input the Component ID and Input Program Number
d. None
7 Click Save to save the channel name, if
. any.
Event Signaling and Management (ESAM) Feature
For ESAM overview and general configuration, see ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)
on page 263.

Configuring ESAM
 To configure ESAM, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 89 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

2. From the drop-down menu select Properties.

3. Select the ESAM section:
4. To select the whether the device functions as an LSS or LSP, open the ESAM Mode list
and select one of the following:
 None - ESAM feature is not applied
 LSS - the device is located at the edge of the network and is responsible for switching to
and from an alternative feed, based on BMS commands.
 LSP - the device is located in the Central Headend.
5. If ESAM Mode is LSS or LSP, configure the following:
a. ESAM Server - open the BMS Server list and select the required server that manages the
blackout system. The list is populated with the ESAM servers configured in Platform >
ESAM. See ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management) on page 263.
b. Acquisition Point Identifier - enter the unique identifier of the program. This identifier is
unique for each blackout zone.
c. Zone Identifier - enter the identifier of the blackout zone of the program. The zone
identifier and Acquisition Point Identifier together create a unique program identifier.
d. Output DPI PID - In LSS mode, check this option to include the DPI PID. By default the
LSS does not stream the DPI PID containing the ESAM information. When this option
is selected, the LSS streams the DPI PID.
e. Timestamp Descriptor - In LSP mode, check this option to include a
timestamp descriptor.
f. Remux by - Read only. For ESAM purposes the DPI PID from the input is carried by
PID only.
g. Input DPI PID - select the input PID that carries the DPI PID.
h. Stamp Splice Time - check the box in order to enable.
i. Splice Insert - select the option required for SCTE35 operations for the service:
Always pass
Always discard
POIS (Fallback: Discard)
POIS (Fallback: Pass)
j. Time Signal - select the operation required for SCTE35 operations for the service:
Always pass
Always discard
POIS (Fallback: Discard)
POIS (Fallback: Pass)
6. Click OK.

Emergency Switch to Main

The main service can be reinstated manually by clicking on Emergency Switch to Main in the
ESAM section. This button can be used in the event of a switching failure as well as under
normal operating conditions.

NOTE: The Emergency Switch to Main button can also be found at Platform>ESAM>Emergency Switch

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 90 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

Configuring Other Program Parameters

The Other section allows the following:
To select whether the PAT table include a reference to the PMT table.
 To configure a reference in the PAT, do the following:
1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Properties.
3. Select the Other section:
4. Open the Reference Program in PAT list and select either of the following:
Always
If Referenced in Input
5. When If Referenced in Input is selected, select the following:
Input TS (by TS ID)
Input Service

Reference Service (RSS)

The Reference Service feature allows an output service to automatically update according to
changes detected on a specific input service. The input service is called “Reference Service”.
The Reference Service option allows ProStream to support two main applications:
 MHP - (Multi media Home Platform). This standard allows streaming data for interactive
TV application.
 ASM (Automatic Service Mode) - You may choose to pass a service from the input to the
output without specifying the exact PIDs of this service.
You can add a new reference service only to a service. The service becomes a parent service as
the following picture shows:

Reference program

ProStream dynamically aggregates the PIDs and descriptors of multimedia (audio/video)

services with the data PIDs and descriptors of one or more MHP Services which are received
from an MHP server that plays them out.
Any changes in the MHP services do not affect the stable streaming of the content of the parent
service.
A service that includes reference services may also include explicitly defined ESs, just like any
regular service. The PCR of such a service may be carried on an explicitly-defined ES, or on an
ES that is part of the reference service. In the latter case, the reference service that includes the
PCR stream is marked as Carry PCR. See also Configuring a PCR PID on page 86.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 91 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring a Program

 To provision a New Reference Service, do the following:

1. In the Logical Output section, select a program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Add New > Reference Program.
A reference program is added.
3. To configure the RSS, select the RSS and from the drop-down menu select
Properties.

RSS Properties dialog Select the RSS and then Properties

4. Open the Input list and select the required input port. This is the port through which the
reference service is streamed into the device.
5. In Input Program Number, type the ID of the required input program. This is the ID of the
reference service.
6. PID Remapping - PID remapping allows to remap the PIDs of the reference service and to
set the PID range. You can select either of the following:
Range - Once you have selected Range, in First PID and Last PID, enter the first and last PID
of the PIDs range, respectively..
In Total number of PIDs in Range, view the number of PIDs included in the range.
Remap PIDs
option is
enabled and
Range Start
and Range End
boxes appear

 Preserve - To maintain the PIDs as in the input, disable the Remap PID
option.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 92 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 PID Filtering - it applies to EDU only. When the device functions as an EDU, in PID
Filtering enter the component descriptor that should be ignored. You can indicate up to
five components to be ignored.

7. PID Priority - define the priority for dropping PIDs in case of overflow. PIDs defined as Low
are the first ones to be dropped and PIDs with High priority are the last ones to be dropped.
The available priorities are as follows:
As
Parent
High
Normal
Medium
Low

Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs
This section instructs you on how to provision PIDs. You can add a single PID or a range of
PIDs. You can add a PID to a program or in case of a ghost PID, select a TS.
 To add an Input PIDs to an Output TS (Ghost
PIDs)
1. In Logical Input, select the PID you wish to move.
2. From the drop-down list, select Drop To.
A list of available output TSs appear.

3. Select the required TS.

4. Select one of the following options:
 Select TS number > Add to TS
 Unreference PIDS > Add to TS

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 93 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 Program # > Add to

Program

Select a PID Select Drop To Selected TS Select Add to TS

The PID is added according to your choices.

Creating a Range of PIDs

 To create a range of PIDs, do the following:
1. Create the PID range logically through one of the two following methods:
a. In Logical Input, select the required TS and drag it to the Logical Output. The following
options appear:

b. Select Create PID Range. A PID range is added to the Unreferenced section of the
selected output TS.
Or
a. In Logical Output, select Unreferenced PIDs > Add New > PID Range.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 94 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

A new PID range appears in the Output section with a default value:0x0 - 0x1FFF.

PID range with default values

This value indicates a range that includes all the PIDs of the input TS. If you intend to
provision all of the PIDs, verify that under TS > Tables, none of the tables are selected to
prevent table override. However, you can configure the required PID range as instructed
below.
2.
Select the PID Range and from the drop-down list select Properties.

3. In Input, select the required Input port and socket.

4. To define the PID range, enter in First Input PID and in Last Input PID the first PID of the
range and the last PID, respectively.
5. To remap, enter in First Output PID the first PID. The last remap PID is
automatically calculated once you click out of the First Output PID box.

Defining PID
Parameters
1. Select the required output PID.
2. From the drop-down list, select Properties.
3. In Output PID, enter the ID of the output PID.
4. In ES Type, enter the ES type of the output PID
5. In Transcoding, select to enable transcoding. The Transcoding Configuration appears in
the dialog. See
6. In Remux Mode, select one of the following options:
 PID - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS, service and
PID. (see picture above)
 Component - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS,
service and component. That is, one of the component descriptors has the indicated
component ID.
 ES Type - allows to multiplex a PID that is identified according to the input TS, service
and

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 95 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

ES type. If the ES is an audio PID, you may select the required

language.

7. In Input TS, open the TS list and select the required TS.
8. In Input Program Number, select the required input program number.
9. Continue according to the Remuxe Mode as listed in the following table:

Table 4–12: Remux Mode Parameters

Remux Mode Configuration

PID In PID, enter the required input PID

Component Component ID, enter the required component ID

ES Type In ES Type, enter the required ES type. If it is an audio PID, select
in Language the required language.

10. Reference PCR Input PID - Select the required PCR PID. The latter is a baseline for
the
generation of the PCR at the output.
11. For advance configuration, see the following section.

PID Advanced Options

1. In the PID Properties dialog, focus on the Advanced Options section.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 96 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

2. To configure Redundancy Triggers, click Redundancy Triggers.

The default trigger is PID underflow. You can configure each routed PID (ghost, EMM,
ECM, ES and PCR not of ES) to be monitored for PID underflow.

NOTE: PID underflow does not apply to DPI PID and for re-generated tables and PID range.

a. To enable PID Underflow as a trigger, check the Enable box.

b. Minimum Bitrate Allowed (Mbps) - Select the minimum allowed bitrate. If the bitrate
goes below this threshold, a redundancy switch takes place. The default is 0.05 Mbps.
3. To configure PCR, click the PCR
section.

a. Open the Mode list and select one of the following:

Follow the Input - PCR configuration follows the
input Remove - PCR is removed from the PID
Insert - Under service, Generation Mode is enabled and you can configure the PID to
carry the PCR

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 97 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

4. To configure advanced PID parameters, click on the Advanced section.

a. CC Restamping - select the CC Restamping box to enable this option.

b. PID Priority - PID Priority - define the priority for dropping PIDs in case of overflow. PIDs
defined as Low are the first ones to be dropped and PIDs with High priority are the last
ones to be dropped. The available priorities are as follows:
As Parent - either TS or service, according to the parent stream.
High
Normal
Medium
Low
c. Report if PID is Missing - when selected, the alarm PID Missing is raised. By default
this box is checked.
d. Scrambling Override - open the list and select one of the following options:
None - follows the scrambling configuration of the TS or service
Always Scramble - even if TS or service are not scrambled, the PID is scrambled as
long as a fixed key or a CW is provided. For future use only.
Always Clear- even if TS or service are scrambled, the PID is always clear.
5. For a video PID in a transcoded service, select the Transcoding tab. See PCR and
Video Transcoding on page 128.
6. For an ECM PID, click CA PIDs > select the required ECM PID.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 98 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

7 From the drop-down menu, select Properties.

.

Click CA PIDs
Select
Select required Properties
ECM

CA Information
section

8. Output PID - select the required PID number.

9. To configure CA related parameters, focus on CA Information section .
a. ECM ID (Hex) - type in the ECM ID as provided by your CAS vendor. The ECM ID is a
unique headend ID.
b. In Super CAS ID (4 Digits), enter the required ID. It is a 32-bit identifier that contains the
CAS ID and ECMG ID. The CAS vendor provides this value.
c. In Private Data, enter a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. You
can enter it either in ASCII or in Hex by selecting either ASCII or HEX.
d. In Priority, configure the ECM PID priority in case of overflow. Priority values range from
High to Low.
e. Manage TID Independently - when selected, ProStream 9000 manages the ECM table
ID independent of the CP (Control Period).
NOTE: A CA descriptor is automatically added.

10. For advanced configuration, click Advanced Configuration.

Configuring PID Descriptors

Configuring PID descriptors comprises two steps:
 Tracking input descriptors - allows to track changes in input of the descriptor and to allow
moving the descriptor from input to output. Once you select this option, you can select PIDs
to be filtered. See Tracking Input Descriptors at the PID Level on page 100
 Assigning descriptors to the PID. See Adding PID Descriptors on page 100

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 99 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

Tracking Input Descriptors at the PID Level

To track input descriptors at the PID level, do the following:
1. In Logical Output switch to Table view.

Table view

2. Drill down to the required PID and from the drop-down menu select Properties..
3. To track input descriptors, select Track Input Descriptors. You can track changes in input of
the descriptor and to allow moving the descriptor from input to output. Once you select this
option, you can select PIDs to be filtered.
The dialog is updated with the options of track input descriptors:

Track input descriptors

4. In Tracking Input Descriptors section, do the following:

a. Input Program Number - enter the input service ID that carries the PID you wish to
enable tracking and/or filter its descriptors.
b. Block CA Descriptor - select to remove the input CA descriptor from the output PID of
the service.
c. Block Stream Identifier Descriptor - select to remove the input Stream ID descriptor
from the output PID of the service.
To filter descriptors at the TS level, see page 69.

Adding PID Descriptors

 To add PID Descriptors, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 100 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

1. In Logical Output switch to Table view.

Table view

2. Drill down to the required PID and from the drop-down menu select Properties..
3. To add a descriptor to the original PID, click Add.
4. Open the Descriptor list and select the required descriptor. The list of descriptors is
comprised of the following:

Table 4–13: Descriptors in Descriptor Tag List

Listed Descriptors Explanation

Pre-defined descriptors  Registration descriptor
 Language descriptor
 Platform descriptor
 Integrated signaling descriptor
User Defined Descriptors This section includes descriptors that you need to define
by entering the descriptor details in hexadecimal. See
Standard ES Types and Descriptors on page 291.

5. Configure the descriptor as required. Typically, enter in Value in Hex, the required value.
Depending on the descriptor, configure the following:
CA descriptor:
 In CAS ID (4 Digits), enter the required ID
 In CAS PID, select the required CAS PID
 In Private Data, enter a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. You
can enter it either in ASCII or in Hex by selecting either ASCII or HEX.
Registration descriptor:
 In Format Identifier, enter the required format identifier
 In Additional Identification Info:, enter the additional information.
6. Click OK. The descriptor is added to the list in the PID Properties dialog.

NOTE: The configured CA descriptors is automatically added when creating an ECM PID.

Adding Ghost PIDs to the TS

Ghost PIDs are independent Elementary Streams (ES) that are not associated with any
service. The ghost PID configuration allows you to transfer and remap PIDs as well as
relocate their destination. You may also remap Ghost PIDs to new PIDs as long as they do
not conflict with previously configured components.
 To add ghost PIDs to the TS, do the following:
1. In Logical Output, select an Output TS.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 101 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

2. Do either of the following:

 From the drop down menu of the TS, select Add PID, or

3. Click the TS and select the Un-referenced PIDs and from the drop down menu select either
add PID or add PID Range.

4. Select the PID or PID Range and from the drop down menu select Properties.
5. Configure as explained in Creating a Range of PIDs on page 94 and in Defining PID Parameters
on page 95.

Adding and Configuring ECM PIDs to the TS

 In order to add and configure ECM PIDs to the transport stream, do the
following:
1. In Logical Output, select an Output TS.
2. Do either of the following:
 From the TS drop-down menu select Add NEW > Injected ECM
 From the drop-down menu of the CA PIDs select Add New > Injected ECM

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 102 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 From the drop down menu of the TS, select Injected ECM

Adding ECM vis TS

Adding ECM vis CA

PIDs

The newly added ECM PID appears under CA PIDs.

3. To allocate the ECM PID, configure the CA information. Click CA PIDs > select the required
ECM PID.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 103 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

4. From the drop-down menu, select Properties.

Click CA PIDs
Select
Select required Properties
ECM

CA Information
section

5. Output PID - select the required PID number.

6. To configure CA related parameters, focus on CA Information section.
a. ECM ID (Hex) - type in the ECM ID as provided by your CAS vendor. The ECM ID is
a unique headend ID.
b. In Super CAS ID (4 Digits), enter the required ID. It is a 32-bit identifier that contains the
CAS ID and ECMG ID. The CAS vendor provides this value.
c. In Private Data, enter a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. You
can enter it either in ASCII or in Hex by selecting either ASCII or HEX.
d. In Priority, configure the ECM PID priority in case of overflow. Priority values range from
High to Low.
e. Manage TID Independently - when selected, ProStream 9000 manages the ECM table
ID independent of the CP (Control Period).
NOTE: A CA descriptor is automatically added.

Adding and Configuring EMM PIDs to the TS

You can add EMM at the output or pass an EMM from the input.
1. In Logical Output, select an Output TS.
2. Do either of the following:
 From the drop-down menu of the CA PIDs select Add New > Injected EMM

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 104 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

 From the drop down menu of the TS, select Injected EMM or Passed EMM

Adding EMM vis TS

Adding ECM vis CA

PIDs

The newly added EMM PID appears under CA PIDs.

3. To allocate the EMM PID, configure it. Select it and from the drop-down menu, select
Properties.

Injected EMM Passed EMM

Configuring an Injected ECM PID

 To configure an injected ECM PID, do the following:
1. Configure the Output PID of the EMM PID. Define the PID you allocate for the EMM, in other
words the PID that carries the EMM.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 105 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

2. Maximal Bitrate - Applies to injected EMM only. Define the maximum bitrate for the EMM
PID.
3. Configure the CA parameters:
a. Client/Super CAS ID - a four-byte integer that contains the CAS ID and EMMG identifier.
The CAS vendor provides this value.
b. Backup Client/Super CAS ID- a four-byte integer that contains the CAS ID and
EMMG identifier. The CAS vendor provides this value.
c. Private Data (Hex) - a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. The
Private Data in ASCII is updated.
4. In PID Priority, configure the ECM PID priority in case of overflow. Priority values range from
High to Low.
To stop sending EMM with the output stream, delete the EMM PID via the Stream Config page.
Deleting EMMGs only (via the EMMG page) does not stop the EMMs from flowing with the
output stream.

Configuring a Passed ECM PID

 To configure a passed ECM PID, do the following:
1. Output PID - configure the output PID of the EMM PID. Define the PID you allocate for the
EMM, in other words the PID that carries the EMM.
2. Under Source configure the following:
a. Input TS - Select the input TS
b. Input PID - Select the input
3. PID Configure the CA parameters:
a. CAS ID - enter a16 bit CAS vendor ID.
b. Private Data (Hex) - a string of up to 100 bytes that is added to the CA descriptor. The
Private Data in ASCII is updated.
4. Click Advanced and configure the following:
a. PID Priority, configure the EMM PID priority in case of overflow. Priority values range
from High to Low
b. Report if PID is Missing - when selected, the alarm PID Missing is raised. By default
this box is checked.

Configuring DPI PIDs

You can configure either of the following DPI PIDs:
 Passed DPI PID - in case a DPI PID is streamed into the device. See Configuring a Passed DPI
on page 106.
 Generate DPI PID - when ProStream receives a trap/analog CUE tome it can generate
SCTE35 CUE with a splice insert message and inject it to the output stream. See
Configuring Generate DPI PID on page 108.

Configuring a Passed DPI

 To configure a passed DPI, do the following:
1. In the web client, in Logical Output, select the required program.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 106 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

2. From the drop-down menu select Add New > Passed DPI.

A DPI PID is added to the program.

3. Select the Passed DPI PID from the drop-down menu select
4. Properties. Fill in the following:
a. Output PID - enter the output PID number.
b. ES Type - view the ES type of the DPI PID. Typically it is 0x86, SCTE35.
c. Reference PCR Input PID - select the required PCR input PID.
d. Remux Mode - contains the following options:
None - Do not register to receive any SCTE35 messages
PID - Identify and register the DPI PID according to its PID ID. Once you select PID,
the PID box appears. In the PID box, enter the required PID number.
ES Type - Identify and register the DPI PID according to its ES Type. Usually the
SCTE35 PID is type 0x86.
Component - Identify and register the DPI PID according to the required component
parameters. Once you select Component, the Service and the Component boxes
appear. Enter the required service details and the required component ID
5. Input PID - select the input PID
6. In Advanced Options, configure how to coordinate between network PIDs and AD server
PIDs, open the Ad PID Selection Policy list and select one of the following options:
 Replace (Fallback: Block) - Try to match Ad PID to network PID. If a matching PID is
not found, block the network PID.
 Replace (Fallback: Play) - Try to match Ad PID to network PID. If a matching PID is
not found, play the network PID.
 Always Play Network PID - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always play the
network PID
 Block PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always block the
network PID
7 In Advanced, configure as follows:
.
a. C Restamping - select the CC Restamping box to enable this option.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 107 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Provisioning/Multiplexing PIDs

b. PID Priority - PID Priority - define the priority for dropping PIDs in case of overflow. PIDs
defined as Low are the first ones to be dropped and PIDs with High priority are the last
ones to be dropped. The available priorities are as follows:
As Parent - either TS or service, according to the parent stream.
High
Normal
Medium
Low
c. Report if PID is Missing - when selected, the alarm PID Missing is raised. By default
this box is checked.
d. Scrambling Override - open the list and select one of the following options:
None - follows the scrambling configuration of the TS or service
Always Scramble - even if TS or service are not scrambled, the PID is scrambled as
long as a fixed key or a CW is provided. For future use only.
Always Clear- even if TS or service are scrambled, the PID is always clear.

Configuring Generate DPI PID

 To configure or generate a DPI PID, do the following
1. In the web client, in Logical Output, select the required program.
2. From the drop-down menu select Add New > Generate DPI.

A DPI PID is added to the program.

3. Select the generated/Passed DPI PID and from the drop-down menu select Properties.
4. Output PID - enter the output PID number.
5. ES Type - view the ES type of the DPI PID. Typically it is 0x86, SCTE35.
6. SL 10 SNMP Agent IP - select the IP address of the agent to generate splicing
requests.
7. SL 10 Contact Number - select the required contact number.
8. DPI Delay - select a delay for the DPI PID.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 108 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration What’s Next...

9. Splice Return Mode - SCTE35 may indicate splice duration time:

Enable Duration
No Duration
10. Command - SCTE35 may indicate splice time:
Not immediate
Immediate
11. Avail Duration - it is enabled if Enable Duration is selected in Splice Return Mode.
Select the time slot for inserting content into the network feed.
12. Avail - indicates the avail time

What’s Next...
Once provisioning/multiplexing is complete, configure the Output ports as explained in the
following section.

Configuring the Output Port

The available output ports are as follows:
 ASI - outputs one TS.
 GbE - outputs up to 128 TSs.
Each output port has its own unique configuration parameters. The following section guides you
on how to configure each output port.

Configuring an ASI Output Port

The ASI output port requires you to set the required bit rate and to enable the output port.
 To configure an ASI output port, do the following:
1. In the Physical Outputs pane, select the required ASI out port.
2. From the drop down menu, select Properties.:
3. Check the Enable box to enable the ASI port.
4. In Port Description, enter a short description.
5. In Source TS, enter the source TS.
6. In Bitrate (bps), type in the required bit rate (bits per second) of the TS.
7. To define packet size, select Packet Size:
188 - default
204
Auto - the device automatically detects the packet size.
8. Select Disable Scrambling to enable clear streaming on this port.
9. Check the Shutdown Port when Input is Missing box to enable the feature on this
port.
NOTE: If you use scrambling over ASI, you may only select 188 (default) and 204 for the output packet
size.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 109 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration Configuring the Output Port

Configuring a GbE Output Port

Configuring a GbE Output port requires setting the port mode at the card level as well as
properties at the port level itself.
 To set configure a GbE Output Port, do the following:
1. In the Physical Outputs pane, right-click the slot with the required GbE card and select
Properties.
2. Pairs of ports (1&2 and 3&4, if available) can work independently or in one of four
redundancy schemes. The ports are configured as follows:
a. Open the appropriate Redundancy list and select the output mode required. The
redundancy schemes are listed in table Table 4–14 on page 110. You can select either
of the following:
b. If Manual redundancy is used, select the port to be Primary or Backup.
Off (Independent)
Hot-Standby
c. If Manual redundancy is used, select the port to be Primary or Backup.
d. In the Advanced section, select the Card Ports Mode. You can select either of
the following:
Port 1 + 2 : 1 Gbps
Port 2 : 10 Gbps (if available)
Note the following regarding port redundancy:
 Port redundancy is disabled for Ports 1&2 when Port 2 is in 10Gbps mode.
 By default, Port 1 is the primary port and Port 2 of the same IOM module is the backup
port.
 Triggers for a port redundancy switch include: Missing PID, Zero Bitrate (Cable
Disconnect, Socket Loss), PAT/PNT Missing, CC Error.
3. Click Save to send the configuration to the device.
4. Click OK to close the box.
5. Click on the tree icon on the left of the slot to display the ports available.
6. Right-click on the port required to display the port’s Properties box.
7. Check the Enable box to enable the port.
8. In Description, enter a short description.
9. Check Autonegotiation to enable the feature on this port.
10. Check Shutdown Port when Input is Missing to enable the feature on this
port.
11. Check Loopback to enable this feature.
12. Click OK to save the configuration
The following table lists the redundancy modes supported:
Table 4–14: GbE Output Redundancy scheme

Parameter Explanation
Manual The redundancy switch is performed manually. The Active Port
parameter appears and you can set the active port.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 110 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 4 Output Configuration 8VSB Modulation

Table 4–14: GbE Output Redundancy scheme

Parameter Explanation
Automatic The redundancy switch is performed automatically upon port
failure. Once the primary is faulty, the device automatically
switches to the backup port and continues transmitting content
over this port unless it is faulty. The device switches to the primary
port only when the backup fails.

Manual Revert The redundancy switch occurs automatically upon port failure.
However, switching back to primary, when fixed, is performed
manually.
To revert back to the primary port, change Port Usage to
Automatic. Once the primary port is active, change Port Usage to
Manual Revert.

Automatic Revert The redundancy switch occurs automatically upon port failure.
However, the device automatically switches to primary when the
primary has stabilized and even though the backup is still in order.
The baseline is that the primary is preferred.

8VSB Modulation
ProStream supports 8VSB modulation cards that enable reception of ATSC terrestrial TV.
See
Viewing/Setting Card Parameters on page 24.
The following table lists the specifications of the 8VSB module:
Table 4–15: 8VSB Specifications

Parameter Specifications
8VSB input card Up to four per device

ATSC receiver modules (tuner) Up to four per 8VSB input card

Capacity of input port 1 x MPTS

TS frequency Up to 19.39Mbps
Packet size 188 bytes

Channels of ATSC receiver modules 2-59

Packet Error Rate threshold 0-12,892 packets per seconds

Signal Quality threshold 0.0-27.0dB

ProStream 9000 supports the following applications with 8VSB modules:

 8SVB input streams transcoded and output over ASI/GbE output ports. See Video Transcoding
on page 112.
 8SVB input streams multiplexed and output over ASI or GbE output ports with PCR
generation at the output. See Configuring a PCR PID on page 86.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 111 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
5
Broadcast Transcoding
Overview
This version of ProStream 9000 with ACETM (Agile Compression Engine) enables you to
transcode video and audio PIDs. This version of ProStream 9000 supports both broadcast and
multiscreen output streams simultaneously.

Video Transcoding
This version of ProStream 9000 allows to transcode up to 20 HD or up to 60 SD services. The
device transcodes services as follows:
 High Definition (HD) MPEG2/H.264 services to HD MPEG2/H.264 services
 Standard Definition (SD) MPEG2/H.264 services to SD MPEG2/H.264 services
 Downconversion HD MPEG2/H.264 services to SD MPEG2/H264 services
 Microsoft Picture in Picture (PIP) - HD/SD MPEG2/H.264 services to PIP H.264
services. Microsoft PIP is a low resolution service that complies with Microsoft PIP
specifications.
The following table lists the transcoding specifications. For PIP transcoding specifications, see
Table 5–3 on page 114:
Table 5–1: Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Density  Density - four cards per unit

Services  HD to HD
 up to 5 services per transcoding card
 up to 20 services per unit
 SD to SD
 up to 15 services per transcoding card
 up to 60 services per unit
Note: Supports any combination of SD and HD services, where 1 HD service
consumes the resources of 3 SD services. See Table 5–2 on page 113.
 HD to SD
 up to 5 services per transcoding card
 up to 20 services per unit
 Microsoft PIP services
 HD to PIP
Up to 5 main services + up to 5PIP services per transcoding card
Up to 20 main services + up to 20PIP services per unit
 SD to PIP
Up to 10 main services + up to 10PIP services per transcoding
card
Up to 40 main services + up to 40PIP services per unit

Video Format Input - H.264/MPEG2

Output - H.264/MPEG2

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 112 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding

Table 5–1: Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Bit rate  Input - VBR/CBR
 Output - VBR/CBR
 VBR - VBR is in a pool only. For HD, up to 3 services per pool
for best performances.
Note: Currently mixed pools (HD/SD, MPEG2/AVC) are not
supported.
 CBR - CBR with stream control level
 CBR - CBR with service control level

Resolution Horizontal Resolution:

 HD
720p - supports 1280x720, 960x720
Converts any to any of the supported types.
1080i - supports 1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x1080
Converts any to any of the supported types
Horizontal Resolution for both 50 and 60 Hz
Vertical Resolution - no conversion, follow the input
 SD
 PAL 50Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X 576
Converts any to any of the supported types
 NTSC 60Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X480
Converts any to any of the supported types
For downconversion, see Table 5–4 on page 115.

Frame Rate 50/60Hz

All services in a single ProStream 9000 device are either 50 or 60Hz.

Audio PIDs Passthrough with required delay

PIDs per Service Up to 32 PIDs per transcoded service

Stream Optimizes in/out splicing points for downstream splicing.

conditioning Applies to broadcast in CBR only.

Table 5–2: Possible Combinations of HD and SD Services per Transcoding Card

SD HD/Downconversion (HD to SD)

15 services None

12 services 1 service

9 services 2 services
6 services 3 services

3 services 4 services
None 5 services

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 113 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding

Table 5–3: PIP Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Services See Table 5–1 on page 112.
PIP Service PIP service is always coupled with main service. PIP Service without
Main service is not allowed:
 PIP Service
 points to its main service
 Main Service
 up to one coupled PIP service.
 video format - input MPEG2/H.264 to H.264
 output SD/HD, H.264 CBR/VBR
 Main and PIP services
 have the same video input
 have different H.264 video output
 may outflow on a different TS out or on the same one
 may have different number of Audio/Data PIDs

Video Format  Main Service

 Input - HD/SD
 Output - HD/SD
 PIP Service
 Input - HD/SD
 Output - PIP

Stream Type  Main Service

 Input - H.264/MPEG2
 Output - H.264
 PIP Service
 Input - H.264/MPEG2
 Output - H.264

Bit rate  Main Service

 Input - CBR/VBR
 Output - CBR/VBR
 PIP Service
 Input - CBR/VBR
 Output - CBR, for range see Table 5–16 on page 128.

Resolution Horizontal Resolution:

 Main Service HD
 See Table 5–1 on page 112
 Main Service SD
 See Table 5–1 on page 112
 HD PIP - PIP is coupled with an HD output service
 Supports 128x96 and 192x192
 SD PIP - PIP is coupled with an SD output service
Supports 96x96, 192x192 and 192x144

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 114 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–3: PIP Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Miscellaneous  The PIP service follows the Main service configuration of the
Parameters following parameters:
 GOP
 Aspect Ratio
 Mctf
 The PIP service enforces the following configuration for the listed
parameters:
 AFD - Discard
 Closed Captions - Discard
 Other data - Discard
 Adaptation Field Data - Disabled

Video Transcoding Procedure

You can transcode either of the following:
 an HD/SD service
 a PIP service

Transcoding an HD/SD Service

The following section instructs you on how to transcode an HD/SD service using the web client
of the ProStream 9000 transcoder. The following table lists the required configuration to allow
the transcoding of the video PID of a service:

Table 5–4: Transcoding Required Configuration

Input
Feature Output Stream Explanation
Stream

Video HD/SD HD/SD Supports:

Format  High Definition (HD)
 Standard Definition (SD)
 Downconversion from HD to SD

Stream H.264/ H.264/MPEG2 Inputs H.264/MPEG2 and transcodes to

Type MPEG2 H.264/MPEG2
In downconversion, output is MPEG2
only.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 115 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–4: Transcoding Required Configuration

Input
Feature Output Stream Explanation
Stream

Resolution N/A Horizontal Resolution:  HR - if input is 720p, transcodes any

 HD 720p supported type to any 720p
720p - supports supported.
1280x720, 960x720 If input is 1080i, transcodes any 1080i
Coverts any to any of the supported type to any 1080i
supported types. supported type.
 1080i - supports  If input resolution changes, and:
1920x1080,  Output resolution is Follow the
1440x1080, 1280x1080 Input, the output resolution changes
Converts any to any of the accordingly without service
supported types interruption assuming that no gaps
are created at the input.
Horizontal Resolution supports both
 Output resolution is configured to a
50 and 60Hz
certain resolution, the output
Vertical Resolution - no conversion,
resolution remain as output
follow the input
configured resolution.
 SD
 Downconversion - any supported
 PAL 50Hz - supports
input HD resolution to any supported
720/
704/640/544/528/480/ SD output resolution. Default output
352 X 576 resolution: 720p.
Converts any to any of the  VR - Follow input only. Unsupported
supported types VR conversion.
 NTSC 60Hz - supports
Note: Downconversion - Output
720/ Vertical resolution is automatically set
704/640/544/528/480/ 352 according to the input frame rate:
X480 480 - In 60hz
Converts any to any of the 576 - In 50hz
supported types
Aspect N/A Follow input Allows to match picture to type of screen,
Ratio 16:9 standard or wide screen.
4:3 See Table 5–8 on page 120.
Bit rate N/A CBR See Defining Output Bitrate of a
VBR Transcoded Service on page 128.

User Data N/A AFD Allows to select which user data to output
Closed caption with the video PID
Other data In Downconversion, defines Video
Scaling.

GOP N/A GOP Allows to define GOP related parameters

PCR PID Any PID Video PID Input - Any PID may input the PCR PID.
Output - Only video PID may transmit the
PCR PID

The transcoding parameters are grouped in the Video Transcoding tab as explained below. For
PCR configuration, see Configuring a PCR PID on page 86.
 To transcode a Video PID, do the following:
1. Log into the device.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 116 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

2. In the Logical Output pane, drill down to the required program.

Drill down to the

required PID

Select Properties

3. Double-click the program node to view its PIDs.

4. To transcode its video PID, select the PID and from the drop down menu select
5. Properties. Check the Transcoding box. to show transcoding-related sections.
6. Continue according to the instructions in the following sections.

Configuring Transcoding Basic Parameters

1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > Basic.
2. Resolution Conversion - open the list and select one of the following:
 SD to SD
 HD to HD
 HD to SD
 Any to PIP. See Transcoding a PIP Service on page 125.
3. To select the input stream type, open the Original Coding Format list and select the required
type: H.264 or MPEG2.
4. To select the output stream type, open the Coding Format list and select the required type:
H.264 or MPEG2.
5. To define the output resolution, open the Resolution list and select one of the following:

Table 5–5: Output Resolution

Output Video
Output Resolution
Format

N/A Follow the input

HD  720p - supports 1280x720, 960x720 for both 50 and 60 Hz
 1080i - supports 1920x1080, 1440x1080, 1280x1080 for both
50 and 60Hz

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 117 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–5: Output Resolution

Output Video
Output Resolution
Format

SD  PAL 50Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X 576

 NTSC 60Hz - supports 720/704/640/544/528/480/352 X480

6. Profile - Read only. View one of the following according to

table:
Table 5–6: Profile Configuration

Format SD HD
MPEG2 main high

H.264 main/high main/high

Configuring Transcoding Bitrate Parameters

1. To define the required output bit rate of the stream, click the Bitrate section.

2. Open the Mode list and select either CBR or VBR and configure according to the following
table:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 118 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Transcoding, Bitrate
section when CBR is
selected

Transcoding, Bitrate
section when VBR is
selected

Table 5–7: CBR and VBR Configuration

CBR Configuration VBR Configuration

 In Rate (bps), enter the required output 1. Open the Pool list and select the required pool. To
bit rate. See Table 5–16 on page 128. create a pool, see Creating a Pool on page 130.
Note:Currently mixed pools (HD/SD, MPEG2/AVC) are not
supported. See Creating a Pool on page 130.

2. In Min Rate, enter the minimum rate of the video

PID.
Note:Total sum of minimum rates of streams in the pool
should be smaller than pool rate.
See Table 5–15, “Bitrate of a VBR Output Service,” on
page 128.

3. In Max Rate, enter the maximum rate of the video

PID. See Table 5–15, “Bitrate of a VBR Output Service,”
on page 128.

NOTE: You can configure the bitrate of the transcoded stream at service level. See Configuring Bitrate of
Transcoded Stream at Service Level on page 133.

Configuring Transcoding Aspect Ratio Parameters

1. To configure the required aspect ratio, click on the Aspect Ratio section:
2. Open the Aspect Ratio list and select one of the following options according to the video
format. For further information, see Table 5–8 on page 120:
 Follow the input - no changes to the aspect ratio.
 16:9 - (Letter Box) the international standard format of HDTV, non-HD digital television
and analog wide screen television.
 4:3 - (Center Cut) select for standard TV.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 119 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–8: Aspect Ratios and Video Format

Available Aspect
Video Format Explanation
Ratios Option

HD to HD Follow the Input Follow the Input

SD to SD Follow the Input Follow the Input

4:3 4:3
16:9 16:9

HD to SD 4:3 4:3
16:9 16:9

3. Video Scaling applies to downconversion, HD to SD only. In case of HD to SD, open the

Video Scaling list and select one of the following options:
 Force letter-box
 Force center-cut
 Follow AFD (fallback to letter-box) - default value
 Follow AFD (fallback to center-cut)
 Squeeze to Anamorphic - only in case the aspect Ratio is 16:9

Configuring Transcoding User Data Parameters

1. To manage user data at the output, click the User Data section and do the following:

2. Open the Closed Caption Conversion list and select one of the following options:
Table 5–9: Closed Caption Conversion Options:

Closed Caption Option Explanation

Pass Passthrough any closed caption data present in the input
stream

Discard Remove any closed caption data present in the input

stream

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 120 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Closed Caption Option Explanation

SCTE-20 Closed caption data outflows in formats including dual-
ATSC A/53 caption SCTE-20 + ATSC A/53. The closed caption data
SCTE-20 + ATSC format depends on Video Format and Stream Type.
A/53 ATSC A/72
NADBS

3. AFD (Active Format Definition) - open the list and select either of the following:
 Re-Insert - to re-insert data related to the aspect ratio of the image.
 Discard - to discard data related to the aspect
4. Generate AFD if Input Missing - open the list and select one of the following as shown in the
table below:
Table 5–10: AFD Generation Options

Definition Integer Aspect Ratio

SD-> SD 1 4:3 full frame (1000)

2 4:3 full frame (1001)

3 16:9 letterbox, vertically centered (1010)

4 14:9 letterbox, vertically centered (1011)

5 4:3 full frame, alternative 14:9 center (1101)

6 16:9 letterbox, alternative 14:9 center (1110)

7 16:9 letterbox, alternative 4:3 center (1111)

HD-> HD 11 16:9 full frame (1000)

12 4:3 pillarbox (1001)

13 16:9 full frame (1010)

14 14:9 pillarbox (1011)

15 4:3 pillarbox, alternative 14:9 center (1101)

16 16:9 full frame, alternative 14:9 center (1110)

17 16:9 full frame, alternative 4:3 center (1111)

5. Other - open the list and select one of the following:

 Re-Insert - to re-insert data related to the aspect ratio of the image.
 Discard - to discard all user data except AFD and closed caption data.
6. Border Filter applies to broadcast transcoding of SD to SD only. To enable, open the Border
Filter list and select On. The transcoding engine removes the following VBI data in the video
signal:
If input is 480i (NTSC), AMOL (Automated Measurement of Lineups) data is removed.
If input is 576i (PAL), WSS (Wide Screen Signaling) data is removed

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 121 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

In both cases, the VBI data occupies the first active line of video per video field. The line
suppressing functionality will copy the video data from the second line of video (per field)
into the first line of video (per field).
NOTE: Border Filter is not supported if Adaptive Passthrough is selected.

Configuring Transcoding GOP Parameters

 To configure GOP related parameters, do the following:
1. Click the GOP section.

2. To select the output GOP structure, open the GOP Mode list and select one of the following
options for the out:

Table 5–11: GOP Mode

Mode Explanation
Follow the Input Default. The GOP mode is as in the input
Fixed GOP The number of frames for inserting the I frame and for
inserting the reference frame (P frame) is fixed.

Variable The number of frames for inserting the I frame changes.

First it is as in the input but may change as required.

Capped Defines the maximum number of frames for inserting the I

frame. The number of frames should never exceed the
value defined in N frames.

Fixed M Defines a fixed number of frames for inserting a reference

frame (P frame) no matter when the I frame is inserted.

3. Open the Open/closed GOP list and select either of the following:
 Follow Input GOP - default option
 Closed GOP - frames from current GOP cannot reference I frames from previous GOP.
 Open GOP - frames from current GOP can reference I frames from a previous GOP.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 122 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

4. To define the number of frames for inserting a P frame, in M Frames, select the required
value. The following table lists the valid M frame values:

Table 5–12: Values of M Frame

Output Stream M Valid Values M Default Values

MPEG2 (HD/SD) 1,2,3 3

H.264 SD 1,2,4 4
H.264 HD1080i,

H.264 HD 720p 1,2,4,8 8

5. To define the maximum number of frames in the outgoing GOP, in N frames, enter the
maximum number of frames for inserting the I frame in a range of 6-90.
NOTE: N should be a multiple of M.

Configuring Transcoding DPI Parameters

DPI section allows to splice a transcoded VBR video stream following an SCTE35 request.
This feature is enabled, only is a DPI PID is provisioned.

NOTE: DPI is disabled for Any to PIP.

 To configure DPI related parameters, do the following:

1. Click the DPI section.
2. Select Transcode as CBR During Ad to enable this option. Transcode as CBR During Ad
allows to splice a transcoded VBR video stream following an SCTE35 request. Once you
enable this feature, configure the CBR bitrate for the stream and a timeout period. This
feature is enabled only if a DPI PID is provisioned.
3. Bitrate (Mbps) - Appears only if Transcode as CBR During Ad is enabled. Select the required
CBR for the video stream that applies during the splicing.
4. Timeout (seconds) - Appears only if Transcode as CBR During Ad is enabled. Select the
period of time after which splicing is stopped and the video stream switches back to VBR.
This parameter is used in case the avail is not indicated.

OSD Subtitles (On Screen Display)

ProStream 9000 supports DVB Subtitle Burn-in for Broadcast transcoded streams.

NOTE: This feature does not apply to Multiscreen or PIP transcoding.

Table 5-13 below shows soe OSD

specifications.
Table 5–13: OSD Specifications

Specification Explanation
Video format Any: SD/SD, HD/HD and HD/SD

Transcoded service Enable the feature independently

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 123 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–13: OSD Specifications

Specification Explanation
Language Single language per service
Single language per PID

Burn-in object Graphical objects only

NOTE: MPEG-2 to MPEG-2 Adaptive Pass-through cannot be used with DVB Subtitle Burn-in.

 To configure OSD Subtitles related parameters, do the following:

1. Click the OSD Subtitles section.
2. To enable OSD subtitles, select Enable DVB Subtitles.
3. - Select one of the Source Selection options:
 By PID - configure Input PID
 By Component - configure Input Program Number and Component ID
 By Language
4. Input PID - Applies if By PID is selected in Source Selection. Select the input PID.
5. Input Program Number - Applies if By Component or By Language is selected in
Source Selection. Select the input program number.
6. Component ID - Applies if By Component is selected in Source Selection. Select the
required component ID.
7 Language - Applies if By Language is selected in Source Selection. Select the required
. language.
8. Sync Compensation (ms) - Allows to synchronize between the video stream and the subtitles
in case of synchronization problem at the source. You can select the required synchronized
compensation in milliseconds. The allowed range is between -1500 to 3000 ms.
9. Page Timeout (sec) - To avoid displaying obsolete subtitles, enter in Page Timeout
the required period of time for displaying a subtitles page.

Configuring Transcoding Advanced Parameters

 To configure Advanced related parameters, click the Advanced section.
1. Mctf (Motion-Compensated Temporal Filtering) - by default it is off. Mctf affects the video
quality and reduces noises. If the service bit rate is low it is recommended to use strong Mctf.
However, strong Mctf affects the sharpness of the picture.
To select the required Mctf, open the Mctf list and select the required level ranging from very
weak to very strong.
2. Adaptaion Filed Insertion - you may add data about the stream. You cannot select the
content of data, only whether to add data.
3. PES Insert Rate - This parameters is required for H264 set-top-boxes and it applies to H264
output streams. Open the PES Insert Rate and select either of the following:
 Every Picture - the default option. PES packets are inserted per field.
 Alternate - PES packets are inserted per frame.
When output resolution is 720p, always use PES per frame.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 124 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

4. MP2 Adaptive-PT - applies to PEG2-to-MPEG2 SD, HD, 50/60Hz, CBR/VBR input and
output. When you wish to enable adaptive passthrough, the device automatically enforces the
required configuration. See also Video Quality Enhancement on page 132.
To enable adaptive passthrough, do the following:
a. In MP2 Adaptive-PT, select Enable. The following message
appears:

b. Click OK. The device automatically applies adaptive passthrough.

NOTE: When disabling MP2 Adaptive-PT, the enforced configuration is maintained, but the parameters
are enabled and you need to change their values as required.

5. Premium Channel - Applies to SD format only. Select this option to allocate an entire
transcoding engine for a single broadcast SD program. The allocation ensures that the
program does not affect and is not affected by any other program in case of problematic
input.
6. Frame Rate Auto Detection - Select this option to allow auto-detection of the frame rate.
This option is enabled as follows:
 Resolution Conversion is HD to HD or HD to SD
 Resolution Conversion is SD to SD and Premium Channel is enabled

Transcoding a PIP Service

The following section instructs you on how to transcode a PIP service using the web client of the
ProStream 9000 transcoder. The following table lists the required configuration to allow the
transcoding of the video PID of a PIP service:

Table 5–14: Required Configuration for Transcoding a PIP Service

Parameter Specification Explanation

Enabling PIP Enable PIP PIP configuration is allowed on the
device

Output Codec H.264

Output 96 × 96
Resolution 92 × 192
128 × 96
192 × 192
192x144
Video Bitrate 100 to 550 Kbps CBR only

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 125 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–14: Required Configuration for Transcoding a PIP Service

Parameter Specification Explanation

Frame Rate 50/60Hz

Service effecting operations for both the main and PIP coupled services:
 Adding/Removing PIP from the main Service
 Recovery from any error condition in main/PIP might result in service interruption to main/
PIP.
NOTE: You cannot delete, disable and un-transcode a main service when a PIP service is coupled with it.

The transcoding parameters are grouped in the Transcoding tab as explained below. For PCR
configuration, see Configuring a PCR PID on page 86.
 To enable and transcode PIP services, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. To enable PIP services on the device, select Administration > Video
Procession..

3. Select the ACE Picture in Picture (PIP).

4. Click Apply.
5. Log into the device.
6. In the Logical Output pane, drill down to the required program.

Drill down to the

required PID

Select Properties

7 Double-click the program node to view its PIDs.

.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 126 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

8. To transcode its video PID, select the PID and from the drop down menu select Properties.

Select Transcoding

9. To select the video format, open the Resolution Conversion list and select Any to PIP.
10. To define the output resolution, open the Output Resolution list and select one of the
following:
 96 × 96
 92 × 192
 128 × 96
 192x144
 192 × 192
11. To define the profile, open the Main list and select either Main or Baseline.
12. To define the main service focus on the PIP section.
 Open the Main Service list and select services that may be coupled with PIP services

NOTE: Main and PIP services have the same input. Any input problem, ensues an alarm on the main
service.

13. To define the required output bit rate of the service, click the Bitrate section and do the
following:
 In Rate, enter the required output bitrate in bps of the video PID. See Table 5–16 on
page 128

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 127 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Defining Output Bitrate of a Transcoded Service

In case the output service is a VBR service in a pool, configure it according to the following table:

Table 5–15: Bitrate of a VBR Output Service

VBR Output Service Type Min Rate (Mbps) Max Rate (Mbps)
SD MPEG2 0.5 8

HD MPEG2 2 18

SD H.264 0.5 8

HD H.264 1 18

If the output service is a CBR service, configure it according to the following table:

Table 5–16: Bitrate of a CBR Output Service

CBR Output Service Type Min Rate (Mbps) Max Rate (Mbps)
SD MPEG2 2 8

HD MPEG2 6 20

SD H.264 1 8
HD H.264 3 18

HD/SD PIP 0.1 0.55

PCR and Video Transcoding

 The PCR PID should outflow over the video PID. To configure it, see Configuring a PCR PID
on page 86.
 Reference PCR value is indicated for all PIDs of the service. Reference PCR indicates the
PCR PID in the input. If, the input PCR PID changes, you need to manually change the
Reference PCR PID for every PID of the transcoded service. Select the PID > PID
Properties page:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 128 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Video PID of the transcoded

service is selected

Ref PCR PID indicating the

PCR PID in the input

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 129 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

 When transcoding a service, PCR Generation Mode is not selected in Service > PCR table,
Generation Mode:.

generation Mode is not

selected

Transcoding Conventions
Table 5–17: Transcoding Conventions

Icon Explantion
Transcoded Video PID

Transcoded Audio PID

Pool

For transcoding conventions, see Stream Config Page Conventions on page

28.
Creating a Pool
 To create a pool, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 130 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

2. Select DiviTrack > DTMX:.

Click to
add a pool
Click to
remove
a
selected
pool

Configure pool

3. In Pools, to add a pool, click Add Pool.

 In Pools, configure the name of the pool and its bitrate. The default pool rate is 20bps.
Enter the required pool rate in bps.
NOTE: The bitrate of the pool should consider the transport bitrate and allow enough bitrate for
additional PIDs that are included in the TS.

4. In Pool Configuration, select the required pool.

5. To associate a pool with a PID, click Add.
6. Click OK. The PID is added to the pool.
7. View the following information:
 Pool Bitrate - the configured bitrate of the pool.
 A table that lists and shows the following parameters of pool streams:

Table 5–18: Parameters of Streams in a Pool

Parameter Explanation
# Sequential number of the stream

Video ES The PID, its program, and its output TS number

Resolution Input - HD/SD
Conversion Output - HD/SD

Transcoding Transcoding Type:

H-M - input H.264 to MPEG2 output
M-M - input MPEG2 to MPEG2 output
H-H - input H.264 to H.264 output

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 131 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

Table 5–18: Parameters of Streams in a Pool

Parameter Explanation
Min. Bitrate The minimum rate of the stream

Max. Bitrate The maximum rate of the stream

Nominal Bitrate The required bitrate

(Mbps)

Removing a Pool
 To remove a pool, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.
2. Select DiviTrack > DTMX:.

Click to
add a pool
Click to
remove
a
selected
pool

Configure pool

3. In Pool, select the required pool.

4. Click Remove.

Video Quality Enhancement

To improve the Video Quality (VQ), ProStream 9000 supports Adaptive Passthrough processing.
This type of processing adoptively selects between the following modes, to get better VQ:
 Full rate shaping
 Full pass-through - where input is passed as is without transcoding. When the output stream
bitrate is higher than the input stream bitrate, the device will mostly operate in full pass-
through (very low input, VBV, may disable pass-through for a short period)
 Partial pass-through - where B-frames only are rate shaped. Partial pass-through tends to
kick- in when output bitrate is slightly lower than input bitrate (i.e. small rate reduction ratios).

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 132 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Video Transcoding
Procedure

NOTE: Adaptive passthrough processing triggers-in when applicable and you cannot configure it.

Adaptive passthrough applies to the following:

 Video format - SD, HD
 Stream type - MPEG2-to-MPEG2
 Horizontal resolution - 50/60Hz
 Bitrate - CBR/VBR input and output
When adaptive pass-through is enabled, the following configuration is enforced:
 All applicable user configurations (Output Resolution, Aspect Ratio, GOP Mode, Open/Close
GOP) are set to Follow the input
 User Data - Closed Caption is set to Pass
Discard AFD is grayed out
Discard Other is grated out
 AF Data is set to No
 MCTF is set to Off or Very Weak
 Set-top box mode is set to DVB.

NOTE: When input bitrate is high, the adaptive passthrough feature might be disabled.

NOTE: Stream Conditioning is automatically applied. Stream Conditioning optimizes the splice in/out
points for downstream splicing. Stream conditioning, namely, GOP manipulation and VBV management, on
video stream is based on SCTE35 triggers.

Configuring Bitrate of Transcoded Stream at Service Level

ProStream with ACE 5.2 controls the output bitrate at Service level. The transcoded video
bitrate is controlled, to maintain overall constant bitrate for the whole service while
maintaining video quality. When audio or data PIDs are not transferred, the bitrate is utilized
for the video stream. The video bitrate is maximized to the overall bitrate of the service.

NOTE: To allow CBR with service bitrate control, the video stream should be transcoded.

 To configure a transcoded stream at the service level, do the following:

1. In the Logical Output section, select the required program. Its video PID should be
transcoded.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 133 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

2. From the program drop-down menu, select Properties.

Select Service CBR

Select the
required bitrate

3. To enable the feature, select Service CBR. The Bitrate box is enabled.
4. In Bitrate, enter the required service bitrate. This bitrate is maintained as the overall constant
bitrate for the whole service while ensuring video quality. In the PID Properties dialog, in
Service Bitrate, the bitrate is read only.

Alarm Related to Bitrate Control at Service Level

 In case the bitrate allocated for the video stream is too low, the alarm Service CBR Bitrate
Too Low is raised by the service.
 In case the overall bitrate of non-video streams exceeds the configured service bitrate, the
alarm Service CBR Overflow is raised by the service.

Audio Transcoding
This version of ProStream 9000 enables transcoding of audio PIDs as well as video PIDs.
The density varies according to the input/output stream type and input/output codecs. See
Audio Transcoding Options and Density on page 137

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 134 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Audio Transcoding Glossary

Table 5–19: Audio Transcoding Glossary

Term Explanation
AC3 Dolby
E-AC3 Enhanced Dolby

AAC Advanced Audio Coding

ALA Audio Level Adjustment

HE-AAC High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding

HE-AAC v1 High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding version 1

HE-AAC v2 High-Efficiency Advanced Audio Coding version 2

MC Multichannel (5.0/5.1)

MP1L2 MPEG1 Layer II

ST Stereo (2/0), Joint Stereo, Mono (left or right channel), Dual Mono
LFE Low Frequency Effects channel

Audio Transcoding Specifications

The following table presents the audio transcoding specifications:

Table 5–20: Audio Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Stream Type See table Table 5–23 on page 137.
Density  To view the number of transcoded PIDs per card, see Table 5–24
on page 138 and Table 5–25 on page 139.
 To view the required processing units, per input/output
transcoding option, see Table 5–26 on page 139.
Number of audio Up to 32
PIDs per
transcoded
service

Coding Modes  Stereo(2/0) / Joint Stereo / Single Channel (left or right) /

Dual Mono
 Multi channel
 3/2 + LFE, namely 5.1
3/2, namely 5.0

 Follow the Input

Sampling Rate Always follows the input sampling rate: 48KHz

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 135 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5–20: Audio Transcoding Specifications

Specification Explanation
Bit rate  Supported bit rates according to Codec (MP1L2/AAC/AC3) and
Coding Mode (stereo/multichannel), see Table 5–27 on page
140.
 CBR output only
Copyright  Copyright - Original
Processing  Copyright - Copy
 Not Copyright - Original
 Not Copyright - Copy
 Follow the input.

Audio Level  According to Junger Level MagicTM. Adjusts the audio level from
Adjustment any source at any time to a given reference level.
CAUTION: Fixed gain - if ALA is not used, you can
configure Fixed Gain adjustments.

Error Handling Full support of Silence Mode. If enabled, silence is inserted in cases
of corrupt/missing audio input.

Output PCR Supports PCR on audio PIDs.

PES per Frame One to six frames per PES.

Audio The device generates and adds the required descriptors to the
Descriptors transcoded audio PID according to the transcoding output
configuration.

Synchronization Allows adjustment of audio delay (PTS) to compensate for input with
Compensation A/V synchronization problems.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 136 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Specific Codec Specifications

MPEG1 Layer 2
Table 5–21: MPEG1L2 Specifications

Parameter Specification
Error Protection Supports error protection

AAC
Table 5–22: AAC Specifications

Parameter Specification
AAC Coding Extensions Supports the following:
 MPEG-4 AAC (LC)
 MPEG-4 HE AAC
 MPEG-4 HE AAC v2
 MPEG-2 AAC (LC)
 MPEG-2 HE AAC
 MPEG-2 HE AAC v2

Transport Format  ADTS

 LATM

TNS Supports Temporal Noise Shaping

PNS Supports Perceptual Noise Substitution

Dolby®
Supports Dolby specifications for AC-3 and E-AC-3. For Dolby supported parameters, see table
Table 5–28 on page 141.

Audio Transcoding Options and Density

The device transcodes audio PIDs as listed in table Table 5–23 on page
137.
NOTE: All options that are marked with a “V” are fully tested. Other options are not tested, but are
available for configuration.

Table 5–23: Audio Transcoding Options

Output AAC Dolby

MP- HE-
Input 1l2 AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AAC AC3 E-AC3
V2
ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
MP1L2 ST V V V V V V V V V V

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 137 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5–23: Audio Transcoding Options

AAC Dolby
MP- HE-
1l2 AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AAC AC3 E-AC3
V2
ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
ST V V V V V V V V V V
AAC LC
MC V V V V V V V V V V
HE-AAC ST V V V V V V V V V V
AAC
V1 MC V V V V V V V V V V
HE-AAC ST V V V V V V V V V V
V2
Dolby AC3 ST V V V V V V V V V V
MC V V V V V V V V V V
E-AC3 ST V V V V V V V V V V
MC V V V V V V V V V V

The following table lists the possible combinations of audio transcoding per transcoding card.
In Table 5–24, the numbers do not include ALA processing.
In Table 5–25, the numbers include ALA processing.
To define audio transcoding combinations, also use table Table 5–26 on page 139.

Table 5–24: Audio Transcoding Density without ALA

MP1L2 AAC Dolby

HE-
AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AC3 E-AC3
AAC
Output V2

Input ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC

MP1L2 ST 60 48 23 33 14 38 18 12 12 6
AAC ST 46 38 20 28 13 31 16 11 12 6
(all flavours) MC 27 24 16 20 11 21 13 10 10 5
Dolby ACE ST/MC 33 29 18 23 12 25 14 10 10 5
Dolby E-AC3 ST/MC 22 20 14 17 10 18 12 9 9 5

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 138 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Table 5–25: Audio Transcoding Density with ALA

MP1-
AAC Dolby
L2
Outpu t HE-AAC
HE-
AAC LC AAC AC3 E-AC3
V1
Input V2
ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
MP1L2 ST 30 27 14 21 10 23 14 9 10 5
AAC ST 26 23 13 19 9 20 13 8 10 5
(all MC 18 17 11 15 8 16 11 7 8 4
flavors)
ST/ 21 19 12 16 9 17 11 8 9 5
Dolby AC3
MC
Dolby E- ST/ 16 15 10 13 8 14 10 7 8 4
AC3 MC

The following table, Table 5–26, lists the required processing units, per input/output transcoding
option. Use this table for defining maximum capacity, per card, of any stream combination.

NOTE: A single card has total of 3750 processing units.

ALA requires more processing units:

 ALA ST (2.0) requires additional 61 processing units
 ALA MC (5.0/5.1) requires additional 104 processing units
For example:
MP1L2 to MP1L2 (Stereo) without ALA: requires 63 processing units
MP1L2 to MP1L2 (Stereo) with ALA: 63+61 = 123 processing units:

Table 5–26: Audio Transcoding Required Processing Units

MP1-
AAC Dolby
L2
HE-
Output AAC LC HE-AAC V1 AAC AC3 E-AC3
V2
Input ST ST MC ST MC ST ST MC ST MC
MP1L2 ST 63 79 164 114 268 99 209 313 313 625
AAC ST 82 99 188 134 289 121 235 341 313 625
(all MC 139 157 235 188 341 179 289 375 375 750
flavours)
ST/ 114 129 208 163 306 150 255 348 342 627
Dolby AC3
MC
Dolby E- ST/ 168 184 263 218 360 205 310 403 397 681
AC3 MC

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 139 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding

Audio Transcoding Bitrate

The following table lists the audio ES bitrate in kbps. The allowed bitrate values are according to
input/output stream type - MP1L2/AAC/AC3 and Coding Mode - single/stereo/multi channel.
Bitrate default values:
 192kbps - for Single/Stereo channel
 384kbps - for Multi channel

Table 5–27: Audio Transcoding - Output

Bitrate
Output Audio Codec ES Bitrate (Kbps)
MP1L2 stereo (2.0) 32 - 384

AAC stereo (2.0) 32 - 384

AAC multi-channel (5.1) 224 - 640

HE AACv1 stereo (2.0) 32 - 128

HE AAC v1 multi-channel (5.1) 96 - 192

HE AAC V2 stereo (2.0) 32 -64

Dolby Digital (AC-3) stereo (2.0) 96 - 640

Dolby Digital (AC-3) multi-channel (5.1) 32 - 640

E-Dolby Digital (E-AC3) stereo/multi-channel 32-1024

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 140 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

Dolby® Supported Parameters

Table 5–28: Dolby Supported Parameters

Topic Parameter
Bitstream Information (BSI) Bit Stream Mode

Dialog Normalization
Production Information (mix level and room type)

BSI Extension Stereo Downmix Preference

Mix Levels

Surround EX Mode

Head Phone Mode

A/D Converter Type

Alternate BSI Syntax

E-AC3 additional configuration Source Sample Rate

Stream Type
Sub Stream ID

Processing DC High Pass Filter

Bandwidth Low Pass Filter

Digital De-emphasize

Dynamic Range Compression

Multichannel Processing LFE Low Pass Filter

90 Degree Phase Shift

3 dB Attenuation

Audio Transcoding Procedure

 To transcode an audio PID
1. Log into the device.
2. In the Logical Output section, select the required program.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 141 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

3. Right click the required audio PID and select Properties.

Select to enable
transcoding

4. In Output PID, select the required output PID.

5. In ES Type, select the required type of the output audio PID.
6. To enable transcoding, select Transcoding.
7. To configure the transcoding related parameters, focus on the Transcoding Configuration
section.
For basic, see

Configuring Basic Transcoding

 To configure basic transcoding, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 142 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

1. Focus on the Transcoding Configuration > Basic section.

2. To select the input stream type, open the Input ES Type list and select one of the following:
 3 (0x3) MPEG-1 Audio
 4 (0x4) MPEG-2 (Musicam) Audio
 6 (0x6) E-AC-3 (DVB) Audio
 6 (0x6) AC-3 (DVB) Audio
 15 (0xF) ACC ADTS
 17 (0x11) ACC LATM
 129 (0x81) AC-3 (ATSC) Audio
 135 (0x87) E-AC-3 (ATSC) Audio
3. Original Coding Format - Allows to configure the compression type and to allocate
trandcoding resources. Select one of the following input coding formats: Coding format
options depend on the selected input stream type as the following table lists:.

Table 5–29: Input Coding Format Options according to Input Stream

Input Stream Type Decoding Format Options

MPEG1 Layer II Any decoding format. Not configurable

AC-3 ATSC

E-AC-3 ATSC
AC-3/E-AC-3 DVB Any

AC-3 (default)

E-AC-3

AAC Any input decoding format

AAC LC

ACC HE

If the coding format of the input stream is unknown, select Any. If a low MHz decoder (AAC
LC / AC3) is selected and the actual decoding format is a high MHz decoder (AAC HE / E-
AC3), an alarm is raised.
4. ES Type - Read only. Indicates the output stream type. To select the Output stream type,
focus on the top of the dialog, ES Type list.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 143 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

5. Original Coding Mode - allows to allocate transcoding resources. If the coding of the input
stream is unknown, whether ST - less resources, or MC - more resources, select Any. If ST
is selected and the input coding is MC, an alarm is raised.
To select the input coding mode, open the Input Coding Mode list and select the required
coding mode. Coding mode options depend on the selected input stream type as the
following table lists:

Table 5–30: Input Coding Options according to Input Stream Type

Input Stream Type Input Coding Options

(0x3) MPEG-1 Audio Any input coding. Not configurable

AC-3/E-AC-3 all flavors Any

ACC
Stereo/Mono

Multichannel

6. To select the output coding mode, open the Output Coding Mode list and select the required
coding mode. Coding mode options depend on the selected output stream type as the
following table lists:

Table 5–31: Output Coding Options according to Output Stream Type

HE AAC HE AAC
Output Coding Options MPEG1L2 AAC AC3/E-AC3
V1 V2
Follow the input V V V V
Stereo (2/0) V V V V V
Single channel left (1/0) V V V V
Single channel right (1/0) V V V V
Dual Mono (1+) V V V V
Joint Stereo (2/0) V
Multi Channel (3/2) V V V
Multi Channel (3/2 LFE) V V V

NOTE: Any changes to input/output Codec, input/output Coding Mode and output AAC is service
affecting.

7. Sampling rate is 48 kHz and it is not converted.

8. To define the ES bitrate in kbps, open the ES Bitrate list and select the required output ES
bitrate. The bitrate list is updated according to the output stream type and the selected output
codec. See Table 5–27 on page 140.
TS Bitrate is updated to display the total TS bitrate. View TS bitrate in TS Bitrate
9. box. Affective Bitrate (Kbps) - Read only. View the current ES bitrate.

Advanced Transcoding Configuration

To configure advanced transcoding operations, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 144 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > Advanced.

2. To select the required copyright mode, open the Copyright list and select one of the following
 Copyright - Original: indicates that the audio stream is copyright protected by the original
copyright bitstream
 Copyright - Copy: indicates that the audio stream is copyright protected by a copy of the
copyright bitstream
 Not Copyright: Original - the original audio stream is not copyright protected
 Not Copyright: Copy - the copy of the audio stream is not copyright protected
 Follow the input
3. Frames per PES - to control the number of Audio frames that are packed in a single PES
(Packetized Elementary Stream), open the Frames per PES list and select the required
number between one to six. Six is the default.
4. Static Level Adjustment - If ALA is not used, you may configure a fixed gain adjustment for
the output audio stream. It increases/decreases the audio volume by a fixed dB value. The
valid range is (-20) to 0 dB and the default value is 0. See Configuring Audio Level Adjustment
on page 151.
5. Delay Adjustment (msec) - to adjust audio delay (PTS) to compensate for input with A/V
synchronization problems, enter the required value, between (-500) to 500ms. The default
value is 0.
6. Force Decoder as Dual Mono - check this box to output one channel of a stereo pair instead of
down-mixing both channels into a single channel.

Logo Insertion
The Logo Insertion feature places a small user-provided logo image over the input video. The
image is static (non-animated) and it can have transparent and translucent regions.
 To insert a logo, do the following:
1. From the Logo Name box, select the .png file needed. To upload a .png file for a logo, see
Uploading Logo Insertion Files on page 176
2. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > Logo Insertion
3. Check the Enable Logo Insertion check box to insert the logo.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 145 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

4. Use Vertical Offset and Horizontal Offset to offset the position by a number of pixels from a
reference point. Reference positions are top left corner, top right corner, bottom left corner
and bottom right corner.
5. Transparency is adjusted on a scale from 0-100, with 0 = opaque, and 100 = invisible.

Configuration Following the Output Stream Type

Transcoding Configuration section is updated according to the output stream type and it allows
configuration specific to this stream type.

Specific MPEG-1L2 Configuration

The instructions below assume that the output stream type is 3 (0x3) MPEG-1 Audio, or 4 (0x4)
MPEG-2 (Musicam) Audio.
To configure a specific MPEG-1 or MPEG-2 output stream, do the following:
1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > MPEG-Layer II
The MP1L2 menu appears

MPEG-1 Layer II
menu appears

2. To configure, click MPEG-1 Layer II.

3. To enable error protection, select the Error Protection box.

Specific AAC Configuration

AAC and HE AAC can be encapsulated in the output transport stream in either of the following
methods:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 146 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

 ADTS (Audio Data Transport Stream) is the encapsulation method used if you select MPEG-
2
HE AAC as the coding mode extension. ADTS is assigned a stream type value of 0x0F.
 LATM (Low-overhead Audio Transport Multiplex) is the default encapsulation method used if
you select MPEG-4 HE AAC as the coding mode extension. LATM is assigned a stream
type value of 0x11.

To define a specific AAC configuration, do the following:
The instructions below assume that the output stream type is AAC or HE AAC.
1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > ACC. T.
2. To select a coding extension, open the Coding Mode list and select one of the following:
 MPEG-4 AAC
 MPEG-4 HE AAC
 MPEG-4 HE AAC v2
 MPEG-2 AAC
 MPEG-2 HE AAC
 MPEG-2 HE AAC v2
3. To enable error protection, select Error Protection.
4. To enable Temporal Noise Shaping (TNS), select
5. TNS.
To enable Perceptual Noise Substitution (PNS), select PNS. When Coding Mode is MPEG-
2, PNS is selected not configurable. When Coding Mode is MPEG-4, PNS is selected and
Specific Dolby ® AC-3TM/E-AC-3TM Configuration
The instructions below assume that the output stream type is AC-3 all flavours.
1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > AC-3. Click the AC-3/E-AC-3 menu.
2. The bitstream mode describes the audio service contained within the Dolby Digital bitstream.
The stream can carry a main audio service or an associated service. The default bit stream
mode is Complete Main. Open the Bit Stream Mode list and select one of the following
modes:
 Follow the input
 Main audio: Complete Main - A complete audio service that includes dialog, music, and
effects. You can supplement a complete audio service with visually impaired, hearing
impaired, commentary, emergency, and karaoke/voice-over associated services.
 Main Audio: Music and Effects - An associated service with music and effects but no
dialog for the program. You can add the dialog by providing a dialog-associated service.
 Associated: Visually Impaired - An associated service with a narrative description of the
program's visual content. Audio service for the visually impaired allows the viewer to
enjoy the audio aspects with a commentary of the visual aspects of the program.
 Associated: Hearing Impaired - An associated service with a single channel of dialog but
no music or effects. For the hearing-impaired viewer, the dialog is easier to understand
without the combination of music and sound effects in the audio stream.
 Associated: Dialogue - An associated service with multiple channels for several different
languages.
 Associated: Commentary - An associated service similar to the dialog-associated service
that provides optional program commentary, not the primary dialog for the program.
Used for added commentary during sporting events or educational programming.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 147 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

 Associated: Emergency - An associated service with audio tones that accompany

emergency announcements. The tones replace the main audio of a program.
 Main/Associated: Karaoke/Voice-Over - An associated service similar to the emergency-
associated service, but karaoke audio tones do not replace the main audio of a program.
3. Dialog Level (dialnorm) - To select the required value, open the Dialog Level (dialnorm) and
select either of the following values: Follow the Input, or a value between -1 to -31(dBFS).
This option is the single most important Dolby Digital metadata parameter. Its setting
represents the average loudness of dialog in a presentation, and is defined in terms of
decibels below 0 dBFS.
When received at the consumer’s Dolby Digital decoder, this parameter setting determines
the level shift in the decoder that sets, or normalizes, the average audio output of the
decoder to a preset level. This aids in matching audio volume between program sources. A
dialnorm value of –31 results in no level shift, a value of –1 results in maximum level shift.
The proper setting of the dialog level parameter enables the Dynamic Range Control profiles
chosen by the content producer to work as intended in less-than-optimal listening
environments.
4. Dolby Surround Mode - indicates whether the two-channel Dolby Digital (AC-3) stream
contains a Dolby Surround (Lt/Rt) program that requires Dolby Pro LogicR decoding. Open
the Dolby Surround Mode list and select one of the following modes:
 Follow the input
 No indication
 Not Encoded in Dolby Surround - The bitstream contains information not encoded in
Dolby Surround.
 Encoded in Dolby Surround - The bitstream contains information encoded in Dolby
Surround.
5. Center Downmix Level - applies to Encoding Format AC-3 only. It indicates the level shift
applied to the C channel when adding to the L and R outputs as a result of downmixing to an
Lt/Rt output. Open the AC-3 Center Mix Level (dB) list and select one of the following:
 Follow the Input
 -3
 -4.5
 -6
6. AC-3 Surround Mix Level (dB) - applies t to Encoding Format AC-3 only. indicates the level
shift applied to the surround channels when downmixing to an Lt/Rt output. Open the
Surround Downmix Level (dB) list and select one of the following:
 Follow the Input
 -3
 -6

7 To configure, focus on the required menu and define parameters as explained in the
. following sections:
Multichannel, see AC-3 All Flavors Multichannel Menu on page
149 BSI Extension, see AC-3 All Flavors BSI Extension Menu on
page 149 Advanced see AC-3 All Flavors Advanced Menu on page
150
© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 148 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

AC-3 All Flavors Multichannel Menu

This menu is available for Dolby AC-3 audio streams when Multichannel coding mode is selected.
1. Focus on the Multichannel menu.

NOTE: Output Coding Mode should be Follow the input or Multichannel.3/2 and 3/2+LFE

2. LFE LowPass Filter - must be provided only if the LFE channel is enabled. Select the
LFE LowPass Filter box to turn on low-pass filter for low-frequency effects.
3. The following fields allow you to enable processing options for the surround audio channel:
 Surround Phase Shift - Select to modulate the phase of the reference signal by 90
degrees.
 Surround 3 dB attenuation - Select to enable 3 dB attenuation of the surround audio.
AC-3 All Flavors BSI Extension Menu
Bitstream extended information is additional information to be carried about the audio program
and also more choices for stereo downmixing. When the metadata parameters carried in Dolby
Digital were first described, they were generically called bitstream information, or BSI. The
additional parameter definitions are called extended BSI.
1. Focus on the BSI Extension menu.
NOTE: Output Coding Mode should be Follow the input or Multichannel.3/2 and 3/2+LFE

2. Extended BSI - Select to enable the following BSI extension parameters.

3. Stereo Downmix Preference - Indicates whether the preferred stereo downmix is one of the
following:
 Not Indicated
 Lt/Rt Downmix Preferred - left total/right total
 Lo/Ro Downmix Preferred - stereo left only/stereo right only
4. A/D Converter Type - Select the type of analog-to-digital converter: Standard or
HDCD Encoded.
5. Surround EX Mode - indicates whether the audio is encoded for Dolby ® Digital Surround
EXTM. Select one of the following:
 Not Indicated
 Not Encoded in Dolby Surround EX
 Encoded in Dolby Surround EX

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 149 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

6. Lo/Ro Center Mix Level - select the center mix level for left only/stereo right only
downmixing.
7 Lo/Ro Surround Mix Level - select the surround mix level for left only/stereo right only
. downmixing
8. Lt/Rt Center Mix Level - select the center mix level for left total/right total downmixing.
9. Lt/Rt Surround Mix Level - select the surround mix level for left total/right total downmixing.
10. Head Phone Mode - select one of the following:
 Not Indicated
 Not Encoded in Dolby Headphone
 Encoded in Dolby Headphone

AC-3 All Flavors Advanced Menu

1. Focus on the Advanced section:

2. Mixing Level (dB SPL) - describes the peak sound pressure level (SPL) used during the final
mixing session at the studio or on the dubbing stage. Open the Mixing Level (dB SPL) list
and select one of the following:
 Follow the input
 A value between 80 to 111dB, in 1 dB increments
3. Room Type - describes the equalization used during the final mixing session at the studio or
on the dubbing stage. A large room is a dubbing stage with the industry standard
X-curve equalization; a small room has flat equalization. This parameter allows an amplifier
to be set to the same equalization as heard in the final mixing environment. Open the Room
Type list and select one of the following:
 Follow the input
 Not indicated - The room type is not identified in the stream
 Large room, X curve monitor - Film-style dubbing stage, x-curve monitoring
 Small room, flat monitor - Typical recording studio, flat monitoring
4. DC Filter - by default this filter is enabled. If selected, activates a 3-Hz direct current (DC)
filter for all input channels. The DC filter removes any inaudible low frequency signals and
also any DC bias in the input signal.
5. LowPass Filter - select to enable this filter. If selected, activates a bandwidth low pass filter
with a cut-off close to the audio bit rate you specified.
6. Digital De-emphasize - Specifies whether de-emphasis is on or off. In some cases, an audio
signal may be scaled with a 50/15 microsecond pre-emphasis prior to its transmission.
7 Dynamic Range Compression (DRC) - Different home listening environments present a wide
. range of requirements regarding dynamic range. Rather than simply compressing the audio
program to work well in the poorest listening environments, Dolby Digital encoders can

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 150 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

calculate Dynamic Range Control (DRC) information and send it via the Line Mode and RF
Mode metadata parameters to the consumer decoder. This metadata can then be applied to
the audio signal by the decoder to reduce its dynamic range.
Through the proper setting of DRC profiles during content creation, the producer can provide
the best possible presentation of program content in virtually any listening environment,
regardless of the quality of the equipment, number of channels, or ambient noise level in the
consumer’s home.
Six preset DRC profiles are available to content producers: Film Light, Film Standard,
Music Light, Music Standard, Speech, and None. Each is applied with the values shown
below.
To set the required Dynamic Range Compression, open the DRC list and select the profile
that

represents the acceptable range for the program type as explained below. You can
None
 Film Standard and Film Light - In most movies, the dialog is the softest audible part of
the sound track. Anything softer in volume than the dialog may not be heard in a typical
movie theatre. Therefore, movie sound tracks require only a small amount of volume
boost for low levels. Too much boost of low-level audio may reveal unintended sounds in
the audio sound track, such as camera reels and background traffic noise that were
recorded during production. Dolby recommends setting Film Standard for most program
material.
 Music Standard and Music Light - The acceptable volume range is determined by the
music type. Most music has a limited variation in volume range, but you must set an
acceptable level so the sound is not too far above other programming.
 Speech - Most speech sources have limited dynamic range of audio fluctuation.
However, some speech sources can have moments that are abnormally loud or soft.
The Speech profile uses a 10 dB acceptable range for average speech. If the speech
source contains a heavy amount of background noise, use Film Standard or Film Light
so the background noise is not audible during gaps in the speech content.

Configuring Audio Level Adjustment

To configure the audio level Adjustment, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 151 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

1. Focus on Transcoding Configuration > Audio Level Adjustment.

2. Under General, configure the following parameters:

 Audio Level Adjustment - enables the ALA according to Level Magic LM™ - an adaptive
level control algorithm capable of adjusting audio level from any source at any time to a
given reference level.
Enable when incoming source levels vary widely between channels (Service A seems
twice as loud as Service B), or when transient audio level changes within the same
channel during commercial break, explosions or loud music Vs. dialogs.
Once you select this option LFE Mode and Input Gain are enabled and additional menus
appear:
Automatic Gain Control - see Automatic Gain Control (AGC) on page
153 Transient Processor - see Transient Processor on page 153
Limiter - see Limiter on page 154
 LFE Mode - use for multichannel (5.1) streams. There are two options for LFE control:
Unlinked Derived - Default. LFE follows the Input Gain (dB) configuration of 3/2.
Unlinked Adjustable - LFE may have different Input Gain (dB) configuration than
3/2. Once you select this option, Input Gain (dB) box appears also for LFE

 Input Gain (dB) - Allows to configure the input signal level towards the target loudness
level that streams into the ALA module. You may configure this parameter in case the
input loudness level is received distorted and you need to fix the audio level before the
ALA processing module. Enter the required value between -20 to +20dB in steps of
0.1dB

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 152 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

When ALA Enable is selected, additional menus appear. The following sections describe these
menus.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC)

Use the AGC to adjust the output level by performing slow gain changes.
1. Focus on the Automatic Gain Control menu.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

TIP: Loudness Target (LKFS) is the main parameter when configuring the ALA processing module.

 Loudness Target (LKFS) - Allows to configure the desired output loudness level in LKFS
(Loudness, K-weighted, relative to Full Scale). A unit of LKFS is equivalent to a
decibel. The default is 24.
 Time - The amount of time the ALA module takes to scale incoming audio with loudness
levels not at target. The time range is from 1 second to 9000 seconds.
 Max. Gain - Limits the maximum amplification allowed by the AGC module.The range
available is 0 to 20dB in steps of 0.1 dB.
 Freeze Level - Allows avoiding the undesired gain increase during signal breaks and
overshoots by following signal attack. If the input signal level decreases and reaches the
freeze level, all the states of AGC (leveler) and transient processor are frozen and kept
unchanged until the input signal level rises again. The range available is 0 to-70 in steps
of 0.1dB.

Transient Processor
Use the Transient processor to adjust the output level by performing fast gain changes.
1. Focus on the Transient Processor menu.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

 Response - Indicates the characteristic of gain change by the transient processor.
Response value depends on your program genre. Three values are available: soft, mid
(default) and hard.
Soft - select, in case there are just a few level changes or if you want to keep the original
dynamic range best (e.g. classical music)
Mid - select for mixed program
Hard - select for live venues (sport etc.) with frequent unexpected level changes
 Max. Gain - Limits the maximum amplification allowed by the Transient processor
module. The range available is 0 to 20 dB in steps of 0.1 dB.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 153 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 5 Broadcast Transcoding Audio Transcoding Procedure

Limiter
The Audio brick wall limiter guarantees precise peak limiting without any distortion.
1. Focus on the Limiter menu.

2. Configure the parameters as explained below for 3/2 and LFE:

 Max. Peak Level (dBFS) - The maximum loudness level. Dynamic audio level adjustment
processing will ensure that audio loudness is below Max Peak Level. The default is –6.
 Processing - Allows to define the behavior of the limiter, mostly affecting the release of
the limiter audio level reduction. Several processing modes are available: Live, Speech,
Universal (default) and Classic.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 154 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
6
Multiscreen Transcoding
Overview
This version of ProStream 9000 transcodes services and may output them also as multiscreen
compliant services. ProStream 9000 produces a valid output for mobile web devices that support
multi-bitrate switching such as Apple iPhone, Microsoft Silverlight Smoothing Streaming Player,
Adobe Flash Player.

NOTE: ProStream 9000 may simultaneously transcode broadcast streams and multiscreen
compliant streams.

To comply with multiscreen specifications, ProStream 9000 outputs an MBTS (Multi Bitrate
Transport Stream). MBTS is composed of SPTSs (Single Program Transport Streams), or
several profiles that output the same service data in different quality levels. The following
illustration shows a typical MBTS with three profiles:

Glossary
The following table lists transcoding multiscreen common terminology:

Table 6–1: Transcoding Multiscreen Terminology

Item Explanation
ABR Average Bitrate
CBR Constant Bitrate

HD High Definition video format

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 155 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–1: Transcoding Multiscreen Terminology

Item Explanation
MBTS Multi Bitrate Transport Stream
PTS Presentation Time Stamp

SAR Sample Aspect Ratio

SPTS Single Program Transport Stream

SD Standard Definition video format

Sub-SD This video format includes all resolutions that are below
the resolutions supported by SD.

VBR Variable Bitrate

The following table lists the transcoding multiscreen specifications:

Table 6–2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation
Density  Density - four ACE cards per unit

Services  Video
Each transcoding engine - per single input:
 Up to 2 HD output profiles
 Up to 4 SD output profiles
 Up to 1 HD and 2 SD output profiles
 Up to 1 HD and 3 Sub SD output profiles
 Up to 1 1280x720p 50/60Hz - available only on the last
two transcoding engines of each ACE card
 Up to 1 1920x1080p 25/30Hz - available on all transcoding
engines
The number of supported services depends on the mix of profile
resolutions. For example, in 50Hz, SD low resolution supports 1 HD
and 3 SD. For exact density per use case, refer to product spec and/
or call to customer support.

Fully populated platform - 4 ACE cards:

 20 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 1-4 output
profiles
 10 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 5-8 output
profiles
 6 Input services that outflow in MBTS that includes 9-12 output
profiles
 any of the above mentioned combinations with total of 80
profiles per device
 Audio
Density of audio streams is according to ACE Audio transcoding spec.
Video Format Input - H.264/MPEG2
Output - H.264

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 156 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation
Bitrate Input - VBR/CBR
Output - CBR/ABR. Available output bitrate range depends on the
input video format. For available output bitrate ranges, see:
 HD - Table 6–3 on page 158
 SD Table 6–4 on page 159
 Sub SD Table 6–5 on page 160

Output Depends on the input video format. For available resolutions, see:
Resolution  HD - Table 6–3 on page 158
 SD Table 6–4 on page 159
 Sub SD Table 6–5 on page 160

H.264 Profiles  Profiles

and levels  Supported profiles for HD, SD and Sub SD: High, Main
and Baseline.
 Supported Levels:
HD - 3.1
SD - 3.0
Sub-SD - 1.2, 1.3, 2.1 and 3.0

Output Frame  Full frame rate:

Rate  29.97 fps for 60Hz (default)
 25 fps for 50Hz (default)
 Half frame rate:
 14.985 fps for 60Hz
 12.5 fps for 50 Hz

Output Scan Progressive

Rate

MBTS (Multi  Up to 12 profiles per MBTS

Bitrate  Each MBTS may include up to 25 PIDs in according to the
Transport following:
Stream)  Video PID - mandatory one transcoded video PID.
 Audio PIDs.
 Data/Passthrough PIDs
 Adding/removing multiscreen output video PID to a profile is
service affecting for all PIDs in the profile (temporary interruption -
up to 10 sec)
Video Frequency Configured at device level and applies to all video PIDs. The default
is 60 Hz.
In case of mismatch between the configured frequency and actual
PID frequency the following takes place:
 The alarm Unsupported Frame Rate is raised on the PID
 The video PID is not transmitted

Changes to the frequency of the video PID ensue the reset of the
transcoding engine. Video PID frequency may change due to the
upstream source, or at device level.

IDR Alignment IDR frames inserted across all video streams in the MBTS should have
identical Presentation Time Stamp (PTS).

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 157 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–2: Transcoding Multiscreen Specifications

Specification Explanation
Input / Output Input - GbE / ASI / 8VSB
interfaces Output - GbE

PMT PID Sorting - all programs in a specific MBTS have the same PMT
ordering.

Audio Spec.  Input

 Codecs - any (MP1L2, AC3/E-AC3, AAC)
 Coding Modes - Multichannel, Stereo, Mono
 Output
 Codecs - any (MP1L2, AC3/E-AC3, AAC - default)
 Coding Modes - Multichannel, Stereo (default), Mono
 Bitrates - 96k (default) and all other supported bitrates
 Audio configuration - according to ACE Audio transcoding spec.

Data PIDs Passthrough with proper delay to match multiscreen system delay

System Integrated with the following "Packager" platforms:

interop  Harmonic ProMediaRT
 Envivio
 Anevia
 Wowza

System Delay 5.2 seconds

EBP Signaling Supports Encoder Boundary Point (EBP) standard, according to
Comcast Specifications.

HD/SD/Sub-SD Specifications
ACE 5.1 and higher supports a wide range of resolutions to allow flexibility.
The following table shows the supported resolutions.

NOTE: HD output - any output resolution that is greater than 720W or 576H.

Table 6–3: HD Output Specifications

Default Bitrate
Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps)
(kbps)
1920x1080 HD 3000-8000 6000

1280x720 HD 3000-8000 6000

59.94/50 fps
1280x720 HD 1750-6000 3500

1152x648 HD 1750-6000 3500

1024x768 HD 1750-6000 3500

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 158 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–3: HD Output Specifications

Default Bitrate
Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps)
(kbps)

1024x720 HD 1750-6000 3500

1024x576 HD 1750-6000 2000

960x720 HD 1400-6000 2000

960x640 HD 1400-6000 2000

960x540 HD 1400-6000 2000

920x720 HD 1400-6000 2000

912x512 HD 1400-6000 2000

864x486 HD 1400-6000 2000
854x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

852x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

848x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

840x486 HD 1400-6000 2000

832x464 HD 1400-6000 2000

800x480 HD 1400-6000 2000

800x450 HD 1400-6000 2000

768x432 HD 1400-6000 2000

750x576 HD 1400-6000 2000

720x578 HD 1400-6000 2000

NOTE: For 1024x768 - If the input is 720p, force output to be equal to input Vertical resolution
(1024x720) and Input Vertical Resolution Mismatch alarm is
raised. Up conversion (SD to HD) is not supported.

Table 6–4: SD Output Specifications

Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps) Default Bitrate (kbps)

720x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x528 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x432 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

720x404 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 159 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–4: SD Output Specifications

Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps) Default Bitrate (kbps)

720x400 SD/HD 500-2500 1500
720x384 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x528 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

704x396 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

656x368 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x576 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x380 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x360 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x320 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

640x240 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x464 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x432 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x352 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

576x324 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

568x320 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

544x304 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

528x480 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

528x400 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

Table 6–5: Sub-SD Output Specifications

Default Bitrate
Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps)
(kbps)

524x240 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

512x384 SD/HD 500-2500 1500

512x288 SD/HD 500-1000 1500

480x360 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x352 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x320 SD/HD 500-1000 750

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 160 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Overview

Table 6–5: Sub-SD Output Specifications

Default Bitrate
Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps)
(kbps)

480x272 SD/HD 500-1000 750

480x270 SD/HD 500-1000 750

464x368 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x336 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x256 SD/HD 500-1000 750

448x252 SD/HD 500-1000 750

444x250 SD/HD 500-1000 750

432x240 SD/HD 500-1000 750
426x240 SD/HD 500-1000 750

416x240 SD/HD 384-800 500

400x304 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x300 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x240 SD/HD 300-800 500

400x224 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x304 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x288 SD/HD 300-800 500

384x216 SD/HD 90-800 500

378x288 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x576 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x480 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x288 SD/HD 90-800 500

352x240 SD/HD 90-800 500

336x192 SD/HD 90-800 500

320x240 SD/HD 90-800 450

320x180 SD/HD 90-800 450

320x128 SD/HD 90-800 450

304x240 SD/HD 90-800 450

304x224 SD/HD 90-800 450

288x162 SD/HD 90-800 350

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 161 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Table 6–5: Sub-SD Output Specifications

Default Bitrate
Resolution Input Format Bitrate (kbps)
(kbps)

256x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

256x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x240 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x180 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x176 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x160 SD/HD 90-800 350

240x136 SD/HD 90-800 350
230x180 SD/HD 90-800 350

224x128 SD/HD 90-800 350

216x120 SD/HD 90-800 350

192x192 SD/HD 90-800 350

192x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

176x144 SD/HD 90-800 350

160x120 SD/HD 90-800 350

128x96 SD/HD 90-800 350

128x80 SD/HD 90-800 350

Processing Multiscreen Streams

The multiscreen streams outflow the device in MBTSs. Each MBTS includes up to 12 SPTSs,
or profiles. The provisioning includes the following stages:
 Defining the required device frequency. See Setting Device Frequency on page 164
 Selecting the required input service and output port
 Input service - the service flows into the device over a GbE port
 Output Port - multiscreen services outflow over a GbE port. You need to define a
multicast IP to outflow the MBTS.
For more information, see Creating an MBTS Stream on page 164.
 Configuring the multiscreen parameters - Configuration is done via the Multiscreen page and
its tabs:
 MBTSs
 MBTS Configuration
 Profile Configuration
 Image Processing

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 162 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

See Creating an MBTS Stream on page 164.

Configuration includes:
 Setting unique stream parameters as explained in the following instructions.
 Setting parameters common to all streams in an MBTS as explained in the following
instructions.
NOTE: Once you configure a transcoded video stream as an multiscreen stream, you cannot configure the
video stream via the Video Transcoding tab.
You can configure the transcoded audio stream via the Audio Transcoding tab and all changes apply to
all audio streams in a profile.

Cropping
Cropping is performed on the input stream, before the stream is encoded to other output
profiles. You can configure cropping parameter for top/bottom/left/right.
The cropping range is 0 to 100 pixels for SD or HD input streams. Only even numbers are
supported. The default value is zero. You can change the cropping parameters on the fly.
Cropping parameters are specified with respect to full resolution. If the input horizontal resolution
is not full-resolution, the cropping parameter are scaled and rounded up to the next even number.
For vertical resolution, it is always full resolution. Thus, no scaling of cropping is necessary for
top and bottom.

Logo Insertion
The Logo Insertion feature places a small user-provided logo image over the input video. The
image is static (non-animated) and it can have transparent and semi-transparent regions.

Table 6–6: Logo Insertion Specifications

Specification Explanation
Insertion location and logo  Location - insertion is performed on the input stream,
resolution before it is encoded to other output profiles
 Resolution - it is assumed that the Logo size matches
the full resolution of the input stream. Any changes to
input resolution cause the logo to resize proportionally.

Logo insertion file Logo insertion file should be loaded to the device and
meet the following specifications: (For loading the file, see
Uploading Logo Insertion Files on page 176.
 Type - PNG file
 Size - Not larger than 512Kb
 Resolution - Not smaller than 16x16 and not larger
than 1/8 of the maximum source pixels (HD 1080i:
1920x1080/8= 259200, HD 72P: 1280x720/
8=115200, NTSC: 720x480/8=43200 and PAL:
720x576/8=51800).
 When one of the output profiles is 1080p, the maximum
logo resolution cannot exceed 1/16 of the source
pixels (HD 1080p: 1920x1080/16= 129600).

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 163 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Table 6–6: Logo Insertion Specifications

Specification Explanation
Position User configurable.
You may select a reference position that is based on the
active video region and indicates a horizontal offset and
vertical offset, which are based on the input full resolution,
from that reference position. Reference positions are:
top left corner, top right corner, bottom left corner and
bottom right corner.

Position Offset User configurable in pixels.

Offset indicates the distance of the logo from the corner's
edges
Note: If a portion of the logo is outside of the active display region,
the alarm Logo Display Error is raised.

Transparency User configurable.

From 0 to 100% (0 = Opaque, 100 = Invisible).
On the fly configuration You can change configuration on the fly. Changes may
cause the logo to disappear for a few seconds.

Setting Device Frequency

1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.
2. Select Administration > Video Processing section.
3. Open the Video Frequency (Hz) list and select either 50 or 60 Hz.
Creating an MBTS Stream
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Click the MBTSs page. Use this page to define the input service and the output GbE port for
the multiscreen stream.
3. Click Add.
4. Input TS - to create a multiscreen steam you must configure the input TS. Open the Input TS
list and select the required input.
5. Output TS - to create a multiscreen stream you must configure the output port. Open the
Output Port and select the required output.
6. # of Profiles - select the number of profiles for the multiscreen stream. MBTS is composed of
SPTSs (Single Program Transport Streams), or several profiles that output the same service
data in different quality levels.
7 Original Video Resolution - select the input video format, either HD or SD. The Output
. bitrate ranges and resolution depend on the input video format. Select the input video
resolution.
8.
Original Coding Format - view the input coding format.
9.
In Destination IP Address, enter a multicast IP address to outflow the MBTS. This multicast
IP address with a UDP port specific for each multiscreen profile, define the SPTS included in
the MBTS.
10. Click OK.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 164 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

The MBTS appears in the MBTS dialog. You can remove it with the Remove button or
press the Edit button to edit the MBTS.

MBTS Properties
This section enables you to view the properties of each MBTS and to configure its name and
input video format. Each changes done via this section, is automatically updated in the MBTS #
Properties dialog.
1. Focus on the MBTS Properties section.
2. Open the MBTS list and select the required MBTS.
3. In Program Name, enter a the name of the MBS.
4. # of Profiles - Read only. view the number of profiles for the multiscreen stream. MBTS is
composed of SPTSs (Single Program Transport Streams), or several profiles that output
the same service data in different quality levels.
5. Input TS - Read only. View the Input TS.
6. Output TS - Read only. View the output TS.
7. Output Port - Read only. View the output port.
8. Original Video Resolution - select the input video format, either HD or SD. The Output
bitrate ranges and resolution depend on the input video format. Select the input video
resolution.
9.
Original Coding Format - Read only. View the input coding format.
10. In Destination IP Address, Read only. View the multicast IP address to outflow the MBTS.
11. To define the output, focus on IP Properties section and do the following:
a. In Destination IP Address, enter a multicast IP address to outflow the MBTS. This
multicast IP address with a UDP port specific for each multiscreen profile, define the
SPTS included in the MBTS. For UDP definition, see step 7.2.
b. In PMT PID, enter the PMT PID of all programs included in the profile.
12. Output bitrate ranges and resolution depend on the input video format. Prior to the profile
configuration, you should define the input video format. To define the input video format,
focus on the Input Properties section. Open the Input Video Format list and select either HD
or SD.
The New button is enabled and the Multiscreen Profiles section is updated according to the
selected input video format. Once you select an input, the Select Input option is removed.

Configuring MBTS Profile

 To configure an MBTS profile, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.
2. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 165 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

NOTE: This page appears only if MBTSs are configured.

Select the required MBTS

3. Open the MBTS list and select the require MBTS.

4. To define a profile, focus on the Profiles Configuration section and do the following:

a. To create a multiscreen profile click Add. A blank record appears and you can define the
profile parameters.
b. Under Profile Name, view the name of the profile.
c. Under Video Resolution, select the required resolution.
For HD, see Table 6–3 on page 158

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 166 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

For SD, see Table 6–4 on page 159

For Sub SD, see Table 6–5 on page 160
d. Under Destination Multicast, enter the required multicast IP of the profile. This multicast
IP address with a UDP port specific for each multiscreen profile, define the SPTS
included in the MBTS.
e. Under Destination Port, define the output UDP port of the profile.
f. Under PMT PID, enter the PMT PID of all programs included in the profile.
g. Reserved Bitrate - The total bitrate required for all passthrough audio/data PIDs that are
attributed to this MBTS profile. In case you changed passthrough PIDs configuration,
enter under Reserved Bitrate, the appropriate bitrate following your changes to
passthrough data/audio PIDs. Reserved Bitrate is automatically calculated, but you can
configure it in case passthrough PIDs configurations is changed and it is required to re-
set the total bitrate of the passthrough PIDs within the output TS. Automatic Calculation
of Reserved bitrate is as follows:
In CBR Mode - Video Bitrate + Transcoded Audios (TS) Bitrate + PSI + Reserved
Bitrate (for all passthrough streams)
In ABR Mode - (Video Bitrate)*4 + Transcoded Audios (TS) Bitrate + PSI +
Reserved Bitrate (for all passthrough streams)
In case automatic calculation adds high overhead of Null packets to the output TS, you
can adjust it by re-setting the Reserved Bitrate.
h. Under Transcode Bitrate, enter the required bitrate fro the available range.
For HD, see Table 6–3 on page 158
For SD, see Table 6–4 on page 159
For Sub SD, see Table 6–5 on page 160
i. Under PMT Descriptors, edit the PMT descriptors. See Configuring PMT on page 64.

Editing the Multiscreen Profiles List

 To delete multiscreen profiles, do the
following:
NOTE: Removing/adding multiscreen stream from a profile is service affecting for all streams in the
profile.

1. Log into the device and select the Multiscreen page.

2. Select MBTSs > Profiles Configuration section.

3. Open the MBTS list and select the required MBBTS.

4. In Profiles Configuration, select the required profile(s).
5. Click Add/Remove.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 167 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

If you click Add, see Configuring MBTS Profile on page 165.

If you click Remove, the profile is removed from the
MBTS.
6. .

The profile to be Delete button

removed is
selected
7
.
NOTE: If you remove all profiles from an MBTS, the MBTS is deleted as well.

Configuring Profile PIDs

Each profile may have up to 25 PIDs. Each profile should have a transcoded video stream, it
may have multiple transcoded audio streams and may have data streams.
 To define/view the streams, do the following
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration:

NOTE: This page appears only if MBTSs are configured.

3. Open the MBTS list and select the require MBTS.

4. To define profile PIDs, focus on the PID Selection section and do the following:
a. Under Name, view the name of the PID. The name indicated whether video, audio or
data.
b. Under Input PID, select the input PID.
c. Under Type, view the type of the PID, whether video, audio or data.
d. Under Original Coding Format, for video PID, view the coding format of the PID. For
audio or data PID, select the required input coding format.
e. Under Output PID, enter the required output PID.
f. Under Coding Format, for video PID, view the output coding format of the PID. For audio
or data PID, select the required output coding format. See Table 6–7 on page 171.
g. Under ES Bitrate (bps), open the bitrate list and select the required bitrate.
h. Under Used in (Profiles), view the profiles this PID is associated with.
i. Under PMT Descriptors, edit the PMT descriptors. See Table on page 64.
j. To duplicate the stream, see Duplicating Audio/Data Streams on page 173.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 168 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Configuring Common Video Parameters

 To configure common video parameters, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.
2. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration:
NOTE: This page appears only if MBTSs are configured.

Select the required MBTS

3. Open the MBTS list and select the required MBTS.

4. To define the parameters common to all multiscreen streams, focus on the Common Video
Configuration section and do the following:
a. Open the Bitrate Mode list and select either of the following:
 CBR - Constant Bitrate
 ABR - Average Bitrate
b. Output Aspect Ratio - allows to match picture to type of screen, standard or wide
screen. To configure output aspect ratio, open the Output Aspect Ratio list and select
one of the following:
Follow the Input
4:3
16:9

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 169 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

NOTE: To form a 16:9 image in case the input aspect ratio is 4:3, the input image is rescaled with black
pixel columns added to the left and right sides of the rescaled image (i.e. pillar-boxing).

c. In IDR Interval (sec), enter the required interval between the IDR frames.
d. Open the Bitrate Settings Applies to: list and select either of the following:
 TS Level - the baseline for calculating the output transport stream bitrate includes
the ES bitrate and the TS header encapsulation overhead
 ES Level - the baseline for calculating the output transport stream bitrate includes
only the ES bitrate
e. Open the Close Caption Conversion list and select either of the following:
 ATSC A/72
 Discard

NOTE: : Closed caption/V-Chip information is passed through only for full frame rate profiles (29.97fps),
due to standards restriction.

f. MCTF (Motion-Compensated Temporal Filtering) - by default it is off. Mctf affects the

video
quality and reduces noises. If the service bit rate is low it is recommended to use strong
Mctf. However, strong Mctf affects the sharpness of the picture. To select the required
Mctf, open the Mctf list and select the required level ranging from very weak to very
g. strong.

h. Insert IDR - select to insert IDR frames.

Insert B Frames - select to insert B frames.
Configuring MBTS Profiles
 To configure MBTS Profiles, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.
2. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration:
NOTE: : This page appears only if MBTSs are configured.

3. Open the MBTS list and select the require MBTS.

4. To define profile parameters, in PID Selection, select the required video PID.
The Profiles Video Configuration section appears:

5. Output PID - select the required output PID.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 170 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

6. Bitrate (Mbps) - select the required output bitrate of the video PID.
7. Video Resolution - select the required output resolution. See
 HD - Table 6–3 on page 158
 SD Table 6–4 on page 159
 Sub SD Table 6–5 on page 160
8. Profile - select the required profile. You can select: Baseline, Main or High.
9. Encoding Level, select either automatic, or a level defined by the H.264 specifications:
 Automatic - encoding level is automatically defined according to the frame size,
frame rate and max bit rate.
 Available levels: 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.0, 2.1, 2.2, 3.0, 3.1, 3.2, 4.0, 4.1. If configurable level
does not comply with the configured frame size, frame rate and bitrate, ACE accepts
the configured level and raises the alarm Encoding level violation.
10. Frame Rate, select either of the following:
 29.97 / 25 - applies to Full frame rate, where:
29.97 fps for 60Hz (default)
25 fps for 50Hz (default)
 14.98 / 12.5 - applies to Half frame rate,
where: 14.985 fps for 60Hz (default)
12.5 fps for 50 Hz

Configuring Audio Transcoding PID

The Audio TX Configuration section appears once you select an audio PID in PID Selection
section.
 To configure an Audio Transcoding PID, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration:

NOTE: : This page appears only if MBTSs are configured.

3. Open the MBTS list and select the require MBTS.

4. To define the parameters of the audio PID, select in PID Selection the required audio PID.
5. Output PID - Select the required output PID.
6. Coding Format - Allows to configure the compression type and to allocate transcoding
resources. Select one of the following output coding formats: Coding format options depend
on the selected input stream type as the following table lists:

Table 6–7: Output Coding Format

Input Stream Type Coding Format Options

(0x3) MPEG-1 Audio Any coding format. Not configurable

AC-3 ATSC

E-AC-3 ATSC

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 171 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Table 6–7: Output Coding Format

Input Stream Type Coding Format Options

AC-3/E-AC-3 DVB Any
AC-3

E-AC-3

AAC Any input coding format

AAC LC
ACC HE

If the coding format of the input stream is unknown, select Any. If a low MHz decoder (AAC
LC / AC3) is selected and the actual decoding format is a high MHz decoder (AAC HE / E-
AC3), an alarm is raised.
7. Input ES Type - select the type of the input elementary stream.
8. ES Type - Read only. View the type of the input elementary stream.
9. Input Coding Mode - Allows to define the number of channels and to allocate transcoding
resources. Select one of the following coding modes: Any, Stereo, or Multichannel. Coding
mode options depend on the selected input stream type as the following table lists:

Table 6–8: Output Coding Mode

Input Stream Type Coding Format Options

(0x3) MPEG-1 Audio Any coding format. Not configurable
AC-3/E-AC-3 all flavors ACC Any

Stereo/Mono

Multichannel

10. Sample Rate (kHz) - Read only. Sampling rate is 48 kHz and it is not converted.
11 ES Bitrate (Kbps) - Select the required bitrate, The ES Bitrate list is updated according to the
. output stream type and the selected output codec.
12 MPEG 1 Layer II / AC-3 EAC-3 / AAC - this section is updated according to the selected
. Coding Format. For details see:
MPEG 1 Layer II - Specific MPEG-1L2 Configuration on page 146
AC 3 EAC-3 - Specific Dolby ® AC-3TM/E-AC-3TM Configuration on page
147 AAC - Specific AAC Configuration on page 146
13 Effective Bitrate (Kbps) - Read only. Displays the actual bitrate.
.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 172 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

The multiscreen transcoding is configured via the MBTS menu only. However, if you select in the
Logical Output pane a multiscreen service > Properties, the Properties page appears with the
following message. Once you click OK in the message, the Properties dialog opens with limited
configuration. The same applies for PIDs.

Duplicating Audio/Data Streams

You can transcode/passthrough each audio/data stream multiple times, with different output PID
and transcoding parameters. You can also configure whether to enable each audio/data stream
per specific MBTS Profile.
Each MBTS may have up to 25 streams.
Duplication of audio/data streams is done across all MBTS profiles.
 To duplicate a stream, do the following:
1. Select Multiscreen > MBTS Configuration > PID Selection section.

Select the
required
PID

To duplicate, click Copy

Selected

2. Select the required audio/data PIDs.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 173 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

3. Click Copy Selected.

The required PIDs are copied and appear below the original PID.

NOTE: To remove PIDs, use the Remove button.

Associating ESs with a Profile

To associate the streams with a profile, select the required profile/profiles. By default, stream are
associated to all profiles. To select the required profile, do the following
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select Multiscreen > Profile Configuration:

Profile Configuration is selected Select PIDs to be included

3. Open the MBTS list and select the required MBTS.

4. Open the Profile list and select the required profile.
The PID Selection section is updated with the PIDs of the
MBTSs.
5. Under, Include, select/de-select the PIDs to be included/exluded
Multiscreen Image Processing
Multiscreen image processing includes the following features:
 Logo Insertion - see Logo Insertion on page 163
 Cropping - see Cropping on page 163.
 To configure Logo Insertion and Cropping, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 174 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

2. Select Multiscreen > Image

Processing:

3. Open the MBTS list and select the required MBTS.

4. Open the Logo ID to select the required logo file. You need to upload logo files via the Assets
tab. See Uploading Logo Insertion Files on page 176.
5. To configure Logo Insertion, focus on the Logo Insertion section.
6. Select Enable Logo Insertion.

a. To enable the Logo Insertion section, select Logo Insertion. For logo insertion
specifications, see Logo Insertion on page 163.
b. Open the Logo Position list and select the required position for the logo: Top Left, Top
Right, Bottom Left, Bottom Right.
c. In Vertical Offset and Horizontal Offset, select the required distance, respectively.
d. In Transparency, enter the required value, or move the slider.
 To configure Cropping, focus on the Cropping section.
7. Select Enable Cropping.

Select to enable

Enter cropping
values

a. Enter the desired cropping values in the Top, Left, Bottom and Right boxes. You need to
enter a value between 0 to 100 and it should be an even number. See Cropping on
page 163.
8. To send to device, click Apply.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 175 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 6 Multiscreen Transcoding Processing Multiscreen Streams

Uploading Logo Insertion Files

 To upload a logo file, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select the Administation > Assets page:

3. Click Add New.

4. Click Browse, and browse to the required logo file.
5. Click Open. The file is uploading and its name appears in the
6. dialog.. In Uploading Asset page, click OK.
The required file is loaded and the Assets page is propagated with the loaded file.
7. Select Multiscreen > Image Processing > Logo Insertion.
8. Enable Logo Insertion - select this option to enable logo insertion.
The Logo Insertion list is populated with the loaded files.
9. Open the Logo ID list and select the required file.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 176 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
7
Splicing
Splicing Overview
Digital Programming Insertion (DPI) or Splicing is the process in which the main feed is spliced to
allow the insertion of another stream, usually an ad. The transition from the main feed to the
inserted stream and vise versa should be seamless, frame-accurate splice, to allow a flawless
broadcast.

DPI Standards
A splicing standard-based solution supports the following standards:
SCTE35 - Digital Program Insertion Cueing Message for Cable protocol. A protocol for in band
cue messages that defines the potential splice time-slots (avails) in the stream.
SCTE30 – Digital Program Insertion Splicing API. A communication protocol between AD
Servers and Splicers, to communicate splice messages.

DPI Terminology
Network feed - another name for the main feed, that is the feed to be spliced.
Avail - time slots for inserting content into the network feed. The avails are transmitted over a
SCTE35 PID, or SCTE30 PID.
Cue message - sent from the Splicer to the AD server via SCTE30. The cue message informs
the AD server of an avail to allow the AD server to retrieve the ad spots scheduled for that avail.
Insertion channel - the channel over which the AD server streams the ads to the Splicer.
The Insertion channel interface is an IP one.
Splice In Point and Splice Out Point - Splice In Point indicates the frame for inserting content
into the network feed. Splice Out Point indicates the frame for ending the insertion and returning
to the network feed.

Splice in point Splice out point

Ad - a short commercial clip, typically 30 seconds long.

Back-to-Back Insertion (B2B) - when more than one ad is inserted, the ads are inserted
one following the other without returning to the network feed.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 177 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Components of the Splicing
Solution

Components of the Splicing Solution

The following illustration shows the main components of the discussed Splicing solution:

AD Server
The AD server does the following:
 Manages the splicing - the AD server initiates the splicing and it defines when to splice, what
to insert and for how long. To control the splicing it communicates with the Splicer over the
SCTE30 protocol.
 Controls the Insertion channel - the AD server contains all the insertion content and streams
the ads as required over the Insertion channel to the Splicer. The Insertion channel interface
is either IP or ASI as the above illustrations show.
 Interfaces with an NTP server - Both AD server and Splicer interface with the same NTP
server. The AD server receives time signals from the NTP server and synchronizes its
internal clock with the external NTP clock. This clock is also utilized by the Splicer. Both the
Splicer and AD server share a common time-base to ensure maximum synchronization
between them.

Digital Splicer
ProStream 9000, the digital Splicer in this solution, allows a smooth and seamless transition from
one stream to another. The Splicer performs the following:
 Receives main feed - the Splicer receives the main feed with SCTE35 data over its
IP interface.
 Encapsulates SCTE35 data - the Splicer encapsulates SCTE35 data as SCTE30 Cue
messages. The Splicer sends these messages to the AD server to inform it of an avail and to
allow the AD server to initiate a splice.
 Receives Splice requests and insertion content - The Splicer receives from the AD server a
splice request and the insertion content and executes a splice at the required time. Without
SCTE35, AD server may initiate a splice request via SCTE30.
 NTP Interface - allows the Splicer to receive a time signal from the system NTP server and to
synchronize its clock according to the NTP time.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 178 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Splicing Specifications

Splicing Specifications
The following table lists splicing specifications supported by ProStream 9000 Splicer:

Table 7–1: Splicing Specifications

Item Specification
Video Format H264/MPEG2/SD/HD, 50/60 Hz

Audio type Supports all types

Spliceable services Up to 70 spliceable service per device pending on bitrate.

Network feed interface IP

Insertion Channel Interface IP
Spliceable service type Flows through the platform over IP, IP in and IP out.

Spliceable service content 1 video PID

Up to 8 Audio PIDs
Up to 4 data PIDs

Supported protocols Standard-based SCTE30 and SCTE35

AD Specifications CBR, 0.5- 12 Mbps

AD Server Specifications
ProStream 9000 is a SCTE35/30 compliant Splicer. It is integrated with Vigor AD Server. The
following table shows the specifications of these AD servers

Table 7–2: Vigor Specification

Item Specification
Insertion channel IP

Splice request mode PIDs mode

Splicing request initiation Based on an external system

Tips for AD Server Configuration

When configuring the AD server for working with ProStream 9000 as a splicer, it is recommended
to configure as follows the parameters indicated below:

Table 7–3: Tips for AD Server Configuration

Parameter Explanation Recommended Value

Splice Request Pre-roll How much time should lapse between 3.5 seconds
the AD server sends the splice request
and the splice event

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 179 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the
Splicer

Table 7–3: Tips for AD Server Configuration

Parameter Explanation Recommended Value

AD Streaming Pre-roll How much time should lapse between 0.9 seconds
the AD server streams the ad and the
splice event

Configuring the Splicer

Defining Splicer-AD Server Communication Parameters
To allow the Splicer and AD server to communicate, you should define the following parameters.
The value of these parameters should be identical for both the Splicer and AD server. The
following instructions guide you on how to configure the Splicer via the web client. For AD server
configuration, see AD server documentation.
 Splicer name - a unique name of the Splicer. See Defining Splicer Names on page 180.
 Splicer IP address and SCTE30 port - The default SCTE30 port is 5168. See Defining
the SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources on page 180.
 Services - enter a name for each spliceable service. See Configuring Spliceable Services &
SCTE35 PID on page 181.
 Insertion Channel - In the Splicer, verify that the input port over which the Splicer receives
the Ad insertion, is enabled. In the AD server configuration, verify that the port settings
match this port.
 NTP Server - enter the IP address of the NTP server and verify that NTP communication
is enabled. See Synchronizing Splicer Time on page 181.
Once the AD server is up and running it sends an Initiation request via SCTE30 for each
spliceable service. If the configuration is valid, the Splicer sends a positive Initiation response
and the AD server and Splicer communicate.

Defining Splicer Names

 To define a splicer name, do the following:
1. Open a browser and type the IP address of the device.
2. Login to the device.
3. Do either of the following:
 Select Platform > HW Inventory > Platform Properties section:.
Or
 Select Administration > Global Settings> General section:
4. In Device Name, enter the name of the Splicer. When configuring the AD server, use this
name as the Splicer name.

Defining the SCTE30 Port and Allocating Resources

 To define and allocate SCTEE30 port, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 180 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the
Splicer

1. Select Platform > DPI:.

2. In SCTE30 Port, enter the port number via which the AD server manages the splicer. The
default is 5168.
3. Open the Compliant Mode and select either of the following:
 SCTE30
 DVS
4. Ad Server Communication Failure is DRT - when selected, a communication failure with the
ad server, is a Device Redundancy Trigger (DRT).
5. Ad Server Communication Failure Assertion Treshold (sec) - enter the period of time to wait
before asserting a DRT.
6. Click Apply.

Synchronizing Splicer Time

See Network Time Protocol (NTP) on page
235.
Configuring Spliceable Services & SCTE35 PID
To splice a service, configure it as a spliceable service. Spliceable services should flow into the
device and out of the device via a GbE port of the GbE 4G IOM module.
 To configure the registration mode of the SCTE35 PID, do the following:
1. In the web client, in Logical Output, select the required program.
2. In the drop-down menu, select Properties. Network Time Protocol (NTP) on page 235
3. Select the Splicing DPI Section:.

4. Select Enable Splicing.

5. To configure the registration mode, open the DPI Mode list and select one of the following
options:
 None - Do not register to receive any SCTE35 message
 PID - Identify and register the DPI PID according to its PID ID. Once you select PID,
the PID box appears. In the PID box, enter the required PID number.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 181 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the
Splicer

 ES Type - Identify and register the DPI PID according to its ES Type. Usually SCTE35
PID
is type 0x86.
 Component - Identify and register the DPI PID according to the required component
parameters. Once you select Component, the Service and the Component boxes appear.
Enter the required service details and the required component ID.
 RSS - Identify and register the DPI PID according to the ID of the configured Reference
Service. Once you select RSS, the service box appears. Enter the required service ID.
6. Click Apply.
Configuring Data PIDs
 To configure a Data PID, do the following:
1. In the web client, in Logical Output, select the required program.
2. Enable splicing for the program. Select Program > Properties > Splicing DPI and select
Splice Enable.
3. Select the data PIDs of the service and from the drop-down menu select Properties.
4. In the PID# Properties dialog, focus on DPI.

5. To coordinate between network PIDs and AD server PIDs, open the Ad PID Selection Policy
list and select one of the following options:
 Replace (Fallback: Block) - Try to match Ad PID to network PID. If a matching PID is
not found, block the network PID.
 Replace (Fallback: Play) - Try to match Ad PID to network PID. If a matching PID is
not found, play the network PID.
 Always Play Network PID - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always play
the network PID
 Block PID During Ad - Do not try to match Ad PID to network PID, always block the
network PID
6. Click OK.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 182 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 7 Splicing Configuring the
Splicer

Monitoring Splicing
To monitor splicing activity, see Splicing Logging on page 254.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 183 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter
8
CAS
CAS Overview
The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by
scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key.
ProStream 9000 devices support the following CAS mode:
 DVB CSR scrambling - ProStream 9000 may be used as a DVB-CSA scrambler over its
ASI and GbE interfaces. ProStream 9000 is fully-integrated and certified to work with the
following CA Systems:
 NagraVision
 NDS
 Irdeto
 Viaccess
 Conax
When working as a scrambler, the following options apply:
 DVB encryption with external or internal EIS. See Using Internal EIS on page 189.
 BISS - See BISS Overview on page 192.

Setting General CAS Parameters

To set general CAS parameters, do the following:
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and EIS.
 Set the Crypto Period Duration.
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and ECMG.
 Allocate ECM PIDs.
 Set communication parameters between ProStream and EMMG.
 Allocate EMM PIDs.

Setting CAS General Parameters

 To set CAS general parameters, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select CA&BISS > General > General section.
3. In CAS Mode, select one of the following options:
 DVB - default option. CAS that supports the DVB protocol
 AES CBC - CAS that supports the Advance Encryption Standard (AES) CBC protocol.
 AES ECB - CAS that supports the Advance Encryption Standard (AES) protocol.
4. In the CP Duration (Sec) box, type the required value to set how often ProStream should
change the encryption key. The Crypto Period is indicated in seconds and the valid range is
5
- 7200.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 184 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

5. Delay ECM Replacement (mSec) - select the amount of time, in millisecond, that elapses until
ECM replacement takes place.
6. Select CW Conformance to allow CW conformance.
7. Set Bit 54 to 0 - when selected bit 54 fo the CW is set to 0.
8. Selective Encryption - by default this check box is not selected. When selected, it allows the
trick mode of scrambled content. This option supports live ingests of channels such as
nPVR, CathcUp TV, and StartOver.
9. Number of Unencrypted Packets - enabled once you select Selective Encryption. Open the
list and select the number of clear packets.
10. Partial/Random Encryption - enabled once you select Selective Encryption. Mark to select
Partial/Random Encryption.
11 Enhanced Hacking Prevention (EHP) - select to enable enhanced hacking prevention. When
. selected, the device does not scramble TS packets with and without adaptation headers that
contain identical payload bytes.
12 ECMG Failure Protection - select to enable ECMG failure protection. When selected,
. whenever the ECM is not received from at least one ECMG, the device continues scrambling
TS packets of the relevant SCG(s) using the last 2 control words (toggling between them),
with an increasing crypto-period number. For the failed ECMG, the last two ECMs are
transmitted, for other ECMG(s) the new received ECMs are transmitted.
13 To configure CW synchronization, focus on the CW Synchronization section.
. This configuration applies to NMX control mode.

CW
Synchronizatio

14 Enable -to enable CW synchronization, select Enable. When checked, there is

. CW
15 synchronization between the primary and backup device.
. In Role, select one of the following:
 Init - applies to NMX control mode only.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 185 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

 Backup - this device functions as the backup device for CAS purposes
 Standalone - this device works in a standalone mode
16. In Redundancy Peer IP Address, enter the IP address of the backup CAS
device.
Configuring EIS Parameters
The SCS-EIS page enables you to configure the EIS and ProStream
communication.

To configure EIS parameters, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select CA & BISS > SCS-EIS.

TCP port number

EIS routing
information

3. Focus on the General section.

4. TCP Port Number - select the required value to set the TCP port through which ProStream
communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between 1024 and 65535. The default value
is 11000.
NOTE: ProStream 9000 is a server to the EIS device.

5. Focus on the EIS Routing Information to configure the EIS details.

6. In EIS Data, enter the IP address and subnet mask of EIS1 and EIS2 as explained
below:
 Add Routing - select to enable the routing.
 In IP Address, enter the IP address of EIS1 and EIS2.
 In network Mask, enter the subnet mask of EIS1 and EIS2, respectively, to
enable communication when the EIS is hooked to a network other than the CAS
or the management network.
Configuring ECMG Servers
 To configure ECMG servers, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
12.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 186 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

2. Select CA & BISS > ECMG.

3. In the Channel Test Tolerance list, select the required value to define the allowed channel-
tests before closing the connection with the ECMG. The default value is 3.
4. Click Add, to add an ECMG.
You may add up to 30 ECMGs.
5. Configure the ECMG according to the following parameters:
 Name - type in a name for the ECMG.
 Priority - to allow redundancy, set priority by indicating the primary and secondary ECMG of
the same SuperCAS ID.The ProStream always tries to connect first to the ECMG with the
same SuperCAS ID and the highest priority and then to the next highest priority. Assign
priority from 1-10 with 1 as the highest priority.
 SuperCasID (hex) - a 32-bit identifier of the EIS provided by the CAS vendor.
 Protocol Revision - specify the mode of operation of the ECMG. Select revision 1, 2 or 3.
 IP Address - set the IP address of the ECMG. This IP address should be of the same subnet
as the ETH2 IP address.
 Subnet Mask - set subnet mask for the ECMG. In case ECMG resides in a subnet other
than the management or CAS subnets, set ECMG Subnet Mask to allow communication.
 Port - set in decimal, the number of the ECMG TCP port used to connect the ECMG to the
ProStream. The CAS vendor provides this value.
 Channel ID - set a unique number to define a unique ECMG.
 Ext. CW - when selected, an external CW is used. Select this option in case the
ECMG generates a CW.
 Status - a read only filed which indicates the state of the connection. The connection state is
either of the following:
 Connected - ECMG and ProStream are communicating.
 Disconnected - no connection is taking place at the moment.

TIP: Once you have set the CAS configuration and send configuration to the device, allocate the ECM PID.

 # of Streams - the number of streams that are open for the ECMG.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 187 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Setting General CAS Parameters

Setting EMMG Parameters

The Entitlement Management Message Generator issues EMMs (Entitlement Management
Messages) that carry private Control Access (CA) information as access permits to specific
users, access revocations etc. When configuring the EMMG, you set communication parameters
to establish communication between the ProStream and the EMMG. The configuration is done
via the EMMG page.

Configuring EMMG
You can add up to 30 EMMGs.
To configure an EMMG, do the following:
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select CA & BISS > EMMG.
3.
4. To add an EMMG, click Add You can add up to 20
EMMGs. Configure the EMMG by filling in the EMMG
 Control TCP Port - enter the TCP port via which the ProStream communicates with
the EMMG. ProStream supports up to five ports.
 Client/Super CAS ID (hex) - enter in hex. an identifier of the EMMG. The EMMG
vendor provides this number.
 Data Protocol - specify whether the connection is TCP or UDP/broadcast. If you select
UDP, the Sect TS Packet field is enabled and you should select the required option.
question to QA
 IP Address - type in the IP address of the EMMG.
 Subnet Mask - type in the subnet mask of the EMMG to enable communication when the
EMMG is hooked to a subnet other than the management or CAS subnets.
 Sect TS Packet - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. The Sect TS
Packet field defines the format of the EMM. The available formats are as follows:
Section - the EMM is in MPEG-2 section format.
Packet - the EMM is in MPEG-2 transport stream packet format.
 Data ID - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. Type in the data source
identifier.
 Data Format - enabled only if you select Broadcast under Control. Allows to select either
EMM or PDG data format.
TIP: Once you have configured the EMMG parameters, allocate EMM PIDs for the required TSs.

 Remove - check the box of the EMMG you wish to delete.

Allocating ECM PIDs

When allocating ECM PIDs you actually define PIDs as ECM PIDs. This procedure is performed
via the Configuration page using the Injected ECM option.
For step-by-step instructions on how to allocate the ECM PID, see Adding and Configuring ECM
PIDs to the TS on page 102.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 188 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS What’s Next...

Allocating EMM PIDs

When allocating EMM PIDs you actually define PIDs as EMM PIDs. This procedure is
performed via the Configuration screen and you can add an EMM in either of the following
options:
 Injected EMM PID - for step-by-step instructions on how to allocate the injected EMM PID,
see Configuring an Injected ECM PID on page 105.
 Passed EMM PID - for step-by-step instructions on how to allocate the EMM PID, see
Configuring a Passed ECM PID on page 106.

What’s Next...
To start scrambling, activate your EIS to start issuing SCGs. If you do not have a vendor’s
EIS integrated in your CAS, you may use the Internal EIS.

Internal EIS
ProStream 9000 is furnished with internal EIS and you can create, configure and send SCGs
to scramble the required service or PID. ProStream 9000 allows to provision up to 200 SCGs.
An SCG request applies to a service or a PID and each SCG should be unique. The following
table lists the required combined parameters for creating a unique SCG:

Table 8–1:

Data Type SCG Components Comments

Service NID, TSID, SID, ECM ID A single SCG may supports multiple TSs,
PID NID, TSIN, PID, ECM ID

Using Internal EIS

The following section instructs you on how to do the following:
 Define SCG components
 Associate an ECM with the SCG
 Send a provision
 To use the internal EIS, do the following;
1. In Logical Output tool bar, open the drop-down menu and select Internal EIS View..
Open the drop-down menu in the tool
bar

Select Internal EIS View

2. From the SCG drop-down menu, select Add

New.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 189 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Internal EIS

a. SCG - select the required SCG ID.

b. Network - select the required network.
c. TS ID - select the required TS ID.
4. Click OK.
When you drill down the SCG, you can view the available ECMs and the configured TS.
You can view the TS through its programs and PIDs..

5. To select multiple TSs, select the SCG container and from the drop-down list select
Properties:
SCG container

a. Enable Multiple TS per SCG - select this option to enable multiple TS.
b. Click OK.
In this case the services/PIDs of the output TSs with the selected ID, regardless of their NID
(Network ID) appear in the Component List.
6. You can set the components to be scrambled. To select the components to be scrambled,
select either a program(s) from the Program List or PIDs.
 To scramble a program, do the following:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 190 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Internal EIS

a. Select the Program List container and from the drop-down menu select Add New.

The Add Program dialog appears.

b. Select the required program to be scrambled.
To scramble a PID, do the following:
a. Select the Program List container and from the drop-down menu select Add New.
b. . The Add PID dialog appears.
c. Select the required PID(s) to be scrambled.
d. Click OK.
7. To add ECMs, click Add New from the ECMs container. You can add up to 30 ECMs per
8. SCG. To associate an ECM PID, select the required ECM and from the drop-down menu
select
9. Properties.
10. To provision the SCG, click
Apply.
Viewing Internal EIS
 To view an internal EIS, do the following:
1. Select CS & BISS > SCG.
2. To view SCG, focus on the SCG List and view the
following:
 SCG - SCG number
 CP - the cripto period
 Time to Next CP
 TS ID
 Program - the programs to be scrambled
 PIDs - the PIDs to be scrambled
 Activation Time - shows the ID of the service(s)/PIDs to be scrambled by this
SCG request.
 Number of ECM Groups - the number of associated ECM groups.
 EIS - indicates whehter internal EIS

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 191 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS BISS Overview

 Configuration Match
 State - indicates whether OK or Failed
3. To view the ECMs, focus on ECMS and do the
4. following: In Select SCG list, select the required SCG.
5. View the following ECM information
 ECM ID
 Super CAS ID (Hex)
 AC - access criteria
 Status - indicates the ECM state.

BISS Overview
Basic Interoperable Scrambling System (BISS) is an open Standard for protecting
digital contribution applications.
Digital contribution applications require the direct entry of a Session Word (SW) at the transmitter
and receiver. The sender and receiver(s) of the transmission share the SW, and thus only the
intended users receive the transmission. The Integrated Receiver Decoder (IRD) device can
decode the content only if the SW is the same and complies with the BISS standard.
BISS supports the following modes of work:
 Mode 0 - no scrambling
 Mode 1 - transmission is scrambled and a fixed clear SW is required for decoding.
 Mode E - transmission is scrambled and a fixed encrypted SW is required for decoding.

BISS Specifications
Table 8–2: BISS Specifications

Specification Explanation
ProStream 9000 In standalone mode only
Supported BISS mode BISS Mode 1
Note: BISS-E mode is currently unsupported.

Supported Interfaces Output ASI and GbE ports

Scrambling component  Service level only

 All ES components unless Always Clear is
configured. See Applying BISS with Clear PID(s)
on page 194.

IRD PVR-2900

NOTE: ProStream 9000 does not decode the transmitted streams. Decoding is performed by the specified
IRD.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 192 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS BISS Overview

Configuring BISS
NOTE: BISS is applied on a service level only.

 To configure BISS, do the following:

1. Open the web client of the device.
2. Select the Symulcrypt Protocols
tab.

CAS Mode is
DVB

3. Verify that in CAS mode DVB is selected.

1. In Logical Output, select the required program.
2. Select the Scrambling section.

3. Tick Enable BISS.

The Control Word box is enabled.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 193 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS BISS Overview

4. Enter the required Control Word with up to 12 hexadecimal characters (six bytes). The CW
is required for decoding the scrambled transmission.
5. Click OK.

Applying BISS with Clear PID(s)

 To apply BISS with clear PIDs, do the following:
1. Select the Configuration page.
2. In Logical Output, select the required PID.
3. Click Advanced.

Open the Scrambling

Override list

4. Open the Scrambling Override list and select the required option:
 Per Service/Transport No Override - follows the scrambling configuration of the TS or
service
 Always Scramble - even if TS or service are not scrambled, the PID is scrambled as
long as a fixed key or a CW is provided
 Always Clear- even if TS or service are scrambled, the PID is always clear.

CA
According to the BISS standard a CA descriptor must be present in the PMT to support BISS.
ProStream 9000 automatically adds a CA descriptor when BISS is enabled. You can add more
descriptors if required.

CAT
Verify that the Conditional Access Table (CAT) is enabled when BISS is enabled.
 To enable CAT

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 194 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Viewing SCGs and ECMs

1. In Logical Output swithc to the Tables view.

2. Select the required TS and click to view its tables:

3. Select the CAT table.

4. Configure it as explained in Configuring CAT on page 70.

Viewing SCGs and ECMs

 To view SCGs and ECMs, do the following:
1. Select CA & BISS >
SCGs.

2. Focus on the SCG List and view the following parameters:

 SCG ID - a unique identifier of the SCG
 CP Number - a running counter of the number of Crypto Periods. It indicates the number
of times the ECM has been changed for this stream.
 Time to Next CP - indicates how often the ECM is changing for this stream.
 TS ID - the stream that carries the service to be encrypted as sent by the
 EIS.
 Service - the ID of the program/service being scrambled using the specific SCG
 PIDs - if PIDs are scrambled, indicates the scrambled PIDs
 Activation Time - the activation time of this configuration
 # ECMs - the number of associated
ECMs EIS - whether internal or not

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 195 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Viewing ECMs

 Configuration Match - whether the SCG and ECM configuration is identical to the ECM
PID allocation.
 State - whether scrambling is successful or not.
3. Focus on the ECM section.
4. Open the Select SCG list and select the required SCG from the list.
5. View the following parameters of the ECMs associated with the selected SCG:
 ECM ID - a unique identifier of the ECM
 Super CAS ID - a 32-bit identifier of the EIS provided by the CAS vendor.
 AC - the access criteria associated with this ECM.
 Status - indicates the ECM status, whether OK or failed.

Viewing ECMs
View the available ECMs.
1. Select CA & BISS > ECMs.

2. View the following ECMs parameters:

 SCG ID - the SCG the ECM is associated with.
 ECM ID - the ID of the ECM.
 Super CAS ID (Hex) - Super CAS ID - a 32-bit identifier of the EIS provided by the
CAS vendor.

Using a PSIG Device

When using a Program Specific Information Generator (PSIG) device, use the PSIG page.
The PSIG interfaces with the ProStream device to receive information required for building
the PSI tables and for injecting them to the ProStream 9000 device.
 To work with PSIG, do the following:
1. Select CAS & BISS > PSIG page.
2. In Controlled Via, select the required enabled network to communicate with the PSIG. Select
either Management or CAS.
3. In Channel Test Retries, enter the required retrials for establishing communication with the
PSIG.
4. Select Enable to enable the connection.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 196 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 8 CAS Using a PSIG Device

5. To add a PSIG, click Add.

6. Enter the following parameters:
 TCP Port - enter the TCP port number over which the ProStream device
communicates with the PSIG.
 Retries Interval (msec) - enter the required testing interval.
 IP Address - enter the IP address of the PSIG.
 Subnet Mask - enter the required subnet mask.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 197 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter 9
Monitoring
In the event of a malfunction, the following events take place:

Table 9–1: Malfunction Reaction

Object Reaction
Front panel The alarm LED is illuminated in red.

Web client The alarm icon turns red.

The number of active alarms is updated.
a message appears notifying you of the nature of the problem.

Viewing Alarms
You may view the alarms via the Alarms page. This page also allows you to view the Alarm
log and to save it as an .XML file.
 To view alarms, do the following:
1. Perform either of the following:
In the title bar, click the Alarms drop-down menu:

Click here to view the current

alarms

Or
In the web client, select Alarms.
The Alarm are listed in a chronological order, the first alarm in the list is the latest alarm to be
registered. The Active Alarm pate provides the following information:

Table 9–2: Active Alarm

Parameter Explanation
Description Describes the fault that invoked the alarm

Fault Object The faulty object that caused the alarm

Assert Time Indicates the time the alarm was raised

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 198 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 9 Monitoring Viewing Alarms

Table 9–2: Active Alarm

Parameter Explanation
Severity The severity of the alarm:
 Warning - 4
 Major - 5
 Critical - 6

Recovery Tip Tips to remit the alarm

Alarms Log
The Alarm Log page displays in a chronological order alarms that occurred up to the time you
generated the log. To view an updated log, refresh the log. You may view, refresh, clear and save
the log.
 To view the alarm log
1. Select Alarms > Alarm Log.

2. View the log. It displays the alarms registered up to the time you generated the log and
informs you of the following:

Table 9–3: Alarm History

Parameter Explanation
Description Describes the fault that invoked the alarm

Faulty Object The faulty component

Assert Time Indicates the time the alarm was raised

State Indicates whether the alarm is on or off

Severity The severity of the alarm

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 199 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 9 Monitoring Viewing Alarms

 To clear log
1. In the Alarm Log page, click Clear Log.
The currently displayed log disappears. Once you click Refresh History, a new log is
generated. It includes alarms registered since the last clear log.
 To save log to file
1. In the Alarm screen, click Save Log.
2. Select a location for saving the file and click Save.
The log is saved as an .XML log in the location of your choice.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 200 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter 10
Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting
The table below lists the alarm messages and describes their probable cause and possible
solutions. The alarms are arranged by module and in alphabetical order:

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Platform 4 CPC Card The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation
Temp. Sense of the cooling fans.
Exceed Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists,
call Customer
Support.
5 CPC Card Inappropriate power supply Power-off the device and Call
Voltage Error for CPC card. Customer Support.

Platform 6 CPC Card HW An essential component of Power-off the device and Call
Failure the card is faulty. Customer Support

7 Platform Indicative alarm that appears N/A

Initializing in History log only.

11 NTP Connection to NTP failed or  Check Ethernet link of

Connection lost Ethernet port 3.
Failure  Check NTP server definitions.

16 Front Panel Not Front panel malfunction Call Customer Support

Present

17 Failure The CWS (Control Word Power down and power up the
Generating CW Server) does not CWS
successfully generate CW.

18 More Than One More than one NMX is In the web client of the device,
NMX controlling the device. open the Support page, and
Connected to click View Net Stat. Look for
the Device TCP connections port 80
(HTTP) and try to figure out via
IPs which NMX is yours. If there
is an unknown IP, ask your IT
team about it.

19 Got New Indicative alarm that appears N/A

Configuration in History log only. Indicates
a change in the
configuration.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 201 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Platforms 20 Platform Indicative alarm that the unit N/A
Change to be configuration has changed
Backup and currently it is configured
as a backup device

21 Platform Indicative alarm that the unit N/A

Change to be configuration has changed
Primary and currently it is configured
as a primary device

22 DT Mux Priority Indicative alarm remitted N/A

Changed when a redundancy switch
has taken place. Thus, the
DT mux priority was
changed.
24 Auto- The handshake protocol with Reconfigure the switch to use
Negotiation the switch failed auto-negotiation settings.
Failed:
management
network

25 Auto- The handshake protocol with Reconfigure the switch to use

Negotiation the switch failed auto-negotiation settings.
Failed: CAS
network

26 Could not The device could not reserve Check how many spliceable
Reserve Max maximum splice engines to services were configured and
Splice Engines splice services. remove unnecessary services

31 Reset Required The required firmware is Reset the device.

after ready. Reset the device to
Successful DL bootup with the new
firmware.

32 Background Background download in N/A

Download in progress
Progress

33 Background Indicative alarm. Background N/A

Download in Download is in Progress.
Progress -
Retry
34 Background Background download failed Check that the TFTP server is
Download due to TFTP error. up and running. Zap the device.
Failed - TFTP
Error

35 Background Background download failed Remove previous firmware files

Download because the disk is full. to free up space.
Failed - Disk
Full

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 202 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Platform 36 Background Background download failed. Check that the TFTP server is
Download up and running. Zap the device.
Failed - Error

37 Background Background Download was Reboot the device or retry to

Download cancelled download firmware.
Cancelled

38 Reserved BR in At least one of the DiviTrack Contact Harmonic Customer

Safe Mode pools was configured to Support.
enable the reservation of
pool bitrate.
When this is true, the
Multiplexer expects the
reserved bitrate client to
communicate with it at least
once every 5 seconds. This
term was not fulfilled, so the
actual reserved bitrate for
every DiviTrack pool will be
the maximum configured
bitrate.

65 Unavailable The internal socket created If problem persists, call

Internal Socket for the insertion channel is customer support.
not allocated.

70 License Grace A licensed feature has been Purchase the license for the
Period Enabled used without a license. You feature
have a grace period of 45
days to use this feature and
to purchase a license

71 License Expired License has reached its Purchase the required license
expiration date.

73 License General An internal licensing failure  Restart the device

Failure is detected  If problem persists, call
Customer Support.

80 SFC Detection Failed to detect System Fan Replace fan unit

Failed Controller due to:
HW failure of the controller,
or
Controller is not installed.

81 Cooling System Detected at least one faulty Replace fan unit

Failure fan out of 6 or x of 8 fans

82 SFC Cooling A transient error indication. Verify the alarm is remitted. If

Communication persists, replace fan unit.
Failure

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 203 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Platform 83 SFC Ext Temp Internal temperature >= To be defined
Near Threshold Internal temperature
threshold

84 SFC Amb External temperature >= To be defined

Temp Near external temperature
Threshold threshold.

85 PSU1 Not Power supply is not mounted Insert Power supply module in
Mounted in slot 1 slot 1

86 PSU2 Not Power supply is not mounted Insert Power supply module in
Mounted in slot 2 slot 2

87 PS1 Not Power supply in slot 1 is  Check power

Operational malfunctioning  Check power cable
 Check power supply unit in
slot 1

88 PS2 Not Power supply in slot 2 is  Check power

Operational malfunctioning  Check power cable
 Check power supply unit in
slot 1

89 IPOL Card IPOL card is over heating  Check the fans for proper
Temp. Sense operation
Exceeds Limits  Check the temp of the
environment .

90 SW Upgrade
Failed

112 Syslog Server There is not communication Check connectivity

is Unreachable between the Splicer and the
Syslog server

113 Ad Server
Communication
Error

114 CMG
Protection
Activated
115 CMG System is
Slowing Down

Slot 11 Card Missing The configured card is not  Verify that the card is
detected in the slot. mounted in the slot
 Verify that card is secured to
the slot.
 If problem persists, replace
card.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 204 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Slot 12 Card Mismatch The detected card is not as Verify that the appropriate card
configured is mounted in the slot.

ASI Scr Card 4 ASI Sensed The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation
Temp Exceeds of the cooling fans.
Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace
the IOM card.

5 ASI Card Inappropriate power supply Replace card.

Voltage Error of GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

6 ASI Card HW An essential component of Replace card.

Failure the card is faulty.

7 ASI Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

8VSB Card 7 Meteor Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

6 Meteor Card An essential component of Replace card.

HW Failure the card is faulty.

4 Meteor Sensed The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation

Temp. of the cooling fans.
Exceeds  Power-off the device.
Limits  Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace
the card.

5 Meteor Card Inappropriate power supply Replace card.

Voltage Error of GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

ASI Port 11 ASI Input No ASI input flow  Check the ASI source
Signal Loss  Check the ASI input cable
and replace if defective.

12 ASI Input Sync No valid MPEG data detected Check the ASI source
Loss on the input ASI signal

15 ASI Output
Bitrate
Unsynchronized

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 205 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

8VSB Port Meteor No RF input is detected Check RF input
Demodulator
Reset

Transcoding 7 Transcoding Indicative alarm that appears N/A

Card Card Initializing in History log only.

6 Transcoding The transcoding card Call Customer Support

Card Failure crashed resulting from an
unknown error.

21 Transcoding The device RAM is less than Call Customer Support

Card is Not 1G.
Supported by
HW Model

4 Transcoding The card is over heating Call Customer Support

Card Temp.
Sense Exceed
Limits

5 Transcoding Inappropriate power supply Call Customer Support

Card Voltage of transcoding card.
Error

12 ACE Card
Buffer Overflow

Transcoding 17 No The main processing unit Verify that the transcoding card
Engine Communication cannot communicate with is securely fastened in its slot
with the transcoding engine If persists, call customer support
TransEngine

11 TransEngine Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

FPGA fault
Signal Loss

12 TransEngine Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

FPGA Sync fault
Loss

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 206 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Transcoding 16 TransEngine Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support
Engine FPGA Output fault
Overflow

20 Loss of Input Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

TS (no nulls) fault

21 TransEngine Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

Application fault
Error (no
output)

23 Host- Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

TransEngine fault
Sync Error
(Time Change)

24 TS RX Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

Overflow Error fault

25 TS TX Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

Underflow Error fault

27 Audio DSP - Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

Communication fault
Failure

28 Audio DSP - Transcoding engine internal Call Customer Support

Core Failure fault

29 Audio DSP - Transcoding engine internal Internal problem. If problem

System Failure fault persists, call Customer Support.

30 Audio DSP Transcoding engine internal Check that configuration meets

- Not fault spec.
enough
resources
License No license for transcoding Purchase the required license
Transcoding and Grace period has
Missing expired.

License PIP No license for PIP and Purchase the required license
Missing Grace period has expired.

License Audio No license for ALM and Purchase the required license
Level Missing Grace period has expired.

Pool License Pool No license for pool and Purchase the required license
Missing Grace period has expired

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 207 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE-1G 4 GbE Card The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation
Card Sensed Temp of the cooling fans.
Exceeds Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace
the IOM card.

6 GbE Card HW An essential component of Replace card.

Failure the card is faulty.

7 GbE Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

5 GbE Card Inappropriate power supply Replace card.

Voltage Error of GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

11 GbE Output Too many identical PIDs are Reduce the number of multicast
Multicast Buffer output through the same PIDs.
Overflow IOM card.

13 GbE Input The input traffic buffer Check the input bit rate.
Descrambling overflowed.
Bitrate
Exceeded

8 GbE Card Input An internal data error in the Reassign the GbE IOM.
Data Loss GbE IOM card.

12 Pacer Clock An internal error in the GbE Reassign the GbE IOM.
Error IOM card.

14 GbE Flash A notification message N/A

Upgrade in during the upgrade of the
Process GbE IOM firmware.

GbE-4G 4 GbE -4G Card The card is overheating.  Check for proper operation
Card Sensed Temp of the cooling fans.
Exceeds Limits  Power-off the device.
 Ensure that the air filters are
clean.
 If alarm persists, replace
the IOM card.

6 GbE-4G Card An essential component of Replace card.

HW Failure the card is faulty.

7 GbE-4G Card An essential card error. Replace card.

Initializing

5 GbE-4G Card Inappropriate power supply Replace card.

Voltage Error of GbE card. If more than one card issues the
alarm, call Customer Support.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 208 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE-4G 11 GbE Output Too many identical PIDs are Reduce the number of multicast
Card Multicast Buffer output through the same PIDs.
Overflow IOM card.

13 GbE Input The input traffic buffer Check the input bit rate.
Descrambling overflowed.
Bitrate
Exceeded

8 GbE-4 Card An internal data error in the Reassign the GbE IOM.
Input Data Loss GbE IOM card.

12 Pacer Clock An internal error in the GbE Reassign the GbE IOM.
Error IOM card.

14 GbE-4G Flash A notification message N/A

Upgrade in during the upgrade of the
Process GbE IOM firmware.

21 GbE-4G
Protobuf Server
is Not
Connected

200 Packets Without

300 47 in TS header
1

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 209 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE Port 17 GbE Auto- The handshake protocol with Check switch.
Negotiation the switch failed
Failed

23 GbE Input Error Input GBE port general 1. Verify that an SFP
failure. is installed in the
port.
2. Check the physical
connection between the
port and the switch.
3. Check the validity of the
GbE port configuration and
that it matches the network
definitions.
16 GbE Input IP At least one IP packet has a Check the switch, fiber, and
Packet CRC CRC error SFP connections.
Error

24 GbE Input IP At least one IP packet is Check the switch, fiber, and
Packet Missing missing SFP connections.

20 GbE Input Non Management traffic on the Look for sources with excessive
MPEG Buffer GbE network port exceeds management traffic.
Overflow the port’s capacity.

21 GbE Input Inter The Inter Packet Gap is below Check source.
Packet Gap 12 ticks.
Too Small

22 GbE Input The payload length of an Check source.

Invalid IP/UDP input IP/UDP packet is not
Packet Length divisible by 188 bytes
(standard length of an
MPEG packet)

11 GbE Link Down The Gigabit Ethernet port is Connect the cable.
- Cable down.
Disconnect

26 GbE Port Failed The GbE port link is down. Check the link for connectivity.

15 GbE Output FIFO overrun causes data to Standalone - reset the module.
MPEG Buffer be dropped and might cause If it does not remit the alarm,
Overflow decoding problems. contact Harmonic Customer
Support.

12 GbE SFP The SFP connector is missing Check that the SFP connector is
Missing from the GbE port fully inserted.

25 GbE Slave In port redundancy, the None

Channel backup port is active
Activated

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 210 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

200 GbE-4 Port
600 Input Data
1 Loss

200 GbE-4G Port

601 Exceeds Max.
2 800 Mbps

200 GbE-4G Port

601 Exceeds Max.
3 Input

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 211 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE In 41 GbE Input No data is detected in the Verify the socket is correctly
Access Point Backup Socket backup input socket defined and is streamed to the
Not Active device.

42 GbE Input No data is detected in the Verify the socket is correctly

Primary Socket primary input socket defined and is streamed to the
Not Active device.

21 GbE Input Input bit rate exceeds Check source

Socket Buffer estimated bit rate
Overflow

22 Invalid Source Source clock frequency Check source

Clock breaches the MPEG
Frequency specifications

24 GbE Input For more than 100ms, no Check source

Socket Lost PCR has been detected
PCR at input socket

25 GbE Input PCR discontinuity with no Check source

Socket Erred Discontinuity indicator
PCR

26 GbE Input Detects a change in the bit Check source

Socket CBR rate of an MPTS. The
Rate Changed MPTS must be a CBR
stream.
27 GbE Input An MPTS socket is not CBR Check source
Socket Max.
Jitter Exceeded

28 GbE Input The order of the transport In most cases, this is a

Socket stream packets inside the IP momentary alarm. If this alarm is
Timestamp packet is wrong. not remitted, check the network.
Error

31 Failed to The descrambler does not Check that the CWS is alive
Receive CW for successfully receive a CW and communication cables are
the Service response for the service from connected.
the CWS (Control Word
Server).

32 Invalid There are problems in Check that the CWS is alive

Response from communication between the and communication cables are
CWS descrambler and CWS. connected.

33 Missing ECM No ECM was extracted from The scrambler does not send
PMT for the scrambled ECM to the descrambler.
service. Check scrambler configuration.

34 Missing CA There is no CA information The CA descriptor is missing.

Information for the descrambled service. Check the scrambler
configuration.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 212 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

35 Undefined There is no AES descriptor The descrambler still will try to
Scrambling in the PMT. descramble the service.
Algorithm The scrambler should add a
CAS Mode descriptor to the
PMT.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 213 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE In 37 Unsupported The scrambling descriptor is In this case, the descrambler
Access Point Scrambling not AES-NSA. will try to descramble the
Algorithm service.
The scrambler should add a
scrambling descriptor with an
AES-NSA value to the PMT.
38 Encoder’s Clock The clock of the encoder is Check the schedule format
Not Synced to not synchronized with the against the specification.
Mux clock of the multiplexer.

52 GbE Input PAT is missing in the Check source

Primary Socket- primary socket for a longer
PAT Missing period than the configured
failover time

53 GbE Input PAT is missing in the Check source

Backup Socket- backup socket for a longer
PAT Missing period than the configured
failover time

54 Missing PMT
55 Missing Backup
PMT

50 GbE Backup With access point/socket None

Socket level redundancy configured,
Activated the primary transport has
failed, and the backup
transport is active or failed.

43 Queue Depth The allocated buffer reaches Check bit rate configuration in
Threshold the predefined fullness (50%) the input data socket
Passed

GbE Input With access point/socket/ 1. Check the GbE input for
Primary Socket service- level redundancy link and activity.
- A/V Missing configured, the primary 2. Check that the IP and UDP
transport failed. are flowing to the port.
GbE Input Backup Socket - A/
V Missing 3. Check that the IP and UDP
do not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32
lower bits).

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 214 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE Input With access point/socket/ 1. Check the GbE input for
Backup Socket service- level redundancy link and activity.
- A/V Missing configured, the primary 2. Check that the IP and UDP
transport failed. are flowing to the port.
3. Check that the IP and UDP
do not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32
lower bits).

47 DiviTrack Connectivity problem Check the connectivity between

Upstream between the DiviTrack the device and the encoder.
Problem controller and the encoder.

GbE In 46 DiviTrack Connectivity problem Check the connectivity between

Access Point Downstream between the encoder and the the device and the encoder.
Problem DiviTrack controller.

11 GbE Socket With access point/socket/ 1. Check that the IP and

Failed service- level redundancy UDP are indeed flowing to
configured, both the primary the port.
and the backup transports 2. Check that the IP and UDP
have failed. do not create a conflict with
other sockets (same 32
lower bits).

15 PSIP Tables PSIP Master Guide Table Recheck the connection and
Missing (MGT) was lost. extraction settings.

8VSB In 21 Meteor Weak No RF input is detected Check RF input

Access Point Signal/Loss of
Sync

25 Meteor Packet Problematic RF signal. Check support Meteor page to

Error Rate get the actual instantaneous
Threshold packet error rate value.
Exceeded

23 Meteor Signal Problematic RF signal. Check support Meteor page to

Quality (SNR) get the actual signal quality
Below value.
Threshold

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 215 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

GbE Out 12 GbE Output Cannot get MAC address of Check IP connectivity to
Access Point Socket Not the destination in unicast destination.
Transmitted mode.

13 GbE Output Cannot get an updated Check IP connectivity to

Socket - destination MAC address. destination.
Unreachable Output is sent to the last
Destination known MAC address. (in
unicast mode)

16 GbE Output The actual bit rate of the Delete services from the
Socket - Buffer GbE output socket exceeds alarmed TS until the bit rate
Overflow Level the configured output bit stabilizes and the alarm is
= High rate remitted or redefine bit rate for
this socket.

17 GbE Output Because of PID priority, Informational only.

Socket - Buffer some PIDs from Normal
Overflow Level priority are dropped.
= Normal

18 GbE Output Because of PID priority, Informational only

Socket - Buffer some PIDs from Medium
Overflow Level priority are dropped.
= Medium

19 GbE Output Because of PID priority, Informational only.

Socket - Buffer some PIDs from Low priority
Overflow Level are dropped.
= Low

20 Invalid CAS An invalid CAS mode is Set the correct CAS mode
Mode detected

11 DVB Regen. DVB Regenerations Not This HW model does not

Not Supported Supported support this feature.
by this HW
Model

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 216 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

TsIn TsIn CC Error The splicer detected a None
Detected continuity counter error on
the transport stream input.

TsIn MPEG The port has lost sync with Check source
Sync Loss the incoming transport.

Invalid CAS The CAS mode for fixed key Change the CAS mode and
mode should be AES_CBC for reset the device
both descrambler and
scrambler
Primary Source The primary source failed Check source
Failed and redundancy switch took
place

Backup Source Backup source 1 failed Check source

1 Failed

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 217 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

TsIn Backup Source Backup source 2 failed Check source
2 Failed

Backup Source Backup source 3 failed Check source

3 Failed

Backup Source Backup source 4 failed Check source

4 Failed

Backup Source Backup source 5 failed Check source

5 Failed

Primary Source Average bitrate of the Check source

PID Underflow primary source in the pre-
defined bitrate window is
under the pre-defined
threshold

Backup Source Average bitrate of the backup Check source

1 PID source 2 in the pre-defined
Underflow bitrate window is under the
pre-defined threshold

Backup Source Average bitrate of the backup Check source

2 PID source 2 in the pre-defined
Underflow bitrate window is under the
pre-defined threshold

Backup Source Average bitrate of the Check source

3 PID backup source 3 source in
Underflow the pre- defined bitrate
window is under the pre-
defined threshold

Backup Source Average bitrate of the backup Check source

4 PID source 4 in the pre-defined
Underflow bitrate window is under the
pre-defined threshold

Backup Source Average bitrate of the Check source

5 PID backup source 5 source in
Underflow the pre- defined bitrate
window is under the pre-
defined threshold

Primary Source PAT is missing in primary Check source

PAT Missing

Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source

1 PAT Missing source 1

Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source

2 PAT Missing source 1

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 218 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source
3 PAT Missing source 1

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 219 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

TsIn Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source
4 PAT Missing source 1

Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source

5 PAT Missing source 1

Primary Source PMT is missing in primary Check source

PMT Missing

Backup Source PAT is missing in backup Check source

1 PAT Missing source 1

Backup Source PMT is missing in backup Check source

2 PMT Missing source 1

Backup Source PMT is missing in backup Check source

3 PMT Missing source 1

Backup Source PMT is missing in backup Check source

4 PMT Missing source 1

Backup Source PMT is missing in backup Check source

5 PMT Missing source 1

Primary Source The number of detected Check source

CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on the
primary source.

Backup Source The number of detected Check source

1 CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on backup
source1.

Backup Source The number of detected Check source

2 CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on backup
source2.

Backup Source The number of detected Check source

3 CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on backup
source3.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 220 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Backup Source The number of detected Check source
4 CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on backup
source 4.

TsIn Backup Source The number of detected Check source

5 CC Errors continuity counter errors in a
Detected pre-configured time exceeds
the pre-defined number of
allowed CC errors on backup
source 5.

Primary Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

Detected on primary source.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

1 Detected on backup source 1.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

2 Detected on backup source 2.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

3 Detected on backup source 3.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

4 Detected on backup source 4.
Scrambled PID

Backup Source Detected a scrambled PID Check source

5 Detected on backup source 5.
Scrambled PID

TS Protection A TS protection redundancy Check source

Activated switch took place.

Could Not Find All backup sources are faulty. Check source
a Proper
Backup Source

Service In

ECM PID 11 ECM Stream This alarm is related to the 1. Check ECMG logs.
Allocation Error ECMG machine. Cannot get 2. Check AC.
ECM from ECMG.
3. Check the error number,
reported from ECMG.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 221 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

12 ECM Spooling There is a failure in ECM The total number of spooled
Error spooling. tables should not exceed 128
tables per transport stream.

EMM PID 11 EMM PID The configured EMM is  Check EMM configuration
Allocation Missing missing  Check connectivity between
device and EMMG.

12 EMM Bitrate The bit-rate of the EMM is Check EMM configuration

Exceeded higher than the configured
bit-rate

CAS 11 SCS EIS Not The TCP connection with Ensure the following:
Connected the EIS client on port 11000  The TCP link with EIS
is not established. (ping) exists.
 The EIS configuration
is 11000.

12 ECM is Missing One or more ECMs in one or Add an ECM and update as
in Configuration more SCG messages are necessary to ensure that all
missing, or the device ECMs in SCG messages are
receives an SCG message present in the ECM
with an unknown ECM ID. configuration.

13 PID to One of the PIDs that Verify output configuration and

Scramble is suppose to be scrambled EIS SCG provisioning.
Missing in isn't configured in the output.
Config
15 SCS ECMG The ECMG connection has Check the ECMG properties,
Connection been disconnected for 10 the Ethernet network, and the
Failure seconds. Services may not ECMG.
be encrypted properly.

16 SCS ECMG The ECMG connection has Check the ECMG properties,
Communication been disconnected for 10 the Ethernet network, and the
Problem seconds. Services may not ECMG.
be encrypted properly.

17 SCS CP Less The Crypto Period is less Adjust the Crypto Period or
than Delay Start than the delay start. Delay Start property values so
that the crypto period is greater
than the delay start value.

18 Backup is Not
Connected

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 222 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Reference Remap Range The number of PIDs of the Increase the configured remap
Service Overflow Reference Service exceeds range.
the configured number

Input Service The PMT of the Reference Check source

Missing Service is missing

Input RSS PID At least one PID is missing Check source

Missing in the Reference Service

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 223 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Output PID Missing Provisioned PID is missing in Check source.
Stream the input

Unsupported The input video stream is not Do not attempt to re-encode

Chroma 4:2:0. video streams of chroma
Sampling Mode sampling mode other than
4:2:0.

Low Delay The input video stream is Do not attempt to re-encode

Video Stream low-delay and cannot be re- low-delay content.
Detected encoded.

HD Stream The video stream is HD and Do not attempt to re-encode HD

Detected cannot be re-encoded. streams.

Unsupported The input video stream is not Do not attempt to re-encode

Frame Rate NTSC. non-NTSC video.

Unsupported The input video stream Do not attempt to re-encode a

Resolution horizontal resolution is not video stream with a horizontal
supported. resolution that is not 480, 528,
544, 704, or 720.

Encrypted PID The input stream is encrypted Do not attempt to re-encode

and cannot be re-encoded. encrypted content.

No DTS/PTS No DTS/PTS was detected Check the input stream.

Detected at at input for 700 ms. The
Input input video stream is not
MPEG compliant.

Invalid DTS at The input video stream is not Check the input stream.
Input MPEG compliant.

Sequence The input video stream is not Check the input stream
Header Error MPEG compliant.

Picture Header The input video stream Check input stream.

Error includes an invalid picture
header or bad marker bits.
The input video stream is not
MPEG-compliant.

Video Macro A problem was encountered Check the source.

Block Level in decoding the slice and
Error macro blocks.

MPEG1 Stream The video stream is MPEG1 Do not attempt to re-encode

Detected and cannot be re-encoded. MPEG1 streams.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 224 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Progressive A progressive refresh video Remove the progressive refresh
Refresh Stream stream was detected in a re- stream from the re-encoded
Detected encoded service. Re- service.
encoded services do not
support progressive refresh
streams.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 225 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Output Field Pictures Field pictures were detected. Remove field picture stream
Stream Detected Field picture streams are not from the re-encoded service.
supported in re-encoded
services.

Unexpected The input video stream is not Check the input stream
Frame Rate MPEG compliant.
(Video
Standard)

Unable to The device cannot decode Check the input stream.

Decode Input the input stream.
Stream

Corrupt Input The input transport stream is Check the input stream.
TS corrupted.

Processing Internal error in transcoding Call customer support

Input PID engine
Missing

Wrong Video This input video format is not Check input

Standard supported in this version.
(MPEG2/H264)

Input Vertical The configured VR does not Check input

Resolution match the actual VR
Mismatch

Vertical A notification because it is Engine is resetting and

Resolution service affecting. While transcodes with new resolution.
Changed on transcoding the input VR
Input type changed.

Invalid Picture Applies to input video format Check input

Type (not I, P H264. It is a stream related
or B) failure while decoding the
stream.

Reference PCR Did not get reference PCR for Check the source.
PID Interval > 500 ms. Either the PID
Error does not contain PCR values
or it is missing.

PIP Configured PIP Configured but PIP

but PIP Mode Mode is Disabled
is Disabled

PID Recoding Invalid content for Check source

Failure reencoding.

PID Xcoding Invalid content for Check source

Failure transcoding

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 226 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Input Codec The input video type is Change the input type (should
Not Supported different than 2, x80 and not require removal and re-
x1B. creating the stream)

Output Codec The output codec is not Change the output

Not Supported supported

SD Transcoding When trying to transcode a Check configuration

Not Supported SD stream.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 227 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Output Audio - Cannot Invalid content for decoding. Check input source. If problem
Stream decode - persists, call Customer Support.
Corrupted input

Audio - The device cannot decode Check input source and stream
Decoder Failure the input stream due to configuration. If problem
either input source or stream persists, call Customer Support.
configuration.

Audio - Cannot decode an encrypted Check input source.

Encrypted PID PID.
detected

Audio - No No input stream is detected Check input source.

input/ Unable to
sync

Audio - No PES No audio frames are Check input source.

detected detected in the input stream.

Audio - Input Inconsistency between Check Input Coding Mode

Audio Mode actual input audio mode and configuration.
Higher than configured audio mode. For
Config example, actual is MC and
configured is ST.

Audio - The input decoding format is In the Audio Transcoding

Decoding set to a low MHz decoder tab, configure decoding
Format (AAC LC / AC3) but actually format to Any.
Mismatch decoding format is a high
Config. MHz (AAC HE / E-AC3)

Audio - Encoder Is this output stream???? Internal problem.

Failure If problem persists, call
Customer Support.

Audio - The configured output bitrate Check that bitrate configuration

Unsupported is not supported for the is supported for configured
Output Bitrate configured coding mode. Output Coding Mode. See
Table 5–27 on page 140..

Audio - The configured output coding Check configuration. Try

Unsupported mode is not supported. changing Follow to another
Output Coding value.
Mode

Audio - Output sample rate is Check configuration

Unsupported always as in the input.
Output Sample
Rate

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 228 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Audio - Cannot PCR insertion rate is too low. Increase the audio ES bitrate
Meet PCR
Insertion Rate

Output Audio - No PTS was detected at Check input source

Stream Encoder detect input for XXX ms. The input
PTS Gap video stream is not MPEG
compliant

Output Backup Service Backup serivce1 is activated Informational alarm only.

Service 1 is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Backup Service Backup service 2 is activated Informational alarm only.

2 is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Backup Service Backup service is 3 activated Informational alarm only.

3 is Activated Look for another alarm that
triggered the backup service.

Service Failure Service is not streamed out Check source

Recoding Unit The recoding unit crashed Check the input stream
Failure resulting from an unknown
error, or the input video
stream is not MPEG
compliant.

Input PCR Interval error > 100 ms. Informational only.

Interval Error

Corrupt Input The device detects more than

PCR one time base discontinuity
within one second.

PCR on The input PCR is not carried Informational alarm.

Unsupported on the video component.
Component

Too Many ES The input service includes a Do not attempt to re-encode

number of non video content with more than one
elementary streams beyond video and five non video
the device's re-encoding elementary streams.
capabilities. The maximum
number of ES on the
ProStream 9000 is 6.

Could not The device could not allocate Check how many re-encoded
Allocate a re-encoder to re-encode services (VBR, Caped VBR,
Recoding Unit this service. There were no and DTMX pools) were
free units to re-encode the configured and remove
program. unnecessary services.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 229 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Output Excessive Non- The allocated video rate is Monitor the service to check its
Service Video Rate less than 2 Mbps. behavior. If problem persists,
call Customer Support.

I-Frame Due to errors in the input, the Check the input stream.
Dropped capped GOP structure was
violated, and an I-frame was
dropped.

ReEncoded There is no video ES for Verify that a video PID is

Service the re-encoded service. provisioned on the service.
Required Video
ES

ReEncoded In DiviTrackMX, the rate is too N/A

Service Rate low for encoding.
Too Low

EAS is Activated EAS service is activated. None

EAS Input The associated EAS input Check the EAS input transport
Service Missing service is missing. to ensure that the associated
EAS input service exists.

Pass-Through Input bit rate of the Pass- Check input signal.

Service Through Service is higher
Exceeded Max than Max Bit Rate.
Rate Service output will be
muted.
Slate Service is Occurs when the Slate None
Activated feature is activated.

Slate Service Occurs on the service output The stream cannot flow end-to-
Failure when the Slate is missing end. Check input stream.
from the service input (even
when the Slate is not
activated).

Primary Service The primary/backup source The stream cannot flow end-to-
Failure failed. end. Check input stream.

Backup Service The stream cannot flow end- Check input stream.
1 Failure to-end.

Backup Service The stream cannot flow end- Check input stream.
2 Failure to-end.

Backup Service The stream cannot flow end- Check input stream.
3 Failure to-end.

Service Name In splicing, another Check configuration

SCTE30 Error spliceable service with the
same name is detected

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 230 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Output Exceeded In splicing, too many PIDs Check configuration to match
Service Spliceable ESs are associated with the spec
Capacity service. The maximum PIDs
are:
Up to one video, up two
audio, up to eight data PIDs
No SCTE30 In splicing, Ad-Server either Check Ad-Server configuration
connection did not send Init request or
Init request is wrong.

Insertion Insertion channel (ad) did not Check Ad-Server streaming

Channel is arrive on time. interface.
Missing

Input PMT PMT entry required on the Recheck the extraction settings
Missing output was not received on on the service provided as the
the input. tables’ input for the PSIP/DVB
regeneration.

Input VCT VCT entry required on the Recheck the extraction settings
Missing output was not received on on the service provided as the
the input. tables’ input for the PSIP
regeneration.

ReEncoded DiviTrackMX, internal fault If alarm persists, call Customer

Service Missed Support
Rate

Transcoding The transcoding unit crashed Check the input stream.

Unit Failure resulting from an unknown
error, or the input video
stream is not MPEG
compliant.

Could not Too many services to Check configuration

Allocate transcode. Cannot allocate
Transcoding trans engine
Unit

Reenc and Wrong configuration Check configuration either to

Trans are reencode or to trans
selected for the
Service

Service Name Another Splice enabled Change to a unique service

SCTE30 Error service with the same name name
is provisioned

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 231 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting

Table 10–1: Alarm List Raised by Platform

Source Object ID Alarm Message Description Solution

Exceeding No. Check the max. number of Max. number of PIDs per Splice
of PIDs per PIDs per Splice enabled enabled service is:
Splice Service service.  1 Video PID
 Up to 8 Audio PIDs
 Up to 4 Data PIDs

Service Insertion Splicer could not receive the Check connection with the Ad
Output Channel is Ad at the insertion channel server (video network)
Missing for a certain Splice event.

Splice Event Splicer could not play the Ad Check that ad streams are
Failed. Session and had to return to the provisioned and that they are
ID # network feed valid

Splicing License Exceeded the number of Install additional DPI licenses

Missing installed DPI licenses. or reduce number of splice
enabled services

Could Not Splicer could not allocate a Check that the GbE 4G card is
Allocate Splice Splice Engine for the service. installed properly
Engine

Splice Enabled A Splice enabled service Verify that the input service has
Service Must supports only one video PID only one video PID
Have 1 Video
PID

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 232 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter 11
Spreadsheet
The Spreadsheet page shows sections of the transport streams found on the Configuration page.
These include:
 Input Sockets
 Input Transports
 Output Sockets
 Output Transports

 To bulk process sockets or streams on any Spreadsheet page, do the following:

 select the stream sockets or streams required. Filters on spreadsheet column can be used to
make this process easier.
 make a change on any one of the selected items. All selected items will reflect the same
change. This includes using the Remove button in the bottom left corner. Pressing this
button will delete all selected streams.

NOTE: To process more than 100 sockets, filter them first, then sort for best spreadsheet performance.

Input Sockets
The Input Sockets sheet accesses information found in the Physical Inputs section of the
Configuration page. You can display, sort, and manipulate information by means of drop-down
menus.

 To work with Input Sockets:

1. Click Input Sockets in the left column of the Spreadsheet page.
2. Select the box for the Input Socket required, or select the top box in the left column for all
sockets.
3. In the Action column, select the line required. Select the appropriate action:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 227 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Input Sockets

a. None
b. Open Dialog, to view the Input Socket Properties dialog.
For further information, see Configuring a Socket on page 35
c. Tree View, to see the socket in the Configuration page.
d. Duplicate, to make copies of the socket with new logical transport streams for the copies.
Here you can:
 Set the number of copies
 Select/clear Increment IP Address
 Select/clear Increment Port Number
5. Use the drop-down menu on the right side of each column to enable the following:
a. Sort Ascending
b. Sort Descending
c. Columns: two options are available.
 Check/clear a box to select/deselect the column view
 Filter by Subject.
For filtering options, see Table 11–1 on page 228
d. Filter
5. Click on the following columns to configure them:
a. IP Address
b. TCP/UDP Port
c. Socket Description
d. IP Type
e. Encapsulation Mode
f. SSM-1 IP
g. SSM-2
h. IP SSM-
i. 3 IP
j. SSM-4
k. IP
l. De-Jittering Mode
Delay
Table 11–1: (ms)
Input Socket Column Filter by Subject

Show All General FEC SSM De-Jittering

Slot : Port √ √ √ √ √
IP Address √ √ √ √ √
TCP/UDP Port √ √ √ √ √

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 228 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Input Transports

Table 11–1: Input Socket Column Filter by Subject

Show All General FEC SSM De-Jittering

Logical √ √ √ √ √
Connection

Socket √ √ √ √ √
Description

IP Type √ √ √
Encapsulation √ √ √ √
Mode

SSM-1IP √ √
SSSM-2 IP √ √
SSM-3 IP √ √
SSM-4 IP √ √
FEC √ √
De-Jittering √ √
Mode

Delay (ms) √ √
Average Input √ √
Bitrate (Mbps)

Input Transports
The Input Transports sheet accesses information found in the Logical Inputs section of the
Configuration page. The information can be displayed, sorted, and manipulated by means of
drop-down menus.

 To work with Input Transports:

1. Select Input Transports in the left column of the Spreadsheet page.
2. Select the Input Transport required, or select the top box in the left column for all transports.
3. In the Action column, select the line required. Select the appropriate action:
a. None
b. Open Dialog to see the Input TS: Properties box. For further information, see TS Properties
on page 41
c. Tree View to see the transport stream in the Configuration page.
4. Unless otherwise noted, all columns have a drop-down menu on the right side of the column.
This menu enables access to the following:
a. Sort Ascending
b. Sort Descending

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 229 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Output Sockets

c. Columns: two options are available.

 Select/clear a box to select/deselect the column view
 Filter by
Subject: TS ID
Description
Primary
Source
Report CC Errors
Alarm Eligible for Slate
Bitrate (Mbps)
Padding (Mbps)
Effective Rate (Mbps)
Transport Errors
d. Number of Errors
5. Click on the following columns to configure them::
a. Description - free text
b. Report CC Errors Alarm - Always, Never, If PID is
c. Passed Eligible for Slate - check/clear checkbox

Output Sockets
The Output Sockets sheet accesses information found in the Physical Outputs section of the
Configuration page. The information can be displayed, sorted, and manipulated by means of
drop-down menus.

 To work with Output Sockets:

1. Select Output Sockets in the left column of the Spreadsheet page.
2. Select the box for the Output Socket required, or the top box in the left column for all sockets.
3. In the Action column, select the line required. Select the appropriate action:
a. None
b. Open Dialog, to see the Output Socket Properties dialog.
For further information, see Configuring the Output Socket - GbE Output Port Only on page
c. 55 Tree View, to see the transport stream in the Configuration page.
d. Duplicate, to make copies of the socket with new logical transport streams for the copies.
Increment the IP Address and Port Number by checking the boxes provided. Click OK to
create the new sockets.
5. Unless otherwise noted, all columns have a drop-down menu on the right side of the column.
This menu enables the following:
a. Sort Ascending

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 230 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Output Sockets

b. Sort Descending
c. Columns: two options are available.
 Check/clear a box to select/deselect the column view
 Filter by Subject: for filter options, see Table 11–2 on page 231
d. Filters
5. Click on the following columns to configure them:
 IP
 Address
 UDP Port
 Socket Description
 Encapsulation Mode
 IP Type
 Bitrate
 Bitrate (Mbps)
 FEC Enable
 Static Destination MAC
 (checkbox) Static Destination
 MAC (address) IP Packet Size
 Time to Live
 Source IP Type

Table 11–2: Output Socket Column Filter by Subject

VLAN
Show All General FEC Source QoS Bitrate
Tagging
Slot : Port √ √ √ √ √ √ √
IP Address √ √ √ √ √ √ √
UDP Port √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Logical √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Connection

Socket √ √ √ √ √ √ √
Description

Encapsula √ √ √ √ √ √
tion Mode
IP Type √ √ √ √ √
Bitrate √ √
Bitrate √ √
(Mbps)

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 231 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Output Sockets

Table 11–2: Output Socket Column Filter by Subject

VLAN
Show All General FEC Source QoS Bitrate
Tagging
FEC Enable √ √
Number of √ √
Columns

Number of √ √
Rows

Static √
Destination
MAC

IP Packet √
Size (Bytes)

Time to Live √
Source IP √ √
Type

Source IP √ √
Address

Source UDP √ √
Port

QoS Type √ √
TOS Value √ √
(8 bits)

Precedence √ √
Type of √ √
Service

VLAN √ √
Tagging
Mode

VLAN √ √
Identifier

Drop √ √
Eligible
Indicator

Priority v √
Code Point

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 232 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 11 Spreadsheet Output Transports

Output Transports
The Output Transports sheet accesses transport-related information found in the Logical Outputs
section of the Configuration page. The information can be displayed, sorted, and manipulated by
means of drop-down menus.

 To work with Output

Transports:
1. Select Output Transports in the left column of the Spreadsheet page.
2. Select the box for the Output Transport required, or the top box in the left column for all
transports.
3. In the Action column, click on the line required. Select the appropriate action:
a. None
b. Open Dialog, to open the Output TS: Properties box.
For further information, see Configuring Output TS Properties on page 61.
c. Tree View, to see the transport stream in the Configuration page.
4. Unless otherwise noted, all columns have a drop-down menu on the right side of the column.
This menu enables the following:
a. Sort Ascending
b. Sort Descending
c. Columns: two options are available.
 Check/clear a box to select/deselect the column view
 Filter by Subject
 TS ID
 TS Description
 Network ID
 Scrambling Mode
 Scrambling Key
 Bitrate
d. Filters
5. Click on the following columns to configure them:
a. TS Description
b. Scrambling Mode
c. Scrambling Key
NOTE: Press Apply to have all changes entered take effect.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 233 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter 12
Administration and Platform Parameters

Overview
The Administration, Platform, and Spreadsheet pages include additional features as well as ways
to configure a ProStream. These features are grouped as follows:
Administration Page:
 IGMP - allows you to select the required IGMP version. See Selecting IGMP Version on
page 234
 NTP and Time - allows you to set the time of the device. See Setting Device Time on page 235
 Password - allows to define an access level. See Setting a Password on page 236
 HW Clock Source - allows to set the hardware clock source. See Defining HW Clock Source
on page 236
 DPI - allows to define the SCTE30 Port and allocate resources. See Defining the SCTE30 Port
and Allocating Resources on page 180.
 A/V Processing - allows to define the following:
 Set-top-box mode. See Defining the Set-Top-Box on page 236.
 ACE Video Configuration - allows to enable PIP and to set the video frequency. See
To enable ACE video processing, select ACE Picture in Picture (PIP). See Transcoding a PIP
Service on page 125. on page 237.
 ACE Audio Configuration - allows to define silence insertion. See Defining ACE
Audio Configuration on page 237.
 SNMP - see Defining SNMP Parameters on page
 237 BDS - for future use
 VIS - see Video Inventory System (VIS) on page
 238 Licenses - see Licenses on page 239
 Assets - allows to upload logo insertion files. See Uploading Logo Insertion Files on page 176.
 Syslog - see Syslog Settings on page 253
Platform Page:
 Redundancy - see Device Redundancy on page 255
 EAS - allows you to configure Emergency Alert System. See Defining SNMP Parameters
on page 237.
 ESAM - allows to configure ESAM system. See ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)
on page 263.

Selecting IGMP Version

IGMP-v3 allows to reuse multicast addresses in a network. Multicast streams in an IGMP-v3
enabled network are identified not only by their destination address, but also by their source
address.
ProStream 9000 may operate either in IGMP-v2 or IGMP-v3 mode. Switching between modes is
service affecting.

To select IGMP Version 

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 234 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Setting Device Time
Parame- ters

1. In the web page, select Administration > Global Setting page.

2. Open the list and select the required mode:

 Auto Detect
 IGMP Version 2
 IGMP Version 3

Setting Device Time

Network Time Protocol (NTP)
The Network Time Protocol table allows to synchronize the device time with the Universal Time
Coordination (UTC) by connecting the device to an NTP server. If you enable this option, you
cannot set the time of the unit manually.
 To set ProStream time according to the NTP server
Once you set the time according to the NTP server, you cannot set ProStream time manually.
1. In the web page, select Administration > Date & Tim page.

2. To synchronize the ProStream time with the UTC time, check Enable NTP Sync.
3. In Server IP, enter the IP address of the NTP server.
In case an NTP server is unavailable, you may set the unit time manually.

Setting Device Time Manually

1. In the Date and Time fields, enter date and time respectively. Date format: dd/month/yyyy.
Time format: hh:mm:ss AM/PM.
2. To send required date and time to the unit, click Set Local Time.
A verification message appears.
3. Click Ok.
The required time is sent to the unit and the date and time are updated immediately.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 235 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Setting a Password
Parame- ters

4. To set the local time offset according to the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), open the Time
Zone list and select the required GMT offset.
NOTE: Set manually local time offset upon Day Light Saving changes.

Setting a Password
 Select Administration > User Management page. See Setting/Changing a Password on page
12.

Defining HW Clock Source

NOTE: SFN application is currently unsupported.

In SFN application, the Receiver accepts an external clock signal over an ASI port 1 of any card.
1. In the web page, select Administration > Global Settings > Advanced section:.

2. Under HW Clock Source, select the required option:

 Internal - to revert to an internal clock
 Slot 1- slot 5 - select the requires slot for receiving the external clock.
3. Service Descriptors Automatic Generation - select to allow automatic generation of service-
name descriptor in SDT table.

Defining the Audio/Video Processing

Defining the Set-Top-Box
1. Select Administration > Global Settings > Video Processing section. .

2. Open the Set-Top Box Mode list and select one of the following:
 DVB
 Motorola
 Philips
 Samsung SMT (gives an 8:9 aspect ratio for video headers of transcoded H.264

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 236 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Defining SNMP Parameters
Parame- ters

720x480i output)
3. To enable ACE video processing, select ACE Picture in Picture (PIP). See Transcoding a
PIP Service on page 125.
4. To set the video frequency, open the Video Frequency list and select 50Hz or 60Hz.
5. PS2K Compatible - select to allow compatible with ProStream 2000.

Defining ACE Audio Configuration

1. Select Administration > Global Settings > Video Processing section. .

2. Open the Silence Insertion Enable list and select either of the following:
 Enable - Full support of Silence Mode. If enabled, silence is inserted in cases of corrupt/
missing audio input.
 Disable
3. In Silence Insertion Timeout (msec), enter the required time out. The default is 200
milli.seconds. Indicates the period of time for input loss that requires the activation of silence
insertion.

Defining SNMP Parameters

The device is capable of reporting its status via SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
to a third-party SNMP-based network management systems.
The status of the device is reported to the SNMP manager as SNMP Traps - notifications that
the device initiates and sends to the SNMP manager to indicate the assertion or remittance of an
alarm or warning. SNMP Traps are sent only to SNMP managers that are registered with the
device. To allow sending SNMP traps, configure up to four SNMP managers as explained below:
 To forward SNMP traps:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 237 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Video Inventory System (VIS)
Parame- ters

1. Select Administration > SNMP page.

2. In IP Address, enter the IP address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP
traps from the device.
3. In UDP port enter the UDP the device uses for connecting and sending traps.
4. Community Name - The required string value for the Get Community. The Get Community is
the community with Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this
community Get commands. The default string is public.
5. Description - enter a short description of the Trap Listener.
6. To add another device to receive the traps, click Add.

Video Inventory System (VIS)

As services traverse the network, multicast addresses change due to local service aggregation
and ad splicing. Since the operator cannot correlate a multicast address to a particular service, it
becomes difficult to address quality issues and resolve outages in a timely fashion resulting in
longer down times, higher call volume, and a less than optimal customer experience.
The VIS feature allows to create a video inventory system by appending information to the
Service Description Table (SDT). The SDT is populated at the multiplex source within the
Comcast network, and updated by each device that manipulates the MPEG transport stream
with a device identification. Thus, you can easily determine the path for any given service.
 To use the VIS feature
1. Select Administration > Global Settings > Video Inventory System (VIS) section:

2. Select Enable VIS to enable the VIS feature.

3. In System Name enter the required name to append to the SDT table.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 238 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Licenses
The following features of ProStream 9000 require licensing:
 Video and audio transcoding - each transcoded stream requires a license
 VBR pools - ACE DiviTrackMX™
To transcode, you need to purchase a license. For the complete list of available licenses, see
Table 12–3 on page 240.
Licenses are arranged in hierarchy according to their capabilities. You can use a license with a
high hierarchy for operation that requires a lower hierarchy as the following examples show:
 If you purchased a HD transcoding license, you can use it for SD transcoding.
 If you purchased a H.264 transcoding license, you can use it for MPEG-2 transcoding.
To view license hierarchies, see Licenses Hierarchy on page 246.
ProStream 9000 is shipped with the purchased licenses. In case you need an additional license,
ProStream 9000 grants you a grace period that allows you to use this feature. Grace period is for
45 days of device uptime. When Grace period is active, the alarm License Grace Period Enabled
is raised. Once licenses are installed, the grace period is reloaded.
The following table lists the licensing specifications

Table 12–1: Licensing Specifications

Parameter Explanation
Licensed feature  Video and audio transcoding (ACE only) - per
each stream
 VBR pools - ACE DiviTrackMX™

License Type  Permanent - Once you install a license, it is for

unlimited time
 Grace - All features are working for 45 days grace
period. Grace period of 45 days is counted
according to device uptime.
 Expired - Licenses that are based on a calendar
timeline. These licenses are for demo purposes
only.

License Management Licenses are added/removed via the following:

 External license tool (NLM) - this tool resided on
another PC. The device uses HTTP to transfer
files from/to NLM. See Licensing System
Architecture on page 240.
Note: Adding/removing licenses does not affect
running streams. However, it affects licensing
allocation. See License Allocation on page 247.
Note: In case of card failure, to release licenses you
should manually disable transcoding.
Firmware Upgrade/ Licenses are maintained after upgrade/downgrade.
Downgrade

License Allocation Licenses are allocated according to their hierarchy.

See License Allocation on page 247.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 239 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Licensing System Architecture

Table 12–2: Licensing System Architecture Legend

Term Explanation
NLM Nodelock License Manager. A desktop application

FNO Flexera database that stores licenses at the Harmonic

backoffice

Supported Licenses
The following table lists the currently supported licenses

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

2 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- 180 days Firmware License for DEMO
DEMO enables output of HD, SD, MPEG-
2, H.264, audio Transcoding

3 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- p Firmware License for LAB enables

LAB output of HD, SD, MPEG-2,
H.264,
audio Transcoding
4 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT- P Firmware License for ANY output
OUT format: HD, SD, MPEG-2, H.264
Transcoding

FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP P Firmware License for Transcoding

FIRMWARE LICENSE FOR ALL
ProStream 9000 FUNCTIONS for
BACKUP

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 240 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

5 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE 30 days Firmware License for ACE COLD
SPARE HD, SD, MPEG-2, H.264
output Transcoding

6 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD MPEG-2,

H.264 output Transcoding

7 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT P Firmware License for H.264 PIP

output Transcoding

8 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD P Firmware License for HD, H.264

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [012]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD on
page 248
9 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD, H.264
output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [013]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD on
page 248
10 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD P Firmware License for HD, MPEG-2
output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [017]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD on page 249

11 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD P Firmware License for SD, MPEG-2

output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [018]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD on
page 249
12 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC- P Firmware License for
OUT-SD DownConvert to SD, H.264 output
Transcoding For hierarchy, see
[014]: FW-PRM- 9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-
OUT-SD on
page 248
13 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2- P Firmware License for
OUT-SD DownConvert to SD, MPEG-2
output Transcoding For hierarchy,
see [015]: FW-PRM- 9K-ACE-DWCV-
MP2-OUT-SD on
page 249
14 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP- P Firmware License for HD H.264
OUT PIP output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [016]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT on
page 249

15 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP- P Firmware License for SD H.264

OUT PIP output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [022]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT on
page 250

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 241 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

16 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT P Firmware License for Audio
Transcoding of Stereo output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [009]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT on
page 248
FW- PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC- Firmware License for Audio
OUT Transcoding of Multichannel output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [008]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT on page 248.

17 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital
Multichannel output Transcoding
see [004]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-
MC-OUT on page 247

17 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Stereo Dolby
Digital output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [005]:FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT on
page 247

18 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+- P Firmware License for Audio

MC-OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital+
Multichannel output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [002]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT on
page 247

19 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Dolby Digital+
Stereo output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [003]:FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT on
page 247

20 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX- P Firmware License for Audio

OUT Transcoding of Multichannel IN,
Stereo OUT output Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [007]:FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT on
page 247

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 242 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

21 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX- P Firmware License for Audio
DD-OUT Transcoding of Multichannel IN,
Stereo Dolby Digital output
Transcoding
For hierarchy, see [006]:FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT
on
page 247
22 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC P Firmware License for Multichannel
5.1 Audio Leveling
For hierarchy, see [010]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC on
page 248
23 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST P Firmware License for Stereo 2.1
Audio Leveling
For hierarchy, see [011]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST on page
248
24 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD- P Firmware License for Mobile/Web
AAC-OUT audio xcoding of AAC stereo out
For hierarchy, see [019]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT on
page 249

25 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR- P Mobile/Web AVC MBR-group of

OUT-HD 2 HD or 1HD + 0 to 3 SD profiles
Firmware License
For hierarchy, see [020]: FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD
on
page 249
26 FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR- P Mobile/Web AVC MBR-group of up
OUT-SD to 4 SD profiles Firmware License
For hierarchy, see [021]: FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD on
page 249

27 FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1 P DTMX FW License

For hierarchy, see [028]: FW-
PRM- 9K-DTMX-1 on page 250

28 SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT P Firmware DiviTrackIP License per

pool
For hierarchy, see [037]: SW-LIC-
PRM-9K-DT on page 251

29 FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1 P Firmware for Slate insertion per

service. Enable to switch any
service to an alternative source
(Slate)
For hierarchy, see [036]: FW-
PRM- 9K-SLATE-SRV-1 on page
251

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 243 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

30 FW-PRM-9K-EAS-1 P Firmware license for Emergency
Alert System
For hierarchy, see [030]: FW-
PRM- 9K-EAS-1 on page 250

31 FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1 P Firmware license for Selective

Encryption of 1 SPTS
For hierarchy, see [035]: FW-
PRM- 9K-SELCSCR-1 on page 251

32 FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for BISS Fixed

key Scrambling per Service
For hierarchy, see [024]: FW-
PRM- 9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 on page
250
33 FW-PRM-9K-8VSB P Firmware license for platform
equipped with 8VSB Receiver
module, enabling reception of one
ATSC RF channel
For hierarchy, see [001]:FW-
PRM- 9K-8VSB on page 247

34 FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1 P Firmware license for AES De-

Scrambling of 1 Service
For hierarchy, see [025]: FW-
PRM- 9K-DESAES-1 on page 250

35 FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1 P Firmware license for SCTE-35

Insertion on 1 service
For hierarchy, see [033]: FW-
PRM- 9K-SCTE35-1 on page 251

36 FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW P Firmware license for AES

Scrambling per 1 service
For hierarchy, see [023]: FW-
PRM- 9K-AES-CW on page 250

37 FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW P Firmware license for DVB

Scrambling per 1 service
For hierarchy, see [029]: FW-
PRM- 9K-DVB-CW on page 250

38 FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for Fixed key De-

Scrambling of 1 service
For hierarchy, see [026]: FW-
PRM- 9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 on page
250
39 FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 P Firmware license for Fixed key
Scrambling of 1 service
For hierarchy, see [032]: FW-
PRM- 9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 on page
251

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 244 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

40 FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1 P Firmware license for ProMPEG
COP3 Forward Error Correction for
1 MPTS
For hierarchy, see [031]: FW-
PRM- 9K-FEC-TS-1 on page 251

41 FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 P Firmware enabling Encryption

Hacking Protection scrambling
mode per platform
For hierarchy, see [034]: FW-
PRM- 9K-SELC-EHP-1 on page
251
FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 P Firmware enabling Encryption
Hacking Protection scrambling
mode per platform.
For hierarchy, see [034]: FW-PRM-9K-
SELC-EHP-1 on page 251

42 FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE- P Firmware enabling device

REDUNDANCY redundancy in Stand Alone Mode
using Internal Harmonic Protocol
For hierarchy, see [027]: FW-PRM-
9K-DEVICE- on page 250

FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO ProStream 9000 ACE Logo

insertion for multiscreen -1
Firmware License for MBTS
group For hierarchy, see [038]:
FW-PRM- 9K-ACE-MW-LOGO on
page 251
49 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-HD Firmware Option for ProStream
9000 for H.264 AVC HD splicing
For hierarchy, see [052] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-AVC-HD on page 251
50 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD Firmware Option for ProStream
9000 for H.264 AVC SD splicing
For hierarchy, see [051] FW-PRM-
9K-DPI-AVC-SD on page 251

51 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD Firmware Option for ProStream

9000 for MP2 HD splicing
For hierarchy, see [054] FW-
PRM- 9K-DPI-MP2-HD on page
252
52 FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD Firmware Option for ProStream
9000 for MP2 SD splicing
For hierarchy, see [053] FW-
PRM- 9K-DPI-MP2-SD on page
252

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 245 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

Table 12–3: Supported Licenses

# License Name Duration Description

FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND P ProStream 9000 ACE SCTE 35
stream conditioning support
license. One per video stream
required. For hierarchy, see [055]
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND on
page 252.

FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN P ProStream 9000 DVB-sub burn-in

Firmware License per 1 service.
For hierarchy, see [056] FW-PRM-
9K-DVBSUB-BURN on page 252.

Working with Licenses

To transcode and to work with VBR pools, you need to purchase licenses.
To mange your licenses, that is to install and to remove licenses, use the NLM (Nodelock
License Manager), an external tool. See Licensing System Architecture on page 240.
Once you select Transcoding per audio/video PID (Re Muxing tab) and click Apply, the device
activates the license according to the output transcoding format. (See following captures)

NOTE: If you did not configure video or audio transcoding, yet selected Transcoding, once you click
Apply, the default license is activated.

Licenses Hierarchy
Licenses are arranged in a hierarchical order: Hierarchy is divided as follows:
 Video - hierarchy among video licenses
 Audio - hierarchy among audio licenses
The following table lists the licensing hierarchy. Hierarchy is arranged from left to right. The left
most license is the most limited license and the right most license is the most comprehensive
one.

License Hierarchy - Example 1

If you purchased license: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD and you need to output an MPEG-2
SD stream.
Due to license hierarchy (see Hierarchy of Licenses on page 247), you can use the FW-PRM-
9K- ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license to output an MPEG-2 SD stream.

License Hierarchy - Example 2

If you purchased license: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD and you need to output an MPEG-2
SD stream.
Due to license hierarchy (see Hierarchy of Licenses on page 247), you can use the FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license to output an MPEG-2 SD stream. However, if you also need to
transcode to HD MPEG-2 output, your purchased license is already occupied by the MPEG-2
SD stream. In this case, you can transcode to HD MPEG-2 output with a Grace type license.
The

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 246 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

device grants you with the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD license for a grace period of 45
days. During this time, you can purchase another license and install it as explained in the
following section License Allocation.

License Allocation
To use the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD, purchase the FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD license.
Once the latter is installed, licenses are re-allocated, and as a result FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-
OUT- HD is free for MPEFG-2 HD transcoding.

Hierarchy of Licenses
[001]:FW-PRM-9K-8VSB
FW-PRM-9K-8VSB -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM- 9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[002]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[003]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-9K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[004]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[005]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT- LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE- BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K- ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-
DD+-ST-
OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[006]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-
DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[007]:FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 247 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DWMIX-DD-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-

AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-
OUT

[008]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[009]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-
DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[010]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-MC -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[011]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUDLVL-ST -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB
-
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE- AUDLVL-MC

[012]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT- LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[013]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD
[013]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-
OUT-SD

[014]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 248 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

[015]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-SD-STI -> FW-PRM-9K-
SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-
9K- ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
MP2- OUT-HD

[016]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-HD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT -> FW-PRM-
9K- ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-
OUT-
SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[017]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-
ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[018]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-SD-STI -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT
-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO ->FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MP2-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-MP2-OUT-
SD -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DWCV-AVC-OUT-SD

[019]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-AUD-AAC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-ST-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-MC-
OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD-MC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-ST-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AUD-DD+-MC-OUT

[020]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[021]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-MW-MBR-OUT-HD

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 249 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

[022]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SD-AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-
LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-PIP-AVC-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
HD- AVC-PIP-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-SD ->
FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-AVC-OUT-HD

[023]: FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW
FW-PRM-9K-AES-CW -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW- PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[024]: FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-BISS-FIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
>
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[025]: FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1
FW-PRM-9K-DESAES-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW- PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP
->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[026]: FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-DESFIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
>
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[027]: FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE-
FW-PRM-9K-DEVICE-REDUNDANCY -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT-LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-
9K-ACE-BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[028]: FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1
FW-PRM-9K-DTMX-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[029]: FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW
FW-PRM-9K-DVB-CW -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 250 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

[031]: FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1
FW-PRM-9K-FEC-TS-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW- PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[032]: FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1
FW-PRM-9K-SCRFIX-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
>
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[033]: FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1
FW-PRM-9K-SCTE35-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[034]: FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1
FW-PRM-9K-SELC-EHP-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
>
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[035]: FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1
FW-PRM-9K-SELCSCR-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
>
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[036]: FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1
[036]: FW-PRM-9K-SLATE-SRV-1 -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-
FORMAT- LAB -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-
BACKUP -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[037]: SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT
SW-LIC-PRM-9K-DT -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -> FW-
PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-SPARE

[038]: FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-MW-LOGO -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[051] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-DPI-AVC-
HD

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 251 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Licenses
Parame- ters

[053] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-SD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT -> FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-
HD

[054] FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD
FW-PRM-9K-DPI-MP2-HD -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP ->
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[055] FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND
FW-PRM-9K-ACE-DPI-COND -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

[056] FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN
FW-PRM-9K-DVBSUB-BURN -> FW-PRM-9K-SUPPORT -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-LAB -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-DEMO -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ALL-> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-BACKUP -
> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-1K-SPARE -> FW-PRM-9K-ACE-ANY-FORMAT-OUT

License Status
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select Administration > Licensing.

3. Serial Number - view the unique number of licenses host, usually chassis serial
number.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 252 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Syslog Settings
Parame- ters

4. Grace period - indicates the grace period in days. When Grace period is expired, you are
asked to purchase permanent licenses..

Device full Grace period

Device Grace period has

expired

5. In the table, view the following:

 Feature Part Number - the part number of the license
 Description - a short description of the license. See Licenses on page 239.
 Installed - the total number of licenses per type installed on the device
 In Use - indicates the number of licenses per type that are currently being used
 Required - the number of licenses requested for current transcoding configuration
 Expiration - indicates the expiration date of the license. For none expired licenses,
Permanent appears.
Licenses may appear in the table in the following colors:

Table 12–4: Licenses and Colors

Color Explanation
Grayed out Licenses that are not installed or requested

Gray Licenses that are properly installed

Red Licenses in a grace period

Yellow Licenses that are not installed and use other licenses according to
licensing hierarchy

NOTE: In case of an internal licensing failure, a general failure message appears in the Licenses page.

Syslog Settings
ProStream 9000 can send data to a Syslog server for logging, monitoring and troubleshooting
purposes. The Syslog server presents the logged data in a user friendly interface that allows to
easily track device activity.
The syslog server is a computer that the Syslog Watcher application is installed on it.
For installation instructions, see Syslog Watcher documentation.
The following section describes and instructs you on how to configure the communication
between the device and the Syslog server.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 253 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Syslog Settings
Parame- ters

Syslog Configuration
To log device activity, enable the Syslog option and enter the Syslog server IP address
as instructed below.
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into ProStream 9000 on page
2. 11.
Select Administration > Remote Servers..

3. In IP Address, enter the IP address of the Syslog server.

4. In UDP Port, enter the port number over which the Splicer sends the messages and the
Syslog server sniffs. The default port is 514. If you change the port number, change it also
at the Syslog server.
To allow the Syslog server to sniff the port, configure the Firewall of the Syslog server to
open the Syslog port for sniffing.
5. To enable logging device activity, click Apply. In this version, splicing activities are logged.
In case you enable Syslog and there are communication problems between the splicer and
the Syslog server the alarm Syslog Server is Unreachable is raised.

Splicing Logging
Once you enable Syslog, you can retrieve the following data:
 Indications of the actual Splice activity - exchange of messages between Splicer and AD
server with indication of the sender:
 Init Request
 Init Response
 Cue Request
 Cue Response
 Splice
 Request
 Splice Response
 Splice Complete
 Response Abort Request
 Abort Response
 Keep Alive Request
 Information about the splicing activity
 PID Matching - Information about the relations between network PID and ad PID prior to
the splice event
 Switch Info - Information about the switching between the feeds related to the splice

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 254 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Device Redundancy
Parame- ters

event
The following picture shows the logged splicing activities as they are presented by the Syslog
server:

Details of the selected Selected logged activity Logged activity

logged activity

The Syslog server presents each activity with the following parameters:

Table 12–5: Syslog Server

Parameter Explanation
Received Time the message was logged

Severity Message severity

Time stamp Time the message was issued

Origin The device that sent the message

Message Message text. Each message

has an ID

Once you select a logged activity, you can view its details in a friendly and legible format at the
bottom section of the screen.

Device Redundancy
In order to ensure the continuous transmission of video/data streams, transmitting networks
employ various protection or redundancy options. Redundancy solutions are implemented where
high availability is required. Redundancy solutions provide various levels of assurance (power
supply versus device redundancy) and are application dependent.
This section discusses the redundancy solution in the stream processing realm that relates to
device redundancy of devices that work in standalone mode. This solution eliminates the need
for NMX management for achieving device redundancy. The redundancy mechanism is a 1:1
device redundancy and it protects from severe failures and provides a high level of assurance.
To allow redundancy, the system is organized as follows:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 255 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Device Redundancy
Parame- ters

 Primary device - one of the ProStream devices is defined as the Primary device. This is
the device that advertises the latest configuration.
 Backup device - one of the devices is defined as the Backup device. This is the device that
gets the most updated configuration from the primary device. Usually the backup device
polls the configuration of the primary device once redundancy is applied and during
operation to monitor for changes in the primary configuration. Once the backup device gets
the configuration it performs the following:
 Updates the configuration and apply it - when updating configuration, basic device
parameters are not updated. For example, device IP address and the assignment of
ports. You need to make sure that the configuration of the port assignment is identical
for the devices in the same group ID. See page 259.
 Device Connectivity - Primary and backup devices are connected via management, or CAS
or GbE ports.
 The connection over any of the ports should be multicast.
 On each device, in the same redundancy group, at least two of the ports eligible for
redundancy, should be assigned.
 On each device, in the same redundancy group, at least same two ports should be
assigned for redundancy.
 The connection is either directly or via a switch. The devices communicate via HHP
(Harmonic Heartbeat Protocol). The devices send to each other heartbeat messages at
an interval defined in milliseconds.
 Group ID (GID) - A network includes multiple Harmonic devices with same ID. To
differentiate between the devices, devices that are on the same redundancy system, are
associated to the same group. Currently, a redundancy system consists of two devices only,
a primary device and its backup device.
 Redundancy Types:
 Warm - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it but the backup
is in active, it does not broadcast
 Hot - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it and backup is
active, it broadcasts
 Redundancy Switch Types:
 Manual - Upon a Device Redundancy Trigger (DRT), only a manual redundancy
switch takes place. That is, you need to switch from primary to backup.
 Automatic - Upon a Device Redundancy Trigger (DRT), an automatic redundancy
switch takes place.

The following table lists the redundancy switch types and the state of the primary and backup
devices

Table 12–6: Redundancy Types and Redundancy Switch

Redundancy
Primary Backup - Warm Backup - Hot
Switch
Type
Manual Active In active Active

Automatic Active/In active* Active/In active* N/A

* Pending device state - always one device is active and the other is in active.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 256 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Device Redundancy
Parame- ters

List of DRTs (Device Redundancy Triggers)

When the following alarms are raised a redundancy switch takes place:
CPC HW Failure
Card Missing
Card
Mismatch
8VSB Card HW Failure
GbE Card HW Failure
Quad GbE Card HW
Failure ASI Input Signal
Loss

Configuring Device Redundancy

The following instructions refer to 1:1 device redundancy. You need to configure the redundancy
parameters for both the primary and for the backup device. The instructions refer to both, unless
else is indicated.
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into the Device on page 12.
2. Select Platform > Redundancy > General section.

3. Select Enable Redundancy.

NOTE: Once two devices are working in redundancy mode and you disable redundancy, the device starts
broadcasting as a standalone device.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 257 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Device Redundancy
Parame- ters

The tab is updated as the following picture shows:.

4. HHP Version - open the HHP Version list and select the required version:
 Version 1 - Applies to NMX device redundancy only.
 Version 2 - By default Version 2 is selected.
5. Redundancy Scheme - open the Redundancy Mode list and select either of the following:
 Automatic - the default option
 Manual - the redundancy switch is done by the user.
6. Device Role - open the Device Role list and select one of the following options:
 Primary - this device advertises the latest configuration.
The following options refer to a backup device:
 Warm Backup - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device and applies it but the
backup is in active, it does not broadcast.
 Hot Backup - Backup gets the configuration of the primary device, applies it and
broadcasts.
7 Group ID - enter the required Group ID number. Group ID should be the same for the primary
. and backup device.

NOTE: You should not move a device from a group when it is broadcasting and is connected to a
network.
8. Click Apply.
The redundant devices start communicate via the HHP protocol. The backup device obtains
the configuration of the primary device and during operations monitors for changes in the
configuration of the primary device.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 258 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Device Redundancy
Parame- ters

Re-Synchronization Button
The Resync button allows to obtain the configuration of the primary. Typically, the backup device
polls the primary configuration during operation to monitor for changes in the configuration. Use
this button in case a problem arises.

Viewing Redundancy Group Information

1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into ProStream 9000 on page
2. 11.
Select Platform > Redundancy > General
3.
section Focus on the Group Status section:.

4. View the following for all devices of the group:

Table 12–7: Redundancy Group Information

Parameter Explanation
# Sequential number

Device Mode Indicates whether Automatic or Manual.

Device Role Indicates whether primary /warm backup/hot backup

Status OK - device is up and running
Fail - device is faulty

IP The IP address of the device

Name The name of the device

Virtual Primary The group number of the virtual primary device.
Device

MAC The MAC address of the device

Configuration The exact time and date the last configuration synchronization
Sync. between the primary and backup took place. For future use.

State The actual state of the device:

Active
Inactive - Standby

Advanced Redundancy Configuration

The Advanced tab allows you to view and configure the GbE ports parameters. It is only for
advanced users.
1. Log into the device via the web client. See Logging into ProStream 9000 on page 11.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 259 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Configuring EAS Parameters
Parame- ters

2. Select Platform > Redundancy > General

3. section.

4. In Multicast, enter the multicast address that serves the redundancy. The multicast should
be
5. identical for the primary and the backup device.
6. In UDP port, select the required UDP port,

Table 12–8: GbE Ports Redundancy Information

Parameter Explanation
Slot # The slot number on which the GbE port is located.

Card Type Indicates whether CPCL card, or any of the available cards.

Port Indicates the following:

 GbE - port number
 Main - whether management or CAS
 All - refers to all card ports

HHP Messages If selected, the port communicates via an HHP protocol for
redundancy purposes.

NOTE: Configure at least two ports to communicate via HHP.

Configuring EAS Parameters

To configure the Emergency Alert System, do the following:
1. Select Platform > EAS.

2. Open the EAS Mode list and select one of the following:
 None - no EAS application

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 260 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Configuring EAS Parameters
Parame- ters

 GPI Converter - ProStream 9000 serves as the GPI converter that generates EAS
request.
 EAS Receiver - ProStream 9000 serves as the EAS receiver. Once you select EAS
Receiver, additional fields appear for configuring the EAS receiver and the input EAS
channel.
Configuring EAS Receiver
If EAS Receiver is selected, the following fields appear in the EAS tab:

1. In IP Address, enter the EAS receiver IP address.

2. In UDP Port, enter the UDP port to receive the EAS.
3. SSM (Source Specific Multicast) - Source Specific Multicast. This feature allows you to define
up to four different sources for the TS by entering the IP address of the upstream transmitting
devices. This feature is relevant only when working in GMPv3. To configure it select Enable
and enter the multicast IP address.
4. In Site ID, enter the site ID of the EAS receiver.
5. In Group ID, enter the group ID of the EAS receiver.
6. Click Active AES, to activate ProStream 9000 as AES receiver.
7. To add an EAS channel, click Add.
8. Open the Source TS and select the required TS. This list is populated with TSs with
EAS services.
9. In Program, enter the required service ID, that is an EAS service.
10. In Name, enter the required service name for this EAS service.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 261 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform Configuring EAS Parameters
Parame- ters

NOTE: See also Configuring EAS Parameters on page 260.

Configuring GPI Converter

If GPI Converter is selected, the following fields appear in the EAS tab:

1. Open the GPI Control list and select either Manual or Automatic. The control can be:
 Automatic - a corresponding command is sent according to the IRD signal.
 Manual - the user is required to send the command manually
2. Open the Command list and select one of the following:
 None - no EAS activation command
 Activate - EAS activation command is enabled and the GPI is ready to send it to the EAS
receiver
 Deactivate - EAS de-activation command is enabled and the GPI does not send it to the
EAS receiver
3. In IP Address, enter the IP address for sending and receiving EAS commands.
4. In UDP port, selec the UDP port number for sending and receiving EAS commands.
5. SSM (Source Specific Multicast) - Source Specific Multicast. This feature allows you to define
up to four different sources for the TS by entering the IP address of the upstream transmitting
devices. This feature is relevant only when working in GMPv3. To configure it select Enable
and enter the multicast IP address.
6. In Site ID, enter the site ID of the EAS receiver.
7. In Group ID, enter the group ID of the EAS receiver.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 262 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)
Parame- ters

ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)

The Event Signaling and Management feature is a blackout solution for linear channels. It is
based on the ESAM (SMI and MMI) interface that is used for ad insertion and blackout on the
multiscreen platform. The ESAM system includes the following:
BMS (Blackout Management System). The BMS receives blackout information from the
content providers. The BMS has the following information:
 Blackout schedule for each program and blackout zone
 Database of all the Virtual IRDs (VIRD)
 Database of all the possible alternative feeds
The BMS communicates with the LSS and LSP over ESAM
LSP - (Linear Stream Processor). The LSP is the Harmonic ProStream located in the
Central Headend. The LSP supports synchronous (from incoming SCTE35-2012) and
asynchronous signaling (from the BMS), and based on these signaling, it generates
SCTE35-2012 for each program that is streaming to the IP Network. The protocol between
BMS to the LSP is the standard ESAM-SMI
LSS - (Linear Stream Switcher). The LSS is the Harmonic ProStream located at the edge of the
network and is responsible for switching to and from alternative feed, based on BMS commands.
The LSS can manage multiple blackout zones for each input program, meaning, multiple VIRDs
for each input program. The LSS has a database of all the VIRDs. The LSS communicates with
the BMS over ESAM. The LSS support up to 400 VIRDs.
VIRD (Virtual IRD). It represents a single program at the output of the LSS, for a specific
blackout zone, and it replaces a physical IRD that is feeding today the legacy QAM plant.
To configure a program with ESAM, see Event Signaling and Management (ESAM) Feature on page
89.
Configuring General ESAM Parameters
1. Log into the device as explained in Logging into the Device on page
2. 12.
Select Platform > ESAM:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 263 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)
Parame- ters

3. To configure the Acquisition Point Identifier, focus on this section:

NOTE: Configure the following steps (4 - 6) before LSS/LSP

configuration.

4. Generate Automatic Concatenation - Applies to LSS only. Select to add a string

concatenation to the API (Acquisition Point Identifier) of the program.
5. String Concatenation - Enter the string concatenation.
6. Concatenate Device Name to API - If selected, device name is added to the string
concatenation. This option applies to LSP only.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 264 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Chapter 12 Administration and Platform ESAM (Event Singnaling and Management)
Parame- ters

7. To configure the ESAM servers, focus on the ESAM Server

section:

8. Click New to add a blank line to the table.

9. Name - enter the name of the ESAM server.
10. IP Address - enter the IP address of the server.
11. TCP Port - select the port over which the ESAM server listens to messages.
12. URI - enter the type of notification event, like blackout.
13. To engage Emergency Switch, focus on the Emergency Switch section
 Automatic Switch to Primary on ESAM Failure - when selected, upon communication
failure, automatically switches the LSS services to the primary LSS services.
 Emergency switch to main - manually switches from an alternate service to a primary
service.

NOTE: The Emergency switch to main button can also be found at Configuration>Logical
Outputs>Programs>Program x: Properties> ESAM

NOTE: If the service is already defined as Main, pressing Emergency switch to main will have no effect.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 265 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Chapter 13
Backing Up & Restoring Device
Configuration
Overview
You can save the ProStream configuration and upload it to your device or any other ProStream
unit when required. Downloading and uploading the configuration enables the following:
 backup configuration
 To upload the configuration to another device
 To upload various settings to the device.

Backing Up the Configuration

When downloading the ProStream configuration it is saved it as an.XML file. The .XML file
includes all the configuration beside the IP address, Subnet mask and default gateway of
ETH1 port.
Backup the current configuration to a file . The default location of the xml file is the Downloads
folder and the default name is Platform. You can change the name and save it to your defined
location on the device hard disk.
 To backup configuration
1. Log into the device.
2. Select Platform > Backup/Restore.
3. Focus on the Backup Device Configuration to a File section::

4. To backup, click Backup.

The file is created in the default location with a default name, Downloads > Platform.xml

Restoring Configuration from a File

When restoring configuration, the uploaded configuration is loaded to the device and the
previous configuration is removed.

NOTE: It is recommended to backup the current configuration before restoring as restoring overwrites
the
current configuration
 To restore configuration
1. Log into the device.
2. Select Platform >
Backup/Restore.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 266 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 3. Focus on the Restore Configuration from a File section::

1. To locate the required configuration, click Browse.

2. Browse to the configuration file of your choice and click Open.
The file name appears in the Select File box.
3. To restore, click Restore.
The previous configuration is removed and the new one is uploaded.

NOTE: The uploaded configuration does not include the IP address, Subnet Mask and default gateway of
ETH1.

Restoring Default Configuration

1. Log into the device.
2. Select Platform > Backup/Restore.
3. Focus on the Restore to default Configuration section::

4. Click Restore.
The previous configuration is removed and the device boots up with the default configuration.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 267 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Appendix A
Contacting the Technical Assistance
Center
Harmonic Global Service and Support has many Technical Assistance Centers (TAC) located
globally, but virtually co-located where our customers can obtain technical assistance or request
on-site visits from the Regional Field Service Management team. The TAC operates a Follow-The-
Sun support model to provide Global Technical Support anytime, anywhere, through a single
case management and virtual telephone system. Depending on time of day, anywhere in the
world, we will receive and address your calls or emails in one of our global support centers. The
Follow-the- Sun model greatly benefits our customers by providing continuous problem resolution
and escalation of issues around the clock.

Report an issue online at:

http://harmonicinc.com/webform/report-issue-online

Table A–1: Technical Support Phone Numbers and Email

Addresses
Region Telephone Technical Support Email
Americas 888.673.4896 (888.MPEG.TWO) support@harmonicinc.com
or +1.408.490.6477

Europe, Middle East, +44.1252.555.450 emeasupport@harmonicinc.com

and Africa (EMEA)

India +91.120.498.3199 apacsupport@harmonicinc.com

Russia +7.495.926.4608 rusupport@harmonicinc.com
Mainland China +86.10.6569.5580 chinasupport@harmonicinc.com
Japan +81.3.5565.6737 japansupport@harmonicinc.com
Asia Pacific – Other +852.3184.0045 apacsupport@harmonicinc.com
Territories or 65.6542.0050

The Harmonic Inc. support website is:

http://www.harmonicinc.com/content/technical-support

The Harmonic Inc. software downloads sites

are:
Distribution and Delivery Software ftp://ftp.harmonicinc.com
Production and Playout Software ftp://ftp.Omneon.com//Updates/Omneon/Current/
Software for Select Electra Encoders https://harmonic.force.com/SWAccess/SWDownloadLogin

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 268 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix A Contacting the Technical Assistance
Center

The Harmonic Inc. corporate address is:

Harmonic Inc.
4300 North First St.
San Jose, CA 95134, U.S.A.
Attn: Customer Support

The corporate telephone numbers for Harmonic Inc. are:

Tel. 1.800.788.1330 (inside the U.S.)
Tel. +1.408.542.2500 (outside the U.S.)
Fax.+1.408.542.2511

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 269 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Appendix B
Safety and Regulatory Compliance Information

Legal Disclaimer: Information in this document is provided in connection with Harmonic

products. Unless otherwise agreed in writing Harmonic products are not designed nor intended
for any application in which the failure of the product could cause personal injury or death.

NOTE: The information in this appendix may apply to purchased products only.

Important Safety Instructions

This section provides important safety guidelines for operators and service personnel. Specific
warnings and cautions are found throughout the guide where they apply, but may not appear
here. Please read and follow the important safety information, noting especially those
instructions related to risk of fire, electric shock or injury to persons. You must adhere to the
guidelines in this document to ensure and maintain compliance with existing product
certifications and approvals. In this document, we use “product,” “equipment,” and “unit”
interchangeably.
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy. It may cause harmful
interference to radio communications if it is not installed and used in accordance with the
instructions in this manual. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause
harmful interference If this occurs, the user will be required to correct the interference at his or
her own expense.
In event of conflict between the information in this document and information provided with the
product or on our website for a particular product, this product documentation takes precedence.

Safety Symbols & Translated Safety, Warning & Caution Instructions

(English)
To avoid personal injury or property damage, before you begin installing or replacing the product,
read, observe, and adhere to all the following safety instructions and information. Harmonic
products and/or product packaging may be marked with the safety symbols used throughout this
document, when it is necessary to alert operators, users, and service providers to pertinent safety
instructions in the manuals.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 270 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Safety Symbols & Translated Safety, Warning & Caution Instructions
Information (English)

Mark Notes
Installing or Replacing the Product Unit Warning
 Only trained and qualified service personnel should be allowed to install,
replace, or service this unit (refer AS/NZS 3260 Clause 1.2.14.3 Service
Personnel).
 Read the installation instructions before connecting the system to the
power source.
 When installing or replacing the unit, always make the ground connection
Warning
first and disconnect it last.
 Installation of the unit must comply with local and national electrical
codes.
 This unit is intended for installation in restricted access areas. A restricted
access area can be accessed only through the use of special tool, lock
and key or other means of security.
 Use only specified replacement parts.
 Do not use this unit in or near water. Disconnect all AC power before
installing any options or servicing the unit unless instructed to do so by
this manual.

Rack Mount Warning

 To prevent bodily injury when mounting or servicing this unit in a rack,
special precautions must be taken to ensure your safety and stability of
system:
 Conform to local occupational health and safety requirements when
moving and lifting the equipment.
 Ensure that mounting of the unit by mechanical loading tools should not
Warning
induce hazardous conditions.
 To avoid risk of potential electric shock, a proper safety ground must be
implemented for the rack and each piece of equipment installed on it.

Chassis Warning
 Before connecting or disconnecting ground or power wires to the chassis,
ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit.
 To prevent personal injury or damage to the chassis, lift the unit only by
using handles that are an integral part of the chassis, or by holding the
chassis underneath its lower edge.
 Any instructions in this guide that require opening the chassis or
Warning
removing a board should be performed by qualified service personnel
only.
 Slots and openings in the chassis are provided for ventilation. Do not
block them. Leave the back of the frame clear for air exhaust cooling and
to allow room for cabling - a minimum of 6 inches (15.24 cm) of
clearance is recommended.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 271 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Safety Symbols & Translated Safety, Warning & Caution Instructions
Information (English)

Mark Notes
Electric Shock Warning
 This unit might have more than one power cord. To reduce the risk of
electric shock, disconnect the two power supply cords before servicing
the unit.
 Before working on a chassis or working near power supplies, unplug the
power cord on AC units.
 Do not work on the system or connect or disconnect cables during
Warning
periods of lightning activity.
 This unit is grounded through the power cord grounding conductor. To
avoid electric shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle
before connecting the product input or outputs.
 Route power cords and other cables so that they are not likely to be
damaged. Disconnect power input to unit before cleaning. Do not use
liquid or aerosol cleaners; use only a damp cloth to clean chassis.
 Dangerous voltages exist at several points in this product. To avoid
personal injury, do not touch exposed connections and components
while power is on. Do not insert anything into either of the system's two
power supply cavities with power connected
 Never install an AC power module and a DC power module in the same
chassis.
 Do not wear hand jewelry or watch when troubleshooting high current
circuits, such as the power supplies.
 To avoid fire hazard, use only the specified correct type voltage and
current ratings as referenced in the appropriate parts list for this unit.
Always refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel.
 This unit relies on the building's installation for short-circuit (overcurrent)
protection. Ensure that a fuse or circuit breaker no larger than 120
VAC, 15A U.S. (240 VAC, 10A international) is used on the phase
conductors (all current-carrying conductors).
 To avoid electrocution ensure that the rack has been correctly grounded
before switching on the unit. When removing the unit remove the
grounding connection only after the unit is switched off and unplugged.

Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) Caution

 Follow static precaution at all times when handling this unit.
 Always wear an ESD-preventive wrist or ankle strap when handling
electronic components. Connect one end of the strap to an ESD jack or
an unpainted metal component on the system
 Handle cards by the faceplates and edges only; avoid touching the
Caution printed circuit board and connector pins.
 Place any removed component on an antistatic surface or in a static
shielding bag.
 Avoid contact between the cards and clothing.
 Periodically check the resistance value of the antistatic strap.
Recommended value is between 1 and 10 mega-ohms (Mohms).

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 272 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Symboles de sécurité et traduits de sécurité, d'avertissement et Attention Instructions
Information (français)

Mark Notes
Laser Radiation Warning
Invisible laser radiation may be emitted from disconnected fibers or
connectors. Do not stare into beams or view directly with optical instruments.
Never operate a unit with a broken fibre or with a separated fiber connector.

Warning
Lithium Battery Handling Safety Instructions
 CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY: Some lithium batteries may
contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided:
"Perchlorate Material - special handling may apply, see:
www.dtsc.ca.gov/ hazardous waste/perchlorate/ for information".

Warning
 Risk of explosion if battery is replaced incorrectly or with an incorrect type
 Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
 There are no user-serviceable batteries inside Harmonic products. Refer
to Harmonic qualified personnel only to service the replaceable batteries

Caution

Symboles de sécurité et traduits de sécurité, d'avertissement et

Attention Instructions (français)
Pour éviter des blessures ou des dommages matériels, avant de commencer l'installation ou
le remplacement du produit, lire, observer, et de respecter toutes les instructions et
informations de sécurité suivantes. Produits harmoniques et / ou l'emballage du produit
peuvent être marqués avec les symboles de sécurité utilisés dans le présent document,
lorsque cela est nécessaire pour alerter les opérateurs, les utilisateurs et les fournisseurs
de services de consignes de sécurité pertinentes dans les manuels.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 273 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Symboles de sécurité et traduits de sécurité, d'avertissement et Attention Instructions
Information (français)

Mark Notes
Installation ou remplacement de l'unité de produit Avertissement
 Il est vivement recommandé de confier l'installation, le remplacement
et la maintenance de ces équipements à des personnels qualifiés et
expérimentés. (voir AS / NZS 3260 article 1.2.14.3 du personnel de
service).
 Avant de brancher le système sur la source d'alimentation, consulter les
directives d'installation.
Avertissement
 Lors de l'installation ou le remplacement de l'appareil, la mise à la terre
doit toujours être connectée en premier et déconnectée en dernier.
 L'équipement doit être installé conformément aux normes électriques
nationales et locales.
 Cet appareil est à installer dans des zones d'accès réservé. Ces
dernières sont des zones auxquelles seul le personnel de service peut
accéder en utilisant un outil spécial, un mécanisme de verrouillage et
une clé, ou tout autre moyen de sécurité.
 Utilisez uniquement des pièces de rechange spécifiées.
 Ne pas utiliser ce produit dans l'eau ni à proximité de l'eau. Débrancher
toutes les prises d'alimentation secteur avant d'installer des options ou
d'effectuer l'entretien de l'unité, à moins d'instructions contraires dans le
présent manuel.

Rack Monture Avertissement

Pour éviter les blessures corporelles lors du montage ou l'entretien de cet
appareil dans un rack, des précautions particulières doivent être prises pour
assurer votre sécurité et la stabilité du système:
 Conformez-vous aux exigences de médecine du travail et de sécurité
lorsque vous déplacez et soulevez le matériel.
 Assurez-vous que le montage de l'appareil par des outils de chargement
Avertissement
mécaniques ne doit pas induire des conditions dangereuses.
 Pour éviter tout risque d'électrocution, le rack et chaque élément de
l'équipement installé dans le rack doivent être correctement reliés à la
terre.

Châssis Avertissement
 Avant de connecter ou de déconnecter les câbles d'alimentation (pôles et
terre) du châssis, vérifiez que le circuit de courant continu est hors
tension.
 Pour éviter toute blessure ou des dommages au châssis, soulevez l'unité
uniquement par les poignées du châssis lui-même ou en portant celui-ci
par le bord inférieur.
Avertissement
 Toutes les opérations du présent guide nécessitant l'ouverture du
châssis ou le retrait d'une carte doivent être uniquement effectuées par
du personnel d'entretien qualifié.
 Le châssis est muni de fentes et d'ouvertures d'aération. Ne pas les
bloquer. Dégager l'arrière du cadre pour permettre le refroidissement de
l'évacuation d'air et laisser de la place au câblage; un dégagement d'au
moins 15.24 cm (6 po) est recommandé.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 274 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Symboles de sécurité et traduits de sécurité, d'avertissement et Attention Instructions
Information (français)

Mark Notes
Choc électrique Avertissement
 Il est possible que cette unité soit munie de plusieurs cordons
d'alimentation. Pour éviter les risques d'électrocution, débrancher les
deux cordons d'alimentation avant de réparer l'unité.
 Avant de travailler sur un châssis ou à proximité d'une alimentation
électrique, débrancher le cordon d'alimentation des unités en courant
alternatif.
Avertissement
 Ne pas travailler sur le système ni brancher ou débrancher les câbles
pendant un orage.
 Ce unité est mis à la terre par le conducteur de protection intégré au
cordon d'alimentation. Pour éviter les chocs électriques, brancher le
cordon d'alimentation dans une prise correctement cable avant de
raccorder les entrées ou sorties du unité.
 Installer les cordons d'alimentation et autres cables de sorte qu'ils ne
risquent pas d'être endommagés. Couper l'alimentation avant
nettoyage. Ne pas utilizer de nettoyant liquide ou en aérosol; utiliser
seulement un linge humide.
 Des courants électriques dangereux circulent dans cet appareil. Afin
d'éviter les lessures, ne pas toucher les connexions et composants
exposés lorsque l'appareil est sous tension. Ne rien insérer dans l'une ou
l'autre des cavités des prises de courant du système lorsque l'appareil
est sous tension.
 N'installez jamais un module d'alimentation AC et un module
d'alimentation DC dans le même châssis.
 Ne pas porter de bijoux aux mains ni de montre durant le dépannage des
circuits à haute tension, comme les transformateurs.
 Pour prévenir les risques d'incendie, n'utiliser que le type, la tension et le
courant nominal spécifiés dans la nomenclature des pièces de ce unité.
Toujours confier le remplacement des fusibles à du personnel d'entretien
qualifié.
 Pour ce qui est de la protection contre les courts-circuits (surtension), ce
produit dépend de l'installation électrique du local. Vérifier qu'un fusible
ou qu'un disjoncteur de 120 V alt., 15 A U.S. maximum (240 V alt., 10 A
international) est utilisé sur les conducteurs de phase (conducteurs de
charge).
 Pour éviter l'électrocution, assurez-vous que le rack a bien été mis à la
terre avant de mettre l'unité en marche. Lors du retrait de l'unité, retirer le
raccordement de terre seulement après avoir mis l'unité à l'arrêt et l'avoir
débranchée.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 275 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Sicherheit Symbole und übersetzt Sicherheit, Achtung & Vorsicht Anleitung (Deutsch)
Information

Mark Notes
Les décharges électrostatiques (ESD) Attention
 Respecter systématiquement les precautions relatives aux
charges électrostatiques durant la manipulation de cet unité.
 Portez toujours un poignet ou la cheville bracelet antistatique préventive
lors de la manipulation des composants électroniques. Branchez une
extrémité de la sangle à une prise ESD ou d'un composant métallique
non peinte sur le système.
Attention
 Manipulez les cartes en les faces avant et les bords seulement; éviter de
toucher la carte de circuit imprimé et les broches du connecteur.
 Placer un composant retiré sur une surface antistatique ou dans un sac
de protection statique.
 Éviter tout contact entre les cartes et les vêtements.
 Vérifier périodiquement la valeur de résistance de la sangle antistatique.
Valeur recommandée est comprise entre 1 et 10 méga-ohms (Mohms).

Rayonnement laser Attention

 Rayonnement laser invisible peut être émis à partir de fibres ou les
connecteurs débranchés. Ne pas regarder en faisceaux ou regarder
directement avec des instruments optiques. Ne jamais faire fonctionner
une unité en cas de bris d'une fibre ou de séparation d'un connecteur de
fibre.
Avertissement
Batterie au lithium Manipulation instructions de sécurité
 Perchlorate pour la Californie Consultatif: Certaines batteries au lithium,
peuvent contenir du perchlorate. le texte qui suit consultatif est prévu:
"Présence de perchlorate - une manipulation spéciale peut s'appliquer,
voir: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous waste/perchlorate/ for information".

Avertissement
 Il y a danger d'explosion si la batterie est remplacée de manière
incorrecte ou par une batterie de type incorrect.
 Mettre au rebut les batteries usagees conformement aux instructions du
fabricant.
 Les batteries des produits Harmonic ne peuvent pas être réparées ni
entretenues par l'utilisateur. Ne confier l'entretien des batteries
remplaçables qu'à du personnel compétent de Harmonic.
Attention

Sicherheit Symbole und übersetzt Sicherheit, Achtung & Vorsicht

Anleitung (Deutsch)
Um Verletzungen oder Sachschäden zu vermeiden, bevor Sie mit der Installation oder
Austausch des Produkts zu beginnen, zu lesen, zu beobachten, und sich an all den folgenden
Sicherheitshinweise und Informationen. Harmonic Produkte und / oder Produktverpackungen
können mit den Sicherheitssymbole in diesem Dokument verwendet werden, markiert, wenn es
notwendig ist für die Betreiber, Anwender und Dienstleister, um relevante
Sicherheitsanweisungen in den Handbüchern zu alarmieren.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 276 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Sicherheit Symbole und übersetzt Sicherheit, Achtung & Vorsicht Anleitung (Deutsch)
Information

Mark Notes
Installation oder den Austausch des Produkts Einheit Warnung
 Das Installieren, Ersetzen oder Bedienen dieser Ausrüstung sollte nur
geschultem, qualifiziertem Personal gestattet warden (siehe AS / NZS
3260 Clause 1.2.14.3 Servicepersonal)
 Lesen Sie die Installationsanweisungen, bevor Sie das System an
die Stromquelle anschließen.
 Der Erdanschluß muß bei der Installation der Einheit immer zuerst
Warnung
hergestellt und zuletzt abgetrennt werden.
 Die Installation der Geräte muss den Sicherheitsstandards entsprechen.
 Diese Einheit ist zur Installation in Bereichen mit beschränktem Zutritt
vorgesehen. Ein Bereich mit beschränktem Zutritt ist ein Bereich, zu dem
nur Wartungspersonal mit einem Spezialwerkzeugs, Schloß und
Schlüssel oder anderer Sicherheitsvorkehrungen Zugang.
 Verwenden Sie nur die angegebenen Ersatzteile
 Das Gerät in oder in der Nähe von Wasser verwenden. Trennen Sie vor
der Installation von Optionen oder Wartung des Gerätes, es sei denn,
dies wurde von diesem Handbuch alle Netz.

Rack-Montage-Warnung
Zur Vermeidung von Körperverletzung beim Anbringen oder Warten dieser
Einheit in einem Gestell müssen Sie besondere Vorkehrungen treffen, um
sicherzustellen, daß das System stabil bleibt:
 Entsprechen den lokalen Arbeitsschutzanforderungen beim Bewegen und
Heben der Ausrüstung.
 Stellen Sie sicher, dass die Montage des Gerätes durch
Warnung
mechanische Belastung Werkzeuge sollten nicht gefährlichen
Bedingungen zu induzieren.
 Um das Risiko von möglichen elektrischen Schlag zu vermeiden, muss
mit einer angemessenen Erdung für Rack und jedes Gerät installiert ist
implementiert werden.

Chassis Warnung
 Gleichstrom-Unterbrechung Bevor Sie Erdungs- oder Stromkabel an das
Chassis anschließen oder von ihm abtrennen, ist sicherzustellen, daß der
Gleichstrom-Stromkreis unterbrochen ist.
 Um Verletzungen und Beschädigung des Chassis zu vermeiden,
sollten Sie das Chassis nicht an den Henkeln auf den Elementen (wie
z.B. Stromanschlüsse, Kühlungen oder Karten) heben oder kippen;
Warnung
oder indem Sie es unterhalb der Unterkante packen.
 Alle Hinweise in diesem Handbuch, die das Öffnen benötigen Sie das
Gehäuse oder das Entfernen eines Board sollte nur von qualifiziertem
Fachpersonal durchgeführt werden.
 Für Schlitze und Öffnungen im Chassis vorgesehen. Blockieren Sie sie
nicht. Lassen Sie die Rückseite des Rahmens frei für Abluftkühlung
und um Platz für die Verkabelung ermöglichen - ein Minimum von 6
Zoll (15,24 cm) Abstand wird empfohlen

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 277 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Sicherheit Symbole und übersetzt Sicherheit, Achtung & Vorsicht Anleitung (Deutsch)
Information

Mark Notes
Elektroschock-Warnung
 Diese Einheit hat möglicherweise mehr als ein Netzkabel. Zur
Verringerung der Stromschlaggefahr trennen Sie beide Netzgerätekabel
ab, bevor Sie die Einheit warten.
 Vor der Arbeit an einem Chassis für Arbeiten in der Nähe
Stromversorgung, ziehen Sie das Netzkabel mit Netzeinheiten.
 Arbeiten Sie nicht am System und schließen Sie keine Kabel an
Warnung
bzw. trennen Sie keine ab, wenn es gewittert.
 Dieses Gerät ist über das Netzkabel Erdungsleiter geerdet. Um einen
Stromschlag zu vermeiden, stecken Sie das Netzkabel in eine
Steckdose richtig verdrahtet, bevor Sie das Produkt Eingang oder
Ausgänge.
 Verlegen Sie Netzkabel und andere Kabel, so dass sie wahrscheinlich
nicht beschädigt werden. Trennen Eingangsleistung Einheit vor der
Reinigung. Verwenden Sie keine flüssigen oder Aerosolreiniger; nur mit
einem feuchten Tuch zu reinigen Chassis.
 Gefährliche Spannungen vorhanden sind an mehreren Stellen in diesem
Produkt. Um Verletzungen zu vermeiden, berühren Sie nicht freiliegenden
Anschlüsse und Komponenten während schaltet ist. Sie keine
Gegenstände in einem der beiden Stromversorgungs Hohlräume des
Systems mit Strom verbunden einführen.
 Ein Wechelstromsmodul und ein Gleichstrommodul dürfen niemals in
demselben Chassis installiert werden.
 Tragen Sie keine Hand Schmuck oder schauen Sie bei der
Fehlersuche hohen Stromkreise, wie beispielsweise die
Stromversorgung.
 Um die Brandgefahr zu vermeiden, verwenden Sie nur den genannten
richtige Art von Spannung und Strom Ratings als in der entsprechenden
Stückliste für diese Einheit verwiesen. Beziehen sich immer auf
Austausch der Sicherung von qualifiziertem Fachpersonal.
 Dieses Produkt ist darauf angewiesen, daß im Gebäude ein Kurzschluß-
bzw. Überstromschutz installiert ist. Stellen Sie sicher, daß eine
Sicherung oder ein Unterbrecher von nicht mehr als 240 V
Wechselstrom, 10 A (bzw. in den USA 120 V Wechselstrom, 15 A) an
den Phasenleitern (allen stromführenden Leitern) verwendet wird.
 Um einen Stromschlag zu vermeiden, sicherzustellen, dass die
Zahnstange wurde korrekt vor dem Einschalten des Gerätes geerdet.
Beim Entfernen der Einheit entfernen Sie die Masseverbindung nur,

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 278 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Site Preparation Instructions
Information

Mark Notes
Elektrostatische Entladung (ESD) Vorsicht
 Folgen Sie statische vorsorglich zu jeder Zeit beim Umgang mit diesem
Gerät.
 Tragen Sie immer einen ESD-präventive Handgelenk oder Knöchel-
Riemen beim Umgang mit elektronischen Komponenten. Schließen Sie
ein Ende des Bandes an einem ESD-Buchse oder ein unlackiertes
Metallteil auf dem System.
Vorsich
 Hand Karten nur durch die Faceplates und Kanten; Berühren Sie
die bedruckte Leiterplatte und Steckerstifte.
 Legen Sie alle entfernten Komponenten auf eine antistatische Oberfläche
oder in einem Statik-Beutel.
 Kontakt zwischen den Karten und Kleidung vermeiden.
 Den Widerstandswert der gegen statische Gurt in regelmäßigen
Abständen überprüfen. Empfohlener Wert ist zwischen 1 und 10 Mega-
Ohm (MOhm).

Laserstrahlungen Warnung.
Unsichtbare Laserstrahlung kann von getrennten Fasern oder Stecker
emittiert werden. Nicht in die Strahlen blicken oder direkt mit optischen
Instrumenten. Niemals ein Gerät mit einem gebrochenen Faser oder mit
einem Glasfaseranschluss getrennt.

Warnung
Lithium-Batterie Handhabung Sicherheitshinweise
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY: Einige Lithium-Batterien kann
Perchlorat enthalten. Die folgende Beratungs gesetzt: "Perchlorat -
Sonderbehandlung kann erforderlich sein, finden Sie unter: www.dtsc.ca.gov/
hazardous waste/perchlorate/ for information".

Warnung
 Bei Einsetzen einer falschen Batterie besteht Explosionsgefahr
 Entsorgen Sie die benutzten Batterien nach den Anweisungen des
Herstellers.
 Es gibt keine zu wartenden Akkus im Harmonic Produkte. Siehe
Harmonic qualifiziertes Personal, um die austauschbare Batterien
Service
Vorsich

Site Preparation Instructions

NOTE: Only trained and qualified service personnel (as defined in IEC 60950 and AS/NZS 3260) should install,
replace, or service the equipment. Install the system in accordance with the U.S. National Electric Code if you are
in the United States.

1. Preparing & Choosing a Site for Installation

 To ensure normal system operation, plan your site configuration and prepare the site
before installation.
 Install the unit in a restricted access area.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 279 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Site Preparation Instructions
Information

 Choose a site with a dry, clean, well-ventilated and air-conditioned area.

Choose a site that maintains an ambient temperature of 32 to 104oF (0 to 40oC)
2. Creating a Safe Environment
 Connect AC-powered systems to grounded power outlets or as per local regulations.
 Do not move or ship equipment unless it is correctly packed in its original wrapping and
shipping containers.
 Only allow Harmonic trained personnel to undertake equipment service and
maintenance. Do not permit unqualified personnel to operate the unit.
 Wear ear protection when working near an NSG Pro platform for a longer period of time.
3. Rack Mounting the Unit
 Install the system in an open rack whenever possible. If installation in an enclosed rack
is unavoidable, ensure that the rack has adequate ventilation.
 Reliable earthing of rack-mounted equipment should be maintained. Particular attention
should be given to supply connections other than direct connections to the branch circuit
(e.g. use of power strips). This unit should be mounted at the bottom of the rack if it is
the only unit in the rack.
 When mounting this unit in the partially filled rack, load the rack from the bottom to the
top with the heaviest component at the bottom of the rack.
 If the rack is provided with stabilizing devices, install the stabilizers before mounting or
servicing the unit in the rack.
 The rack must be anchored to an immovable support to prevent it from tipping when the
unit is mounted on it. The rack must be installed accoring to the rack maufacturer’s
instructions.
 Disconnect all power and external cables before lifting the unit. Depending on the weight
of the unit, more than one person might be required to lift it.
4. Power Considerations
a. AC Power
 Adding to the system a UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply) and an AVR
(Automated Voltage Regulator) is highly recommended.
 Installing the main power supply by a qualified electrician, according to power
authority regulations. Make sure all powering are wired with an earth leakage,
according to local regulations.
 It is recommended to install the encoder within 1.5m (approximately 5 feet) from an
easily accessible grounded AC outlet.
 When the encoder is rack-mounted, ensure that the rack is correctly grounded.
b. DC Power
 Ensure a suitable overcurrent device is in-line between the equipment and the power
source.
 Connect DC-input power supplies only to a DC power source that complies with the
safety extra-low voltage (SELV) requirements in the UL60950-1, CAN/CSA-C22.2
No. 60950-1-03, AS/NZS 60950-1, EN/IEC 60825-1, 21 CFR 1040, EN 60950-1,
and IEC 60950-1 standards.
 Ensure that power is removed from the DC circuit before installing or removing
power supplies
5. Handling Fiber Channel Cables
 Always read and comply with the handling instructions on the shipping container.
 Follow all ESD precautions and approved fiber cleaning procedures.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 280 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product End-of-Life Disassembly Instructions
Information

 The fiber is made of a very pure, expensive glass and should be treated with great care.
Handle fibers only in areas that are very clean and do not contain sharp objects.
 Wear finger cots or gloves as dirt and oils can damage the fiber and contaminate
connectors.
 Do not allow kinks or knots to develop in the fiber. If tangles occur, carefully work out the
tangles avoiding pulling or bending the fibre beyond its bend radius.
 Always use the correct tools for stripping and cleaving the fiber. It will save time and
reduce breakage caused by scratches.
 If you must secure a bundle of fiber cables together, avoid plastic and metal tie wraps;
secure with velcro instead.
6. Disposing of the Unit
 Dispose of the unit and its components (including batteries) as specified by all national
laws and regulations.

Product End-of-Life Disassembly Instructions

For disassembly instructions, please call the technical support in order to remove components
requiring selective treatment, as defined by the EU WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU). See
Contacting the Technical Assistance Center.

Product Disassembly Process

1. Disassemble equipment at a dedicated area only, gather the needed tools for disassembly.
2. Remove covers, housing, etc.
3. Remove and separate sub-assemblies (i.e. cables, metals, displays, fans,
4. etc.). Separate hazardous materials from the remainder of the material.
a. Sort hazardous materials into their different types (i.e., batteries, hazardous
liquids, hazardous solids, fiberglass, etc.).
b. Proceed with hazardous waste management processes only.
5. Identify re-usable materials/sub-assemblies and separate these from the rest of the material.
6. Identify and separate recyclable materials as per below examples:
a. Scrap material to be sent to smelter(s).
b. E-waste such as displays, CPU's, cables and wires, hard drives, keyboards,
c. etc. Metals such as steel, brass, and aluminum.
d. Plastics such as fan casings, housings, covers, etc.
e. Fiber optics and plastic tubing not containing electrical or data wiring.

Safety Rules (English)

Recycler personnel are to wear personal protective equipment including proper eye protection,
proper hand protection, and proper breathing protection if needed.
Recycler personnel shall be experienced with using the proper tools required for disassembling
equipment. Untrained personnel shall not disassemble Harmonic products. Unfamiliarity with
tools can cause damage and injury.

Règles de sécurité (French)

Le personnel du recycleur doit porter de l'équipement de protection individuelle, y compris des
lunettes, des gants et un masque de protection appropriés au besoin.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 281 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance EU Manufacturer’s Declaration of
Information Conformity

Le personnel du recycleur doit avoir de l'expérience des outils de démontage de l'appareil. Les
produits Harmonic ne doivent pas être démontés par du personnel non qualifié. Une mauvaise
connaissance des outils peut causer des dommages et des blessures.

EU Manufacturer’s Declaration of Conformity

This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other provisions of
Directives 73/23/EEC and 89/336/EEC as amended by Directive 93/68/EEC.

NOTE: For specifics, about which standards have been applied, refer to the Declaration of Conformity of
the product on Harmonic website at Product Regulatory Compliance or contact Harmonic Compliance Team
at regulatory.compliance@harmonicinc.com

Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices – Class A

a. FCC Verification Statement (USA)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this
device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause
undesired operation.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a
commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction
manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this
equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case
users will be required to correct the interference at their own expense.
Connections between the Harmonic equipment and other equipment must be made in a
manner that is consistent with maintaining compliance with FCC radio frequency
emission limits. Modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by Harmonic may
void the authority granted to the user by the FCC to operate this equipment and you may
be required to correct any interference to radio or television communications at your own
expense.
b. ICES–003 Statement (Canada)
English: This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
French: Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
c. CE Declaration of Conformity (European Union)
This product has been tested in accordance too, and complies with the Low Voltage
Directive (2014/30/EU) and EMC Directive (2014/35/EU). The product has been
marked with the CE Mark to illustrate its compliance.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 282 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Electromagnetic Compatibility Notices – Class A
Information

d. VCCI Class A Warning

(Japan)

English translation of the notice above:

This is a Class A product based on the standard of the Voluntary Control Council for
Interference (VCCI) from Information Technology Equipment. If this equipment is used in a
domestic environment, it may cause radio interference. When such trouble occurs, the user
may be required to take corrective actions.
e. BSMI EMC Notice (Taiwan)

English translation of the notice above:

This is a Class A Information Product, when used in residential environment, it may cause
radio frequency interference, under such circumstances, the user may be requested to take
appropriate counter measures.
f. Class A Warning
(Korea)

English translation of the notice above:

This is a Class A device and is registered for EMC requirements for industrial use. The
seller or buyer should be aware of this. If this was sold or purchased by mistake, it
should be replaced with a residential-use type.
g. Class A Statement (China)

English translation of the notice above:

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 283 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Regulatory Compliance
Information

When labeled with the CCC marking, the product meets the applicable safety and EMC
requirements for China. This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment this
product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take
adequate measures.
h. Class A Warning – CISPR 22
(AS/NZS) Warning (English)
This is a class A product. In a domestic environment this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures.
Attention (French)
Il s'agit d'un produit de classe A. Dans un environnement local, ce produit peut entraîner
des perturbations radioélectriques, auquel cas l'utilisateur devra éventuellement prendre
des mesures adéquates.

Product Regulatory Compliance

Harmonic products are typically tested to the latest safety and electromagnetic compatibility
(EMC) specifications and test methods, and are marked with one or more of the following
regulatory/certification markings. Some of the certification markings will vary depending on what
certifier was used to obtain a certification.
Please visit Harmonic Product Regulatory Compliance page to view information on applied safety
& EMC standards and regulatory marks on Harmonic products. You can also email us at
regulatory.compliance@harmonicinc.com for assistance on regulatory compliance for Harmonic
products.

Product Regulatory Compliance

Markings
Table B–1:Regulatory Compliance Markings

Country/ Testing Standard/ Certification Regulatory

Product Marketing
Region Specification Type Mark Name

USA/ EN 60950- Safety NRTL (National

Canada 1:2006+A11:2009+A Recognized
1:2010+A12:2011; Test
CAN/CSA C22.2 No. Laboratory)
60950-1-
07+A1:2011/UL
60950-1:2011

USA/ FCC CFR 47 Part 15, EMC FCC Class A

Canada Class A Statement
ICES-003: Issue 5,
2012; Class A

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 284 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Regulatory Compliance Markings
Information

Table B–1:Regulatory Compliance Markings

Country/ Testing Standard/ Certification Regulatory

Product Marketing
Region Specification Type Mark Name

European RoHS: EN Safety and CE / Low

Union 50581:2012; EMC Voltage
EN55022:2010/ Directive
CISPR 22:2008;
EN55024:2010/
CISPR 24:2010;
EN61000-3-
2:2006+A1:2009+A
2:2009;
EN61000-3-3:2008;
Class A

Germany EN 60950-1; Safety GS

EN60825-1 (for laser)

Mexico NOM-019-SCFI-1998 Safety NOM

Taiwan CNS 14336-1:2010 Safety and BSMI

CNS 13438:2006; EMC Certification
Class A (RPC) Number
& Class A
Warning

Japan VCCI V-3/2013.04; EMC VCCI

CISPR 22:2008, Class
A

Australia AS/NZS Safety C-Tick

and New CISPR22:2009+A1:2
Zealand 010; Class A

Korea KN22 Class A and KN EMC KC

24

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 285 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Environmental Compliance
Information

Table B–1:Regulatory Compliance Markings

Country/ Testing Standard/ Certification Regulatory

Product Marketing
Region Specification Type Mark Name

China GB4943.1-2011 Safety and CCC

GB9254-2008 EMC
GB17625.1-
2012

India IS 13252 (Part 1): Safety BIS "Self Declaration - Conforming to

2010 Compulsory IS 13252 (Part 1):2010, R-
Registration XXXXXXXX"

Product Environmental Compliance

Harmonic manufactures high quality and innovative IT and telecommunications equipment, video
delivery infrastructure solutions and services for its customers worldwide. Harmonic is committed
to providing our customers with safe and environmentally friendly products that are compliant
with all relevant regulations, customer specifications, and environmental legislation, including the
directives described below.

EU RoHS
In July 2006, the European Union’s (EU) Directive (2002/95/EC) on the Restriction of the use of
certain Hazardous Substances (RoHS) in Electrical and Electronic Equipment (EEE) went into
effect, and in July, 2011, the European Union’s RoHS Recast Directive (2011/65/EU) also
known as RoHS II entered into force.
Harmonic understands the environmental risks associated with the substances covered by the
RoHS Directive and has committed to eliminating or reducing the use of these, as well as other
environmentally sensitive substances in our products. Harmonic also continues to comply with
the requirements under RoHS II.
For more information, please visit EU RoHS directive page at official EU website.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/rohs_eee/legis_en.htm
Restricted Substance Statement
Harmonic products contain less than the permitted limits for the six restricted substances except
where exemptions published in the RoHS2 Directive are applicable. This statement is based on
vendor-supplied analysis or material certifications, and/or lab test results of the component raw
materials used in the manufacture of Harmonic products.
Table B–2:Restricted Substances

Restricted Substance Permitted Limit*

Cadmium (Cd) < 0.01%

Lead (Pb) < 0.1%

Chromium (VI) (Cr (VI)) < 0.1%
Mercury (Hg) < 0.1%

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 286 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Environmental Compliance
Information

Table B–2:Restricted Substances

Restricted Substance Permitted Limit*

Polybrominated biphenyls < 0.1%
(PBBs)

Polybrominated diphenyl < 0.1%

ether (PBDE)

*Homogeneous material definition as per the EU Directive.

EU REACH
REACH (Registration, Evaluation, Authorization and restriction of Chemicals) (EC 1907/2006) is a
European Union’s regulation on chemicals and their safe use which came into force in June, 2007.
Harmonic supports the basic aim of REACH in improving the protection of human health and
environment through the better and earlier identification of intrinsic properties of chemical
substances. Harmonic products are considered “articles” under REACH; therefore, we are
required to provide recipients of our products with information on Substance of Very High
Concern (SVHC) present in concentration above 0.1% (w/w).
Substances in our products are not intended to be released under normal or reasonably
foreseeable conditions of use; therefore, the registration requirement in REACH Article 7(1) does
not apply to our products.
For more information, please visit REACH regulation page at official EU website.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/chemicals/reach/reach_en.htm

China RoHS
China’s regulation on restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances commonly (China
RoHS), is applicable to all Electronic and Information Products (EIPs) and parts sold in China
after March 01, 2007. China RoHS regulation restricts the use of the same six substances as
the European Union’s ROHS, but has requirements for product labeling and regulated
substance information disclosure.
Harmonic complies with China RoHS Phase I for labeling and information disclosure
requirements and continues to monitor new developments in China RoHS Phase II towards
substance restriction and certification program.
For more information, please visit China RoHS regulation page at official US export website.
http://www.export.gov/china/doingbizinchina/

China RoHS Disclosure Report

Below table shows the presence of hazardous substances, or elements in Harmonic products, if
the part is present.

该表显示哈雷公司产品中可能含有的有毒有害物质元配件的信息，除了来源于元配件供应商的物料成
分资料， 亦来自其它相关的机构与资料。哈雷产品不一定使用这些元配件。
This table shows those components where hazardous substances may be found in Harmonic
products based on, among other things, material content information provided by third party
suppliers. These components may or may not be part of the product.
除非特殊注明，哈雷公司产品的环保使用期限 均为 20 年。该环保使用期限的有效条件为：必须遵循

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 287 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Environmental Compliance
Information

该产品使用手 册的规定，对该产品进行使用或存储。
The Environmental Protective Use Period for Harmonic products is 20 years unless displayed
otherwise on the product. The EPUP period is valid only the products are operated or
when stored as per the conditions specified in the product
manual.
有毒有害物质或元素 (Hazardous Substance)
部件名称 (Part name)
铅 汞 镉 六价铬 多溴联苯 多溴二苯醚
(PB) (Hg) (Cd) (CrVI) (PBB) (PBDE)
印刷线路板
X O O O O O
(Printed Circuit Assemblies)

机械组件
X O O O O O
(Mechanical Subassemblies)

光学组件
X O O O O O
(Optical Subassemblies)

电源
X O O O O O
(Power Supplies)
缆线 / 线束
X O O O O O
(Cables, harnesses)

屏幕 / 显示器
X O O O O O
(Screens, Monitors)

金属零件
X O O O O O
(Metal Parts)

塑料 / 发泡材料
O O O O O O
(Plastics, foams)
电池
O O O O O O
(Batteries)

O: 表示在该部件的所有均质材料中，此类有毒有害物质的含量均小于 SJ/T11363-2006 标准所规定的限量。

O: Indicates the content of the toxic and hazardous substances at the homogeneous material level of the parts is below the limit defined in SJ/T11363 2006
standard.

X: 表示至少在该部件的某一均质材料中，此类有毒有害物质的含量超出 SJ/T11363-2006 标准规定的限量。

X: Indicates that the content of the toxic and hazardous substances in at least one of the homogeneous materials of the parts is above the limit defined in SJ/
T11363 2006 standard.

Other RoHS and REACH type Regulations

Harmonic will comply with RoHS and REACH type regulations evolving in other countries, if
they become relevant to our products or in markets where we sell our products.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 288 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Product Environmental Compliance
Information

Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)

European Parliament and the Council of the European Union’s WEEE Directive (2002/96/EC)
came into force on August, 2005 and, were more recently amended in July, 2012. This
directive encourages the reuse, recycling, and recovery of WEEE and to improve the
environmental performance of all operators involved in the life cycle of electrical and electronic
equipment, especially those dealing with WEEE. Harmonic ensures that all requirements for
registration, reporting, design and data tracking are complied with to meet the objectives of the
WEEE directive.
For more information, please visit WEEE directive page at official EU website.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/weee/legis_en.htm

Battery Directive
In September 2006, the European Union’s Directive 2006/66/EC (Battery Directive) came into
force with an aim to prohibit the sale of batteries and accumulators containing hazardous
substances and to set rules and promote collection, treatment, recycling and disposal of waste
batteries and accumulators. This directive applies to spent batteries collected together with
WEEE and requires their removal and separate collection. Once removed from WEEE, spent
batteries are governed by the Battery Directive. Harmonic uses lithium batteries in its products
and our responsibility under the Battery Directive is taken care of under our WEEE Take-Back
program.
For more information, please visit Batteries and Accumulators directive page at official EU
website.
http://ec.europa.eu/environment/waste/batteries/
Harmonic is committed to manufacturing environmentally safe products for the community, and
will make reasonable efforts and required adjustments to its practices, if necessary, to comply
with various environmental directives and industry initiatives on the elimination of hazardous
substances, labeling, marking, certification and registration as required in markets where we sell
our products.
Download Harmonic’s Environmental Compliance Statement at the following location:

http://www.harmonicinc.com/sites/default/filesEnvironmental%20Compliance%20Statement.pdf

WEEE Take-Back Request Program

In order to assist EU member states to preserve, protect and improve the quality of the
environment, protect human health and utilize natural resources prudently and rationally,
Harmonic strives to recycle in compliance with the WEEE Directive any of its products that
cannot be re-used.
Harmonic's customers should:
 Not discard equipment in household or office garbage
 Arrange proper recycling of unneeded equipment. For the take-back of Harmonic equipment,
customers must:
 Collect the information required to complete Harmonic's WEEE Take-Back Request form
 Complete and submit the online WEEE Take-Back Request form. Please note that
forms must be fully completed in order to prevent process delays
 Receive instant online confirmation indicating the reference number
 Receive the End of Life (EOL) asset return authorization number and instruction for
EOL asset return

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 289 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix B Safety and Regulatory Compliance Compliance with additional country specific environmental, safety and EMC standards:
Information

 Not ship EOL product to Harmonic without a Harmonic-provided EOL asset return
authorization number
The crossed-out wheeled bin symbol on a Harmonic-branded commercial product indicates that
the product should not be disposed of along with municipal waste, but invites our customers to
return the product to us under Harmonic’s WEEE Take-Back program for product disposal.

Harmonic will pay for the cost of shipping and will provide a Certificate of Recycling or a
Certificate of Destruction upon request. For more information on collection, reuse and recycling
or to initiate the WEEE take-back process, please complete the form at http://
www.harmonicinc.com/webform/weee-takeback-request or contact Harmonic Technical Assistance
Center (TAC) or email RMA team at rma.emea@harmonicinc.com.

Compliance with additional country specific environmental, safety

and EMC standards:
In addition to above listed standards and compliance regulations, Harmonic products may also
be compliant with other country specific environmental, safety and EMC requirements. Please
contact Harmonic Compliance Team at regulatory.compliance@harmonicinc.com or your local sales
representative for more information about compliance with particular country or standard.

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 290 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
 Appendix
C
Standard ES Types and
Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types
The following standards are used to define types of elementary stream:
Table C–1: Elementary stream types

Value Description
0x0 ITU-T | ISO/IEC Reserved

0x1 ISO/IEC 11172 Video

0x2 ITU-T Rec. H.262 | ISO/IEC 13818-2 Video or ISO/IEC 11172-2

constrained parameter video stream

0x3 ISO/IEC 11172 Audio

0x4 ISO/IEC 13818-3 Audio

0x5 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 private_sections

0x6 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 PES packets containing

private data

0x7 ISO/IEC 13522 MHEG

0x8 ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Annex A DSM CC

0x9 ITU-T Rec. H.222.1

0xA ISO/IEC 13818-6 type A

0xB ISO/IEC 13818-6 type B

0xC ISO/IEC 13818-6 type C

0xD ISO/IEC 13818-6 type D

0xE ISO/IEC 13818-1 auxiliary

0xF-0x7F ITU-T Rec. H.222.0 | ISO/IEC 13818-1 Reserved

0x80 - 0xFF User Private

H.1 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG)

The following MPEG standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:

Value Description
0x2 Video stream descriptor
0x3 audio stream descriptor

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 291 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
Appendix C Standard ES Types and Descriptors Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)

Value Description
0x4 hierarchy descriptor

0x5 registration descriptor

0x6 data stream alignment descriptor

0x7 target background grid descriptor

0x8 video window descriptor

0x9 CA descriptor
0xA ISO 639 descriptor

0xB system clock descriptor

0xC multiplex buffer utilization descriptor

0xD copyright descriptor

0xF private data indicator descriptor

0x10 smoothing buffer descriptor

0x12 IBP descriptor

H.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB)

The following DVB standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and
programs:

Value Description
0x51 Mosaic descriptor

0x52 Stream identifier descriptor

0x56 Teletext descriptor

0x59 Subtitling descriptor

0x5F Private data specifier

0x60 Service move descriptor

0x65 CA system descriptor

0x66 Data broadcast ID descriptor

© 2015 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. 292 ProStream 9000 Release 10.5, Rev A
© 2015 Harmonic lnc. All rights reserved.